U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
Information Products Division |
U.S. Patent Classification System - Classification Definitions
as of June 30, 2000
Patents classified in a subclass may be accessed by either clicking on
the subclass number
preceding each subclass definition or on the
" " icon, below.
( please note that patents for some subclasses may not be available )
For classification search strategies, please refer to the
Classification Index
Explanation of Data web page.
(definitions have been obtained from the
Patents ASSIST CD-ROM which
is produced by the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office
Electronic Products Branch)
Class 400
TYPEWRITING MACHINES
Class Definition:
This is the generic class for an apparatus wherein a user of
the apparatus causes an intelligible character* to be
imprinted on a record-medium* by a type-member* that is
impressed on the record-medium, said type-member being
selected from a plurality of different type-members, and the
selected type-members being impressed serially to form a
sequence of characters that record intelligible information.
This class includes a method of using the apparatus described
above.
(1) Note. The definition as written above is intended to
emphasize the major difference between this class (400) and
the class of printing. The difference is that as a general
rule in this class each character* is imprinted serially by a
type-member* that is selected from an assortment of
type-members, the assortment containing only one of each
type-member to be impressed, and the selection being made in
sequence to imprint one character after another to form a
word, and one word after another to form the text to be read.
In the printing class, on the other hand, a plurality of
type-members are arranged to be printed simultaneously to
form a print-line* or a page* or a plurality of pages of
printed text.
(2) Note. The word "intelligible" in the definition of this
class does not limit the character to a visible character. A
character that is invisible to the human eye can be
intelligible to a "scanner" that "reads", for example,
infrared light emanations, and thus be intelligible within
the definition stated above.
(3) Note. Explanatory note regarding placement of patents
within the class. A typewriter includes many elements, often
numbering in the hundreds and even thousands of elements.
Because of this, many patents in the typewriter art include
claims that recite elements of a typewriter that are named in
a claim for the purpose of setting forth the environment of
the inventive structure. In such patents, the mere naming of
various elements in a claim will not necessarily be the basis
of placing a patent having such a claim into the schedule as
an original patent. Original placement will be based upon
the inventive concept emphasized in a patent claim rather
than on the basis of all the elements that are merely named
in a claim.
LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS
The relationship of this class (400) to classes which warrant
specific mention is as follows:
Class 101, Printing, involves the imprinting on a
record-medium* of a multitude of character symbols
simultaneously to form a print-line* or a page* or a
plurality of pages of printed text. The significant
difference between this class (400) and Class 101 lies in the
term "simultaneously". In Class 101 plurality of type-face*
elements are assembled. If a plurality of occurrences of a
particular character are to be printed, a corresponding
number of type-faces representing that character are included
in the assemblage. When the entire assemblage of type-faces
is inked and impressed against a record-medium, all the
type-faces will be imprinted simultaneously. In this class
(400) only one type-face element is provided for each
character to be imprinted, and the type-faces are impressed
in sequence to form the text. Two exceptions should be
noted. In a stenos:graphic typewriter, the typist may select
two or more characters to be imprinted to form a syllable of
a word, and may then select two or more characters to form
another syllable of a word. One or more of the characters
selected for one syllable may be selected again to form
another syllable, but only one type-face for each character
to be imprinted is provided in the stenos:graphic typewriter.
In a logotype typewriter a plurality of type-face elements
may be preassembled to form a word or symbol, but the
logotype type-face is one of the type-face elements of the
typewriter, and the logotype type-face element is selected as
one of the type-face elements in the sequence of characters
to be imprinted serially. Various subcombinations of
elements are usable either in a Class 101 printing press or
in a typewriter of this class (400). Among such
subcombinations are a ribbon-feeding or ribbon-inking
mechanism, a record-medium feeding mechanism, etc., but the
placement of a patent to such subcombination will be governed
by the environment of the machine.
Class 178, Telegraphy, includes in subclasses 4 and 23
disclosures of printing telegraph systems that are similar in
some aspects to a typewriter. In general, Class 178 involves
a telegraphic system including one or more signal-sending
units, one or more signal-receiving units, and electrical
circuitry, the system being capable of (a) transmitting a
signal over great distances, or (b) boosting or amplifying
the signal, or (c) mixing signals that have been generated in
a plurality of sending units, transmitting the mixed signals
over a single line and unmixing the signals at a plurality of
receiving units so that each receiver will transcribe only
its own signal from the single line, or (d) selecting the
receiving units that will be controlled by the sending units.
Class 178 also provides, in various subclasses, for
subcombinations including key-board*, key* element, type
wheel, and other elements that are peculiar to printing
telegraph systems. This class (400) as related to Class 178,
involves a typewriter that is (a) directly coupled to a
second typewriter by electrical or mechanical linkage over a
short distance (e.g., "master-slave" relationship), or (b)
coupled by way of a "storage" or "memory" circuit to itself
or to a second typewriter (e.g., "input-output"
relationship), or (c) controlled to modify the typing signals
generated by a typist to create a text different from that
which would be produced by the unmodified generated signals
(e.g., by "justification" (see subclass 1). This class (400)
will also accept subcombinational aspects of a telegraphic
printer that embody typewriter subcombinations not provided
for in Class 178. Examples of such subcombinations include:
ribbon* feed, carriage* feed, record-medium feed, type-head*
structure, key-board mechanism, type-bar* action, tabulator
structure, etc.
Class 234, Selective Cutting (e.g., Punching), the
relationship of this class (400) to Class 234 is fully set
forth in the class definition of Class 234, in section V,
paragraph E. Reference is made to the relationship between
Class 234 and Class 400, Typewriting Machines, in that note.
Class 235, Registers, the relationship of this class (400) to
Class 235 is set forth in the "SEARCH CLASS" 400, Typewriting
Machines, that appears under the definition of Class 235,
subclass 60.
Class 346, Recorders, provides for an ink* jet means for
recording intelligence. This class (400) provides for a
typewriter structure in which the usual type-face* element
that impresses a character symbol against a record-medium is
replaced by an ink jet for imprinting a character symbol on a
record-medium. To be placed as an original into this class,
a patent should clearly recite the typewriter structure that
controls the ink jet to form characters successively.
Class 358, Facsimile and Static Presentation Processing,
includes in subclasses 1.1-1.18 disclosures involving a
data-processing system that generates a printout of the
results produced by the processing system. The significant
subject matter of such a system is proper for Class 358.
OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING MATERIAL HANDLING OR MATERIAL
FEEDING
See References to Other Classes for subcombinations that may
be included in a typewriter to feed a record-medium* or a
ribbon* or other sheetlike or weblike material. For a patent
to be placed as an original into this class (400) the claimed
subject matter of such patent should be clearly related to a
typewriter (e.g., be directed to one or more ink*-ribbon
spools in a typewriter, sheet, or web feeding involving
line-space* distances or format control in a typewriter,
etc.).
SEARCH NOTES TO OTHER CLASSES INCLUDING SUBCOMBINATIONS
USABLE IN A TYPEWRITER
See References to Other Classes for subcombinations that may
be included in a typewriter for various purposes needed
during the operation of a typewriter. For a patent to be
placed as an original into this class (400) the claimed
subject matter of such patent should be clearly related to a
typewriter (e.g., be directed to a device for cleaning a
type-face* of a typewriter, a bell for indicating the
occurrence of the end of a print-line* in a typewriter,
etc.).
REFERENCES TO OTHER CLASSES
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 246
include an attachment for cleaning. (Other Classes Including
Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter)
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 341 for a
copyholder that is not part of a typewriter, but which may be
used in conjunction with a typewriter for advancing material
that may be copied from during typing. (Class Including
Material Handling Or Material Feeding)
74, Machine Element or Mechanism, appropriate subclasses for
a linkage that is usable as an actuating mechanism of a
typewriter. (Other Classes Including Subcombinations Usable
In A Typewriter)
108, Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, appropriate
subclasses for a support for sheet or web material. (Class
Including Material Handling Or Material Feeding)
116, Signals and Indicators, subclass 148 and 200 for an
indicator or a bell. (Other Classes Including Subcombinations
Usable In A Typewriter)
118, Coating Apparatus, subclass 200 for coating apparatus
applicable to a typewriter to re-ink a ribbon*. (Other
Classes Including Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter)
221, Article Dispensing, appropriate subclasses and
especially subclass 33 for dispensing of a sheetlike
article. (Class Including Material Handling Or Material
Feeding)
222, Dispensing, appropriate subclasses for dispensing of
liquid. (Other Classes Including Subcombinations Usable In A
Typewriter)
226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate
subclasses for feeding of web material. (Class Including
Material Handling Or Material Feeding)
242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding appropriate subclasses
for the winding of web material onto a roll or the unwinding
of web material from a roll. (Class Including Material
Handling Or Material Feeding)
248, Supports, subclass 442.2 for a support for a
copyholder. (Class Including Material Handling Or Material
Feeding)
271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 8 for appropriate
sheet-feeding structure. (Class Including Material Handling
Or Material Feeding)
276, Typesetting, subclass 28 for justification in a type
setting machine. (Other Classes Including Subcombinations
Usable In A Typewriter)
281, Books, Strips, and Leaves, subclass 45 for a book or
leaf holder. (Class Including Material Handling Or Material
Feeding)
359, Optics: Systems (Including Communication) and Elements,
838 for a reflector usable in a typewriter. (Other Classes
Including Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter)
384, Bearings, appropriate subclasses for guide structure
usable in a typewriter. (Other Classes Including
Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter)
434, Education and Demonstration, subclass 176, 202, and 227
for a key-board* for teaching or learning purposes. (Other
Classes Including Subcombinations Usable In A Typewriter)
462, Books, Strips, and Leaves for Manifolding, appropriate
subclasses and especially subclass 73 for the holding and
formation of books, strips and leaves for manifolding. (Class
Including Material Handling Or Material Feeding)
493, Manufacturing Container or Tube From Paper; or Other
Manufacturing From a Sheet or Web, subclass 411, 413, 430,
433, and 451 for the folding of zigzag or fan folded
material. (Class Including Material Handling Or Material
Feeding)
492, Roll or Roller, for a roll, per se, not elsewhere
provided for, especially 49 for concentric layered annular
roll structure and subclasses 57+ for single annular member
roll structure. (Other Classes Including Subcombinations
Usable In A Typewriter)
GLOSSARY:
In the typewriter art certain words and terms have acquired
distinct and specialized meanings. The following Glossary
will define and explain the terms so as to facilitate
understanding of, and simplify, the definitions of the
subclasses to follow. Throughout the class definition and
the subclass definitions, an asterisk (*) following a word or
term will indicate that it has been defined in this section.
For a term that is defined in this Glossary and used in the
title or definition of a subclass, the individual words of
the term are separated by a hyphen (-) to indicate that the
term is alphabetized in this Glossary as if it were a single
word.
APRON
A member closely adjacent to the cylindrical platen* of a
typewriter that serves to guide a record-medium* into close
contact with the platen. It is usually a thin sheet of
relatively rigid material having a length dimension
approximating the length of the platen and is arcuately
shaped to approximately the radius of the platen whereby it
conforms to part of the periphery of the platen. It is
usually located underneath the platen and closely adjacent
thereto so that the record-medium is guided between the apron
and the platen to be partially wrapped around the platen. The
apron may also serve as a mounting for feed-rollers* that
cooperate with the platen to move the record-medium in a
line-space* direction.
AUXILIARY-RECORD-PROGRAM
A set of instructions used in a programmed-control-system* of
a typewriter, which set of instructions may be readily
removed from the typewriter so that another set of
instructions may be inserted into the typewriter to perform a
different or a modified sequence of typing functions.
CARRIAGE
A mechanism for supporting a record-medium* or for supporting
a type-head-carrier*, which mechanism is provided with means
to effect relative movement between the record-medium and a
type-head-carrier that is at the print-point*, the movement
occurring along a line that is parallel to the print-line*.
A "carriage-feed" means effects carriage movement in the
direction that causes character* symbols to be imprinted in
succession, thus "carriage feed" also effects
character-space* and word-space* distances. In most
typewriters used for typing a European language said
direction is from left to right, but there are some
typewriters capable of imprinting successive characters from
right to left even though the words will be read from left to
right, and there are other typewriters intended to imprint
successive characters from right to left because the words
will be read from right to left. In any event, the
carriage-feed direction is always the direction that causes
characters to be imprinted in succession. In some typewriters
the record-medium is held to a platen that is mounted on a
carriage, and the "platen carriage" (together with the
record-medium) is moved relative to the main frame of the
typewriter. Each successively actuated type-member* is
impressed at a print-point that is stationary relative to the
main frame. The platen-carriage (e.g., right to left) is
opposite to the direction in which successive characters are
imprinted and read (e.g., left to right). (The directions
mentioned apply except as noted above.) In some typewriters
the record-medium is held to a platen that does not move
during the imprinting of a print-line. The type-member is on
a type-head* that is on a type-head-carrier that is mounted
on a carriage, and the type-head carriage is moved relative
to the main frame of the typewriter. Each successively
actuated type-member is impressed at a print-point that is
moved relative to the main frame. The "type-head carriage"
movement (e.g., left to right) is in the direction in which
successive characters are imprinted and read (e.g., left to
right). In both forms of typewriter noted above, the term
carriage feed is applied to movement of the carriage in the
direction that effects imprinting of successive characters
and words*. Thus, for a platen-carriage typewriter, carriage
feed is usually from right to left (but note the exception
above), whereas for a type-head-carriage typewriter, carriage
feed is usually from left to right. Either typewriter is
also capable of carriage reversal, which is in the direction
opposite to carriage feed, and is used for "carriage return"
(e.g., to start a new print-line) or is used for carriage
backspace (e.g., to move a carriage a distance equivalent of
one or more character-spaces in a reverse direction).
CARRIAGE-RACK
A bar having teeth or notches along one of its sides, which
bar is affixed to a carriage*, and which teeth or notches
cooperate with a pawl* or a pinion gear to enable or cause
movement of the bar and the carriage to which it is affixed.
There may be provision for adjustment of the bar relative to
the carriage, but the adjustment is usually made at the time
of manufacture of the typewriter, or may be made subsequently
during a period of time when the typewriter is not being used
for typing. When a carriage-rack cooperates with a pawl, it
acts as a ratchet*, and for a discussion of how a pawl and
ratchet operates as a carriage-feed mechanism, see the
definition of pawl in this Glossary,
CASE-SHIFT
Case-shift is the relative movement between a record-medium*
and a type-face* or a type-die* that is at the print-point*,
which movement is effected by pressing a case-shift key*
concurrently with the pressing of a character* key. In most
typewriters, selection of which character is to be imprinted
in sequence is made by selection of the character keys. In a
typewriter with a case-shift, a choice of upper-case* (i.e.,
"CAPITAL" letter) or lower-case* (i.e., "small" letter) form
of the selected letter is possible by concurrently pressing
or not pressing the case-shift key. Analogous choice of
other characters that appear on the various character keys is
also possible with the case-shift key. In some typewriters
case-shift is effected by moving into one of two positions
(or in other typewriters one of three positions) any of (a) a
type-bar-segment*, or (b) a platen, or (c) a type-head* that
carries at least two fixedly related type-face elements; in
all of these the movement occurs in a plane substantially
parallel to the plane occupied by the type-face at the
print-point. In some typewriters a type-head is on a
type-head-carrier* and includes a type-set-assemblage*
thereon, and in such typewriters case-shift is effected by
moving the type-head so that the chosen type-face (i.e.,
upper-case or lower-case) will be impacted against the
record-medium. In some typewriters, case-shift may also be
used to imprint a character in a different font* or a
character in a different language for specialized uses.
CHARACTER
A single symbol imprinted on a record-medium* by a
type-member* and intended to be read by the human eye, or
intended to be "read" by a mechanical or electrical scanner,
for the purpose of conveying intelligence to the reader
(i.e., human reader or mechanical "reader"). It forms one of
the elements needed to form a word*. In most typewriters a
character is formed by impressing a single type-member
against a record-medium, usually via an inking means.
However, a single character may also be formed by impressing
a plurality of different type-members either simultaneously
or successively in the same zone or area of the
record-medium. A character may be (a) one of the letters in
an alphabet, either upper-case* (i.e., "CAPITAL" letter), or
lower-case* (i.e., "small" letter), or (b) one of the numeral
digits (i.e., "0" through "9"), or (c) a punctuation mark
{e.g., comma (,), colon (:), etc.}, or (d) one of a variety
of signs and symbols incorporated into a typewriter intended
for general usage {e.g., dollar sign ($), ampersand symbol
(&), etc.}. The number or variety of characters that a
particular typewriter may imprint is limited only by the size
of the typewriter and the area allotted to the key-board* and
the type-members of that typewriter.
CHARACTER-SPACE
Character-space is the distance that the carriage* or the
record-medium* is moved to effect the separation of one
imprinted character* from a subsequently imprinted character
of the same word*. In most alphabets the width of one
character (i.e., the distance that it extends along the
print-line*) differs from the width of another character. In
many typewriters the character-space distances are in equal
increments of carriage feed. Due to the fact that
successively imprinted characters have different widths, the
spaces between the successive characters are unequal. To
compensate for different widths, some typewriters are
provided with mechanism to vary the carriage feed. This
mechanism causes the carriage feed to be proportional to the
width of the character imprinted by a type-face*. The
unequal increments of carriage feed produced by this
mechanism results in equal spaces between successively
imprinted characters, thereby improving the uniformity and
appearance of the typing.
COLLATING-TABLE
A platform or support used while a plurality of sheets or
webs are arranged or assembled according to an orderly
system. The sheets or webs may include record-medium* pieces
or transfer-medium* pieces in any desired order or sequence
and the assemblage of pieces comprises that which is to be
typed on. The term "collating" as used in this class (400)
is used to describe a simple structure that is used for
collating, usually manually. It differs somewhat from the
term collating as applied to a machine that accomplishes a
similar result of arranging or assembling plural sheets or
webs.
CONDENSED-BILLING
A term used in the typewriter industry for the production of
a condensed or summary record of a succession of typed
documents (e.g., bills or numerical data). The operation
includes the typing of plural copies (e.g., an "original
copy" and one or more "carbon copies", or duplicate "original
copies") simultaneously on plural record-medium* pieces. At
least one of the pieces is intended to be complete as to
heading, address, and other information that is to be sent to
one user. At least another piece is to be retained by the
typist, and is not required to be complete; that is, it may
omit much of the information, but may be a composite or
summary or condensed record of the information that is to be
sent. The record-medium on which the condensed-billing is
typed is therefore moved in line-space* distances that differ
from the line-space distances of the complete record medium.
DENOMINATIONAL-STOP
A component of the carriage* mechanism that causes stopping
of the carriage in any of selected denominational column
positions. In a denominational column a sequence of numerical
digits is imprinted on one print-line* and further sequences
of numeral digits are imprinted in successive print-lines,
one print-line below the previous print-line. The
distinguishing characteristic of a denominational column is
that the decimal point of successive print-lines of numeral
digits is in vertical array, or in the instance where the
decimal point of successive numbers is not actually
imprinted, the "units" digit of the successive numbers is in
vertical array. Thus the position where the carriage will be
stopped to imprint each of a succession of numbers will
depend on whether the first digit of a sequence of numeral
digits is to be a "hundreds" digit, or a "tens" digit, etc.
A denominational-stop is usually a "counter stop" (see the
discussion under the definition of tab-rack* in this
Glossary).
FEED-ROLLER
A rotatable element having a cylindrical or cylindroidal
periphery that contacts a surface of a sheet or web of
record-medium* material or transfer-medium* material and
enables or causes movement of the sheet or web. Usually a
feed-roller cooperates with a second element and the sheet or
web lies between the feed-roller and the second element, the
opposite surfaces of the sheet or web being closely adjacent
to the corresponding surfaces of the feed-roller and the
second element and in nonsliding contact therewith. When the
second element is a platen* the feed-roller serves as a
"pressure roller" to urge the sheet or web toward the platen,
and the platen is rotated to cause feed movement of the sheet
or web. When the second element is another feed-roller
either or both of the feed-rollers may be driven for
rotation, the rollers being rotated in opposite rotational
directions to cause feed movement, and the two feed-rollers
cooperate to form a feed-roller couple.
FONT
A complete assortment of type in the same style and size to
imprint character* symbols having a substantially uniform
appearance. Examples of font include elite and pica (both
refer to size of type), italic (i.e., having slope to the
right), and cursive (i.e., having flowing lines connecting
individual characters in a style resembling handwriting),
these being only a few of the fonts used in various
typewriters.
FUNCTION
In general, an operation performed on or by a typewriter
during use of the typewriter for typing. As used by the
typewriter industry, however, the term "function" is limited
to an operation other than (a) impressing a type-member*
against a record-medium* to imprint a character* (which
thereby concurrently effects a character-space*), or (b)
effecting a word-space*. Examples of typewriter operations
considered by the industry to be functions are: backspace,
carriage return, case-shift*, tabular stopping, line-space*
(i.e., for record-medium feed), ribbon feed, and similar
typewriter movements.
INK
A substance (usually fluid, may be viscous or solid) that is
applied to the surface of a record-medium* in the
configuration of a typed character* symbol to make the
character visible to a reader of the typed text. An
important property of ink is its ability to form a
"permanent" symbol, that is, a symbol that is not easily
erased (or erased only with great difficulty), and it is this
property that aids the production of an original copy of the
typed text. (See the definition of transfer-medium* in this
Glossary, section III, for a discussion of the difference
between original copy and carbon copy.) A fluid ink may be
applied directly to a type-face*, from which type-face the
ink is directly imprinted onto a record-medium. A viscous
ink may be applied to the record-medium via an
ink-impregnated ribbon*, and the ink therein will "flow" by
capillary action from unused portions of the ribbon into the
used portions of the ribbon. A solid ink may be applied via
a so-called "carbon-ink" ribbon, which is often a single-use
or one-use ribbon because all or most of the coating of the
ribbon is imprinted onto the record-medium when a type-face
is impacted thereagainst. A "hecto-s:graphic" ink is a
particular form of ink that is soluble and is used to form a
"master" plate used in a "spirit duplicating" copying
process.
KEY
An element on a typewriter, located on a key-board*, which
element is pressed to cause either (a) the actuation of a
type-member* to imprint a character* that corresponds to the
selected key, or (b) the actuation of a selected function* of
the typewriter. In a manual typewriter a key is usually
pressed by a finger of a user, and the movement of the
selected key is transmitted via a system of levers and links
into movement of a corresponding type-member actuator or
function actuator. In some typewriters and external power
source assists the actuation. In other typewriters keys are
pressed successively in response to signals to the typewriter
by a human or mechanical operator. The key referred to in
(a) above (i.e., a character key) also causes a
character-space* movement of the carriage* as well as
actuation of the type-member.
KEY-BOARD
That portion of a typewriter which is located so as to face
and be adjacent to the user of a typewriter, and containing
the key* elements that are to be pressed in succession to
produce a text that is being typed, or pressed as needed to
actuate a particular function* of the typewriter.
LINE-SPACE
The distance caused by relative movement between a
record-medium* and a print-point* of a type-member* against
the record-medium, which movement effects separation of one
print-line* of typed text from a subsequently imprinted line
of typed text on the same page* of text. It is effected by
incremental relative movement that occurs in a direction
perpendicular to the direction in which a print-line is
formed. In most typewriters the type- member is impressed in
substantially the same area of the typewriter and the
record-medium is effectively held to a platen* which moves
incrementally between successive print-lines, but in some
typewriters the type-member and its actuating mechanism moves
in a corresponding direction in incremental movements between
successive print-lines. Thus, in most typewriters, line-space
movement is a specific form of record-medium movement, but
line-space movement is a determinate, incremental movement in
selected units of distance or in multiples or fractions
thereof. If a unit of distance is considered as one
line-space, the multiples would include two or three
line-spaces and the fractions would include one-half, one and
one-half, or two and one-half line-spaces, all these
distances being selected by the user of a typewriter
according to the needs of the user. The most significant
aspect of line-space movement is that it is related to a
preceding or succeeding print-line on the record-medium as
distinguished from record-medium movement which is not
related to a print-line, but rather is an indeterminate
movement.
LOWER-CASE
A "small" letter, similar in appearance to this text, as
opposed to upper-case*. The names lower-case and upper-case
are derived from the printing art during the period when
type-faces* were handpicked and handset, the type being
picked from a tray in which the capital or upper-case type
were held in compartments physically located above the
compartments for the small or lower-case type.
MAGNETIC
A property of nature resulting in attraction or orientation
of a ferrous material relative to a body having such a
property. Examples of such a body include the earth, a
loadstone, and a coil of wire in an electrical circuit, all
of which have, or can generate, a magnetic field. Magnetism
is used to produce a force, as in a magnetic solenoid, or to
transmit a force, as in a magnetic clutch. Magnetic also
describes a property inherent in an auxiliary-record-program*
containing ferrous particles capable of being oriented or
reoriented relative to the auxiliary record, the orientation
of the particles being sensed to effect a typing operation in
response to the sensing.
MARGIN
The distance from an edge of the record-medium* to the
closest character* symbol of a print-line* to that edge. The
term is most usually used when a plurality of print-lines are
typed and the first imprinted characters of each of the
print-lines are all equally spaced from the edge. When
typing any language that is read from left to right, the left
margin is the distance from the left edge to these first
characters and will usually be parallel to that edge, whereas
the right margin is the distance of the right edge to the
last characters of the successive print-lines. However,
because the number of characters in a print-line is subject
to chance, the right margin will usually not be equally
spaced from the right edge unless "justification" is
performed. For a discussion of justification, see (1) Note
to the definition of subclass 1 below.
MARGIN-STOP
A member that is used to stop the movement of a carriage*
when the carriage reaches the margin* of the record-medium*.
The margin-stop of a platen* carriage (see the definition of
carriage in this Glossary) is usually mounted on the platen
carriage for movement therewith and cooperates with a stop
fixed to the frame of the typewriter, whereas the margin-stop
of a "typehead-carriage" (see the definition of carriage in
this Glossary) is usually mounted on the frame of the
typewriter and cooperates with a stop mounted on the
type-head carriage for movement therewith, but in either
typewriter one margin-stop may be set for various margin
distances for the left margin and another margin-stop may be
set for various margin distances for the right margin.
PAGE
A unit of printed text corresponding to that which would
appear on one leaf or sheet of a book, newspaper, or
document. It usually refers to a sheet of text, but in the
instance where text is imprinted on a web (i.e., of
indeterminate-length material), it refers to that length of
web which will subsequently be cut to form a sheet of
determinate length.
PAPER-FINGER
A member that is in substantial contact with a platen* or
with a record-medium* that is supported or backed by the
platen, which member thereby ensures contact of a
record-medium with the platen. It is usually an elongated
element, and in those typewriters wherein the platen is
cylindrical the paper-finger is arcuate and conforms to the
periphery of the platen for a substantial length of the
paper-finger in order to hold the record-medium to the
platen.
PAWL
A moveable member having a protruding portion that engages a
notch between two adjacent teeth of a ratchet* to cause or
enable intermittent movement of the ratchet. The movement of
a pawl is usually two-way, that is, oscillation or
reciprocation, and the protruding portion of the pawl engages
a notch between two adjacent teeth of the ratchet and moves
relative to the ratchet over or around one of the teeth to
engage a notch between the next two adjacent teeth. In one
form of pawl and ratchet mechanism, the pawl is driven while
engaged in a notch between the teeth to thereby drive the
ratchet, and then is retracted to reengage a notch between
the next teeth. In another form of pawl and ratchet
mechanism, the ratchet is urged to be moved, but its movement
is restrained by the pawl; movement of the pawl momentarily
releases the ratchet for movement of the ratchet, and return
of the pawl to a notch between the next teeth again restrains
the ratchet. In either mechanism a plurality of pawls, or a
pawl with a plurality of protruding portions may be used
alternately.
PITCH
The term "pitch" in the typewriter art derives from its usage
in mechanics or machinery, where it refers to the distance
between two things in series, e.g., two adjacent threads of a
screw or two adjacent teeth of a toothed wheel or rack, etc.
As used in the typewriter art, "pitch" refers to a
line-space* distance or to a character-space* distance, as
such distances are caused by mechanical elements in the
typewriter. Some typewriters are capable of imprinting
different character* sizes due to easily replaceable
type-head* elements. In order to maintain a proper or
pleasing appearance to the type text, it is necessary, when
such a change in character size is made, also to change the
character-space and line-space distances in proper proportion
to that of the character size. Such a typewriter is
therefore also capable of having the pitch changed when
character size is changed.
PLATEN
An element that serves as a support or backing for a
record-medium* while a type-member* is impressed against the
record-medium and thereby prevents movement of the
record-medium during impression; or an element that serves as
a support or backing for a record-medium and also moves the
record-medium toward the type-member for impression of the
type-member against the record-medium. Although from the
derivation of the word "platen" it should comprise a flat or
planar plate, in the typewriter art it is not so limited. In
most typewriters the platen is a cylinder having a generally
smooth surface, and the record-medium is partially wrapped
around the periphery of the cylinder. In use the cylinder is
rotated until the location of the record-medium corresponds
to the desired location of the print-line* to be imprinted
thereon, and after the desired line has been imprinted, the
cylinder is rotated an increment corresponding to a desired
line-space*, thereby moving the record-medium. Some
typewriters do include a flat platen, which may be a plate
having dimensions corresponding to the record-medium (i.e.,
sheet), or may be a bar platen having dimensions
corresponding to the height of a character* and the length of
a print-line, or may be an anvil having dimensions
corresponding to the height and width of a single character.
PRINT-LINE
A single row of imprinted, spaced character* symbols and
word* groups that is part of the text being typed. It is
usually a straight row, but particular characters of the line
may be offset therefrom, as, for example, to imprint
subscript (i.e., slightly below the line) or superscript
(i.e., slightly above the line), or to imprint a mathematical
or chemical formula without negating its characteristics as a
line. It is usually formed and read across a page, either
from left to right as in European languages, or from right to
left, as in Semitic languages, but may also be formed and
read parallel to one of the side margins* of a page* (i.e.,
"up" or "down"), as in some Oriental languages.
PRINT-POINT
Print-point is the typewriter industry term for the area or
spot on the record-medium* that a type-member* is impressed
against to imprint a character* on the record-medium. The
print-point may be fixed or movable relative to a typewriter
main frame as discussed in the definition of carriage* in
this Glossary.
PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM
Means for regulating the operation of a typewriter to perform
a predetermined sequence of operations for typing, which
means include a set of instructions which may be replaced or
modified at will, to which instructions the typewriter
mechanism responds by performing the sequence of operations.
The instructions may be in the form of a tangible article
such as a tape or card or disc with visible or invisible
indicia thereon, or may be in the form of an intangible
"computer program" including a "memory" and related
circuitry, but in any event, must be related to the operation
of a typewriter to be considered for this class.
RATCHET
A movable member having teeth thereon and at least one notch
between the teeth, which notch is engaged by a protruding
portion of a pawl* to cause or enable intermittent movement
of the ratchet. The manner in which a pawl and ratchet
mechanism is used in a typewriter is discussed under the
definition of pawl in this Glossary, section III. Ratchet
teeth may be part of a "ratchet wheel" or of a "ratchet
rack", and the action of the pawl is similar in both
instances. However, since a ratchet wheel is circular, its
motion will be a one-way rotational intermittent motion; and
since a ratchet rack is linear, its motion will be a one-way
rectilinear intermittent motion.
RECORD-MEDIUM
A piece of material, usually paper but not limited to paper,
on which material is recorded an imprint of a type-member*
that is impressed against the material to form a character*
to be read. The material may be a relatively thin "sheet"
having a determinate width and a determinate length, or may
be a "web" having a determinate width and an indeterminate
length. The recording is usually by way of an ink* that
coats the material in the form of a line representing a
character; but other kinds of recording may be done, as, for
example, embossing, which deforms the surface of the material
to raise or lower the surface into a line representing the
character, or perforating, which punches a plurality of holes
in the material that taken together form a representation of
a character.
RIBBON
A piece of elongated and relatively thin transfer-medium*
material impregnated with, or carrying, ink* that is to be
applied to a record-medium*, which material is interposed
between the record-medium and a type-face* that is at the
print-point*. When the type-face is impressed against the
record-medium (with the ribbon therebetween) a portion of the
ink on the ribbon will be transferred to the record-medium to
form a readable character* symbol corresponding to the symbol
on the type-face that was impressed against the
record-medium. Although in most typewriters the ribbon is an
elongated relatively narrow strip of material, these
dimensions are not critical in its usage as a ribbon. (For
example, a ribbon may be narrow and sufficiently short to be
held in the hand of a typist while being temporarily
positioned adjacent to the print-point, or a ribbon may be
elongated and as wide as the record-medium to be typed on.)
What is critical in its usage as a ribbon for making an
original copy is (a) its location directly between the
record-medium and the type-face that is at the print-point,
and (b) the use of a "permanent" or not easily erasable ink;
the combination forms an original copy of the typed text, in
contrast to a carbon copy. (See the definitions of
transfer-medium and ink in this Glossary for a discussion of
carbon copy). Among the various forms of ribbon used in a
typewriter are: (a) a fabric ribbon coated or impregnated
with "permanent" ink, the ribbon being reusable many times or
until the ink therein is depleted, and producing an original
copy; (b) a carbon-ink ribbon coated with permanent ink, the
ribbon being usually a single-use ribbon due to the operation
wherein all or most of the coating is deposited on the
record-medium during the impact of a type-face thereagainst,
and producing an original copy (see the definition of
transfer-medium in this Glossary, for a discussion of the
difference between the permanent ink used in a carbon-ink
ribbon, and the carbon coating of a "carbon-paper"
transfer-medium); (c) a "hectos:graphic" ribbon that uses a
soluble ink and produces a "master" plate subsequently used
in a spirit duplicating copy process; (d) a carbon-paper
ribbon coated with a substance containing carbon or other
pigment to produce a carbon copy that is easily erasable; (e)
a "correction" ribbon that is used to correct an error in
typing as discussed in the definition of subclass 697 below.
It should be noted that in early typewriter technology the
term "ribbon" usually referred only to a fabric ribbon
mentioned above; therefore, unless a disclosure particularly
describes a ribbon by an intended function or specific
coating, it should be assumed that a fabric ribbon is
disclosed.
SPACE-BAR
An element on a typewriter, located on a keyboard*, which
element is pressed to cause a carriage-feed movement of the
carriage* without an imprint of a character*, thereby to
separate one word* from another word on a print-line*.
TAB
A tab is an abbreviated form of the term "tabular", which
term refers to a columnar arrangement of character* symbols
on a page* of text. A "column" of text is formed by
imprinting a particular symbol on one print-line* and
subsequently imprinting the same or another particular symbol
on another print-line directly below the first print-line
(i.e., equally spaced from one of the side edges of the
record-medium*), and repeating the typing until a plurality
of print-lines have been formed, all of which are in vertical
array. The particular symbol may be the first letter of the
first word* in each of the successively imprinted
print-lines, and two or more columns are usually arranged in
such a "column-set" arrangement, each of the columns being
arrayed at a preset distance from an edge of the
record-medium. The particular symbol may be the decimal point
or the "units" digit of a set of numeral digits representing
a number; this arrangement is termed "denominational". The
terms "column" and "tabular" are also discussed in (1) Note
and (2) Note to subclass 284, the term "denominational" is
also discussed in (1) Note to subclass 285, and the term
column set is discussed in (3) Note to subclass 284 and
defined in subclass 285.1. It should also be noted that, in
some disclosures, the term "tab" has been used as an
abbreviation of an element which is better known as a
"tab-stop" element and is discussed in this Glossary under
tab-rack*.
TAB-RACK
A component of the carriage* mechanism that causes stopping
of the carriage in any of selected tabular (see tab* in this
Glossary) positions. A tab-rack is an elongated member
extending parallel to the direction of carriage movement and
having a length substantially the same as the extent of
carriage movement. On the tab-rack a plurality of "tab-stop"
elements are mounted, each of said elements being movable
transversely of the length of the tab-rack form a "clear"
position at which the element is passive to a "set" position
at which the element is able to cooperate with a
"counter-stop" element. In operation, relative movement
between the tab-rack and the counter stop is effected in the
lengthwise direction of the tab-rack until a set tab stop
abuts against the counter stop. Usually the tab-rack is
connected to the carriage and its tab stop abuts a stationary
counter stop, thereby stopping the carriage. The same result
may be achieved by mounting the counter stop on the carriage
and abutting the counter stop against a set tab stop on a
stationary tab-rack, thereby stopping the carriage. A
plurality of counter stops may be provided, one of which
counter stops may be set to stop the carriage in a preset
column or denominational position. A typewriter capable of
tabular operation is provided with at least three key*
elements for regulating the operation. One of the keys,
labelled "set" (or a variant thereof) is depressed by the
typist to move a selected tab-stop element from its passive
position to its set position on the tab-rack. Another key,
labelled "tab" (or a variant thereof), or unlabeled but
having a distinctive shape, is depressed by the typist to
concurrently (a) release the carriage from its normal
carriage-feed mechanism to enable unrestrained movement of
the carriage, and (b) set a counter stop into a position
where it will abut against the set tab stop when the counter
stop and tab stop engage one another, whereby the movement of
the carriage will be stopped in the tabular position. A
third key, labelled "clear" (or a variant thereof), is
depressed by the typist to move any of the previously set tab
stops back to its passive position on the type-rack.
TOGGLE-LINKAGE
An assemblage of at least two links, pitmans, bars, or struts
and at least three pivots, an end of one link being connected
to an end of the other link by a pivot that is common to both
links. Each of the links also has a pivot at the end remote
from the common pivot, which common or intermediate pivot is
movable from a first (or "broken") position at which the
common pivot is not in line with the other two pivots to a
second (or "straightened") position at which the common pivot
is substantially in line with the other two pivots, or which
common pivot is movable from said second position to said
first position. Such movement is accomplished by a force
applied to the common pivot in a direction approximately at
right angles to either link, thereby moving the remote pivots
relatively away from each other (i.e., when the common pivot
moves to the second position) or relatively toward each other
(i.e., when the common pivot moves to the first position).
TRANSFER-MEDIUM
A piece of material, relatively thin as compared to its other
dimensions, and flexible so as to conform to various
configurations as required in a typewriter, which material is
impregnated or coated on one or both of its opposite surfaces
with a preparation of ink* or gelatin or other
substance-containing carbon or other pigment that is capable
of being transplaced from a surface of said material onto a
surface of an adjacent record-medium*. Among the various
forms of transfer-medium used in a typewriter are: (a) a
"permanent" ink transfer-medium in the form of an elongated,
narrow ribbon*, a wide ribbon, a disc, etc., all of which
have the property that the character* symbol imprinted with
the use of this transfer-medium is not easily erased, thereby
producing an "original copy" text; (b) a "carbon-paper"
transfer-medium, so called because one of its surfaces is
coated with a substance containing carbon or other pigment
having the property that the character imprinted with this
transfer-medium is easily erased, thereby producing a "carbon
copy" text; (c) a "hectos:graphic" ink transfer-medium, using
an ink that is soluble in a particular solvent and is used to
form a "master" plate that is subsequently used in a "spirit
duplicating" copying process, and (d) a "correction"
transfer-medium that is coated with a substance containing a
pigment of the same color as that of the record-medium, and
is used to correct an error in typing (as discussed in the
definition of subclass 697 below).
TYPE-BAR
An elongated member having at one end a type-member* (i.e., a
type-die* or a type-face*) element and at its other end a
connection to one or more key* elements. In most manual
type-writers, the number of type-bars corresponds to the
number of keys provided, and the type-bars are pivoted to a
type-bar-segment* so that the various type-faces are all
impressed at approximately the same print-point*, but many
variations of the construction are to be found. The
type-bars may be pivoted to individual linkages, or may be
slidable to print position. In some typewriters a single key
may actuate a plurality of type-bars; in others, a plurality
of keys may be depressed simultaneously to actuate a single
type-bar; and in others (e.g., stenos:graphic typewriters),
there may be a plurality of character* symbols simultaneously
imprinted.
TYPE-BAR-SEGMENT
A type-bar-segment is an arcuate member that serves to
support all the type-bar* members for pivotal motion so that
each of the type-member* elements carried by the type-bar
members will be impressed onto the record-medium* at
approximately the same print-point*. In some manual
typewriters the type-bar-segment is moved to effect
case-shift*. (This occurs because the type-member (i.e.,
type-face* or type-die*) that is at the print-point has been
moved as a result of moving the type-bar-segment, so that an
upper-case* or a lower-case* form of character* symbol is
imprinted on the record-medium according to the choice of the
typist.) The difference between a type-bar-segment and a
type-face-carrier* (which also permits a type-bar to move
relative thereto) is that a type-face-carrier moves both for
selection of a character and for choice of upper-case of
lower-case, whereas a type-bar-segment moves only for choice
of upper-case or lower-case.
TYPE-DIE
An element that is impressed against a record-medium* to
deform or pierce the surface of the record-medium into a
representation of a character*. It is that portion of a
type-member* that projects from the body of the type-member
and contacts the surface of the record-medium to raise or
lower the contacted surface relative to the uncontracted
surface into a line representing a character, or to form one
or more perforations in the contacted surface, which
perforations taken together represent a character.
TYPE-FACE
An element that is impressed against a record-medium* to
imprint a line representing a character*. It is that portion
of a type-member* that projects from the body of the
type-member, and contacts the surface of the record-medium to
form the character by ink* applied to the type-face and
transferred to the record-medium, or by ink applied via an
ink ribbon* or similar transfer material that lies between
the type-face and the surface of the record-medium.
TYPE-FACE-CARRIER
A type-face-carrier is a mechanism on which is mounted a
plurality of type-member* elements (i.e., type-face* or
type-die*) for movement of any one type-member relative to
the remainder of the type-members mounted thereon. Usually a
group of type-faces comprising a type-set-assemblage* is
mounted on a type-face-carrier, face-carrier, and the
type-face-carrier is capable of various kinds of movement. A
typist will select one key* element from among the many key
elements available, causing the type-face-carrier to move to
a position at which the selected type-face will impact
against a record-medium* to imprint the selected character*
symbol (e.g., a particular letter, or a particular number,
etc.) on the record-medium. A typist may choose to effect
case-shift* or not effect case-shift, thereby to choose from
the character symbols available on one key element the one
symbol (e.g., the upper-case* or the lower-case* form of the
same letter, etc.) thereby causing the type-face-carrier to
move to a position at which the chosen type-face will imprint
the chosen symbol. The mechanism also causes or enables
relative movement between the type-face and the record-medium
(e.g., movement of the type-face toward the print-point*) to
imprint the selected or the chosen character or symbol on the
record-medium. (See this Glossary, section III, under the
definitions of the terms type-bar-segment* and
type-head-carrier* for the differences between those
mechanisms and a type-face-carrier).
TYPE-HEAD
A type-head is an element comprising one or more type-member*
elements integral one with the other(s). In most manually
powered type-writers a type-set-assemblage* is distributed
among a plurality of type-heads, each of which as two
type-face* elements. Some of these type-heads include a
type-face for imprinting a particular letter in lower-case*
and a type-face for imprinting the same letter in
upper-case*, the choice being made by a case-shift*
mechanism. Other type-heads in these manually powered
type-writers include a type-face for imprinting a number and
a type-face for imprinting a symbol (see the definition of
character* in this Glossary for examples of a symbol), the
choice of which is to be imprinted also being made by the
case-shift mechanism. In some electrically powered
typewriters a single type-head includes a complete
type-set-assemblage, and said type-head is mounted on a
type-head-carrier*. In such typewriters the single type-head
is moved for selection of the type-face to be imprinted, or
for the choice of the case to be used. In the definitions of
the subclasses that follow, the term "type-head" has usually
been reserved for the element that includes a
type-set-assemblage on an electrically powered typewriter,
and the element on the type end of a type-bar* has usually
been referred to as a type-face.
TYPE-HEAD-CARRIER
A type-head-carrier is a mechanism on which is mounted at
least one type-head* that includes a type-set-assemblage*
(e.g., a group of type-face* elements) thereon for movement
of the type-head relative to the type-head-carrier. Usually
a type-head-carrier and the type-head mounted thereon are
capable of various kinds of movement. A typist will select
one key* element from among the many key elements available,
causing the type-head to move (e.g., by oscillating and/or
tilting) to a position at which the selected type-face will
impact against a record-medium* to imprint the selected
character* symbol (e.g., a particular letter, or a particular
number, etc.) on the record-medium. A typist may choose to
effect case-shift* or not effect case-shift, thereby to
choose from the character symbols available on one key
element the one symbol (e.g., the upper-case* or the
lower-case* form of the same letter, etc.) that is to be
imprinted, thereby causing the type-head to move to a
position at which the chosen type-face will imprint the
chosen symbol. The mechanism also causes or enables movement
of the type-head (i.e., by movement of the type-head-carrier)
between the type-face and the record-medium (e.g., movement
of the type-face toward the print-point*) to imprint the
selected or the chosen character or symbol on the
record-medium. The difference between a type-head-carrier and
a type-face-carrier* (which also carries a
type-set-assemblage that moves both for selection of a
character and for choice of upper-case or lower-case) is that
a type-face-carrier supports individually movable type-face
elements, whereas a type-head-carrier supports a type-head
wherein all the type-face elements are integral therewith.
In some typewriters that use a type-head-carrier a single
type-head includes a complete type-set-assemblage, and this
type-head may be removed from its carrier and be replaced
with a different type-head having a different font* (e.g.,
the style, character size, alphabet, or symbols that the
typewriter can produce). In some typewriters that use a
type-head-carrier plural type-heads may be provided, each
including a complete type-set-assemblage (e.g., in different
fonts, etc.) or each including only part of a complete
type-set-assemblage (e.g., one-half of an assemblage on one
type-head and the other half of that assemblage on the other
type-head).
TYPE-MEMBER
An element having on a surface thereof a type-die* or a
type-face* which is impressed against a record-medium* to
imprint a character* in or on the surface of the
record-medium. In most typewriters there is only one
type-member corresponding to each character* that is to be
typed, and the user of the typewriter selects from the
assortment of type-members provided in the apparatus one
type-member at a time to be imprinted, and serially imprints
the selected type-members to form the characters representing
the text to be typed.
TYPE-SET-ASSEMBLAGE
A group of type-face* elements including a multiplicity of
type-faces for imprinting the different character* symbols
that a typewriter is capable of imprinting in the same font*
of type. In many typewriters a type-set-assemblage is
carried on a plurality of type-bar* members that include all
the type-faces that the typewriter can imprint, either in
upper-case* or in lower-case*, or in the various character
symbols. In other typewriters a single type-head* includes
all type-faces that the typewriter can imprint in the same
font, and that type-head can be removed from the typewriter
to be replaced by a type-head for another type-set-assemblage
of a different font. In still other typewriters two or more
type-heads are provided to comprise one type-set-assemblage,
or to comprise two or more type-set-assemblages in different
fonts.
TYPEWRITER-ACTUATED-CONTROL
Typewriter-actuated-control is intended to refer to a
mechanism wherein a first part of a typewriter moves to
accomplish its intended first-part function, and during said
movement the first part engages a second part to move the
second part, thereby accomplishing a second function as the
second part is moved. A simple example of a
typewriter-actuated-control exists in the instance of a
typewriter wherein the ribbon* vibrator has means for opening
the guide means of the vibrator for the purpose of
facilitating insertion of a new ribbon. When the vibrator is
next lifted or raised to enable the ribbon to cover the
print-point* to imprint the next character*, the upward
movement of the vibrator for typing causes engagement of
elements that "automatically" causes closing of the vibrator
guide to its normal position without special intervention of
the typist to accomplish the guide-closing function.
UNIVERSAL-BAR
A member that is part of a drive train of a typewriter, which
member is driven by any of a multiplicity of elements and
which member serves to drive any of a different multiplicity
of elements. A universal-bar may be driven, for example, by
a space-bar*, or by a character* key* element that causes
imprint of a character and also drives the universal-bar
either directly or via a type-bar* member or associated
linkage. The universal-bar may then serve to drive a
carriage-feed mechanism or a ribbon-feed mechanism or a
character-counter mechanism or all these exemplary mechanisms
concurrently.
UPPER-CASE
A capital letter, similar in appearance to this text, as
opposed to lower-case*. The derivation of the terms
upper-case* and lower-case is discussed in the definition of
lower-case in this Glossary. See the definitions of
character* and case-shift* in this Glossary for the forms of
symbols that are imprinted when the case-shift mechanism is
in the upper-case mode.
VIBRATOR
Vibrator is the typewriter industry term for an element or an
assemblage of elements that (a) guides a ribbon* or
constrains the ribbon for movement along its elongated
dimension, and (b) is located on the typewriter adjacent to
the print-point*, and (c) moves at least a portion of the
ribbon that is so guided transversely to its elongated
dimension from a first position adjacent to but not covering
the print-point to a second position covering the
print-point. The first position is a normal, or "rest"
position that permits the print-line* to be seen by a typist,
and the second position places the ribbon over the
print-point so that a type-face* will be impressed against
the ribbon to imprint a character* on a record-medium*. The
vibrator movement may be controlled so as to move different
zones of the ribbon to the print-point, each of which zones
extends longitudinally and is spaced transversely to the
others, whereby different colored characters may be
imprinted.
WORD
For purposes of this class, a word is one or more imprinted
character* symbols that are grouped together and separated
from other groups of characters to convey intelligence or
information to a reader. Usually a word consists of one or
more letter characters that taken together as a group may
also be spoken by people of a national or ethnic folk, but
especially for purposes of this class, a word may consist of
more number characters as well as letter characters, the
words then conveying information in a cryptos:graphic
"language".
WORD-SPACE
The distance that separates the last character* of one word*
of imprinted text from the first character of a subsequent
word of the same text on the same line of text.
SUBCLASSES
Subclass:
1
INCLUDING JUSTIFICATION OR QUADDING OF PRINT-LINE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein more than one print-line* of
character* symbols is imprinted on a record-medium* to form a
page* of text, and wherein significance is attributed to the
typing operation known as "justification" as that term is
discussed and defined in (1) Note below, or significance is
attributed to the typing operation known as "quadding" as
that term is discussed and defined in (2) Note below, either
operation modifying the print-lines of a page of text.
(1) Note. When typing in a language that is read from left
to right, a typist can predetermine the left margin (i.e.,
the distance from the left edge of the record-medium to the
first character of the print-line). The right margin (i.e.,
the distance from the right edge of the record-medium to the
last character of the print-line) is subject to chance and
depends on the number of character symbols and word* groups
in the print-line; therefore, the right margin will usually
not be even. "Justification" corrects the uneven right margin
by expanding or contracting the print-line as necessary to
make all the print-lines of uniform length. Justification is
usually accomplished by typing a rough draft to form a
print-line that ends within a "justification zone" and then
retyping with the addition or subtraction of "unit" spaces to
or from the character-space* or word-space* distances on the
print-line. The characters and spaces in a print-line may be
stored in a justification circuit which may include a
"memory" and circuitry to modify the memory by the addition
or subtraction of unit spaces described above to expand or
contract the print-line. Justification may also be
accomplished by typing on a stretchable record-medium as
described in subclass 14 below.
(2) Note. The term "quadding" is derived from the printing
and type setting arts, where the word "quad" refers to a
piece of metal that is of less height than a type-face* and
is used to form a blank space in the printed line. By
introducing quads in sufficient numbers and appropriate
positions, a printed line could be printed as "quad right"
(i.e., the last character of successively printed lines
uniformly spaced from the right edge of a page) or printed as
"quad left" (i.e., the first character of successively
printed lines uniformly spaced from the left edge of a page)
or printed as "quad center" (i.e., the first and the last
character of the same printed line equally spaced from the
left and the right edge of the page, respectively). A similar
appearance of text and successively imprinted print-lines can
be accomplished on a typewriter by quadding to control the
location of the first or the last character (or both of said
characters) of a print-line. In addition, the quadded
print-lines may also be expanded or contracted in an
operation similar to justification {described in (1) Note
above}, so that the text that has been subjected to a
quadding operation will also appear to be justified.
Subclass:
2
Including quadding of print-line:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
wherein more than one print-line* of character* symbols is
imprinted on a record-medium* on a page* of text, and wherein
significance is attributed to the typing operation known as
"quadding" as that term is discussed and defined in (2) Note
of subclass 1 above.
Subclass:
3
By programmed-control-system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the typing operation
known as "justification" as that term is discussed and
defined in (1) Note of subclass 1 above, and wherein the
justification is accomplished by way of a
programmed-control-system*.
(1) Note. The programmed-control-system is not particularly
described in the patents of this subclass (3), but rather is
referred to as a "register" of a "memory" that is modified,
or a variant of such terminology. However, it is clearly
described as a means for modifying the operation of a
typewriter to produce a justified print-line*.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
395, Information Processing System Organization, and see (1)
Note, section IV, of the Class Definition of this class
(400).
Subclass:
4
On auxiliary-record-program (e.g., tape, card, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 3. Subject matter
wherein the programmed-control-system* includes a set of
instructions that may be readily removed from the typewriter
so that another set of instructions may be inserted into the
typewriter to perform a different or modified sequence of
justifying operations.
Subclass:
5
Magnetic record:
This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter
wherein an auxiliary-record-program* includes or contains
ferrous particles capable of being oriented or reoriented
relative to the auxiliary-record-program, the orientation of
the particles being sensed to effect the control of the
typewriter or the justification of a print-line* typed
thereby.
Subclass:
6
With error-correcting storage register:
This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter
wherein the programmed-control-system* includes a "memory"
circuit and means for amending or modifying the program in
the event that a typist has made a mistake in the typed text
or in the justification thereof so that the text may be
retyped with the mistake rectified.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
74 for error detection and correction of a program for
selection of type-face* elements.
Subclass:
7
Including artificial or end-of-line hyphen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter
wherein the auxiliary-record-program* includes provision of
determining if and where a "hyphen" will be imprinted at the
end of a print-line* and provision for inserting the hyphen
properly.
(1) Note. A hyphen is a punctuation mark comprising a short
line used to indicate the end of a syllable in a word* which
has been divided so that one or more syllables of that word
appear on one print-line and the remainder of the syllables
of that word appear on a succeeding print-line.
Subclass:
8
By using "no-print" device:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the typing operation
known as "justification" as that term is discussed and
defined in (1) Note to subclass 1 above, and wherein the
justification is accomplished with the use of a means for not
printing or suppressing the imprinting of one or more
character* symbols of a print-line*.
Subclass:
9
By interword or intercharacter spacing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the typing operation
known as "justification" as that term is discussed and
defined in (1) Note of subclass 1 above, and wherein the
justification is accomplished by adding to or subtracting
from the character-space* or the word-space* distances in a
print-line*.
Subclass:
10
Variable carriage-feed mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 9. Subject matter
wherein the character-space* or the word-space* distances are
varied for justification by moving the carriage* in irregular
or unequal increments of movement.
(1) Note. The variable carriage-feed mechanism that may be
used for the typewriter of this subclass is of the kind that,
per se, is found in subclass 303.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
303 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
11
Carriage slidable relative to its carriage-rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 9. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a carriage* that is
attached to a tab-rack* that enables the carriage to be moved
in a character-space direction and wherein the
character-space or the word-space* distances are varied for
justification by moving the carriage along the tab-rack in
varying or irregular increments required for justification.
(1) Note. A fuller explanation of the relationship between
the various elements of a carriage-feed mechanism will be
found in the definitions of tab-rack and the various
definitions of subclasses indented under 283.
Subclass:
12
By interword spacing only:
This subclass is indented under subclass 9. Subject matter
wherein the justification is accomplished by adding to or
subtracting from the word-space* distances in a print-line*.
Subclass:
13
Including plural space-bars for different spacings:
This subclass is indented under subclass 12. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with two or more
space-bar* elements on the key-board* of the typewriter, each
of which space-bar* elements will effect a word-space*
distance different than the other(s), and wherein
justification is accomplished by using one or another of the
space-bars during the imprinting of the print-line* according
to what distances are needed to justify the print-line.
Subclass:
14
By typing line on stretchable medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the typing operation
known as "justification" as that term is discussed and
defined in (1) Note to subclass 1 above, and wherein the
justification is accomplished by typing print-line* of
character* symbols on a material that is capable of being
elongated.
(1) Note. In this subclass justification is accomplished by
typing a print-line on a stretchable ribbon* to an extent
less than that of the desired print-line, and subsequently
adhering either the ribbon or the characters* that have been
imprinted on the ribbon to the record-medium*.
Subclass:
15
Including justification indicator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the typing operation
known as "justification" as that term is discussed and
defined in (1) Note to subclass 1 above, and wherein the
typewriter is provided with means for helping the typist to
know the need for justification or the number of
character-space* distances required for justification.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
703 for other indicator means.
Subclass:
16
FOR TYPING OR FORMING CONTINUOUS OR DISCONTINUOUS LINE (E.G.,
BY "LINER"):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter capable of producing a mark on a record-medium*,
which mark is long in proportion to its breadth.
(1) Note. The mark may be formed by a penlike instrument
that applies ink* to the record-medium in a continuous stroke
or movement of the instrument relative to the record-medium
(e.g., by moving the record-medium with respect to a
stationary pen), or may be formed by impacting the
record-medium with a succession of short marks (e.g., each
produced by a dash) that overlap to form a continuous line,
or the marks may be separated, but taken as a whole form a
dotted line or a dashed line.
Subclass:
17
Including programmed-control-system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 16. Subject matter
wherein a programmed-control-system* is used for giving
instructions to which the typewriter responds by forming said
mark (e.g., a line) in the record-medium*.
Subclass:
18
By scriber (e.g., pen, pencil, etc.) or with scriber guide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 16. Subject matter
wherein said mark is formed or produced by contacting the
record-medium* with an instrumentality that is provided with
ink*, pigment, or coating material that is visible to the
eye, and by moving the record-medium, or the instrumentality
while the record-medium is coated on the record-medium, or
wherein said mark is formed or produced by such an
instrumentality with the help of a device, which device is
used by an operator to direct the course or path of the
instrumentality while in contact with the record-medium.
(1) Note. In this and the indented subclasses, the scriber
is disclosed as an addition to a usual or standard
typewriter.
Subclass:
19
For writing in script:
This subclass is indented under subclass 18. Subject matter
wherein the instrumentality is moved relative to the
record-medium* in a path that forms cursive letters (i.e.,
joined together in flowing strokes as formed in
handwriting).
Subclass:
20
Rotatable disc scriber:
This subclass is indented under subclass 18. Subject matter
wherein the instrumentality is a plate turned on an axis and
having a thin peripheral edge that is coated with ink* that
is transferred to the record-medium* as the plate is turned
while the edge is in contact with the record-medium and while
relative movement between the plate axis and the
record-medium occurs.
Subclass:
21
Responsive to carriage movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 16. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a carriage* that
carries a platen* that supports the record-medium*, which
carriage is movable in a direction parallel to a print-line*,
and wherein said mark is formed as a result of the carriage
being moved while a marking instrument or device is brought
into contact with the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
299 for a similar structure that imprints a succession of
the same character* symbol.
Subclass:
22
Underscoring concurrently with character imprinting:
This subclass is indented under subclass 16. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with type-face* elements
that are selectively impressed against the record-medium* to
imprint character* symbols on the record-medium, and wherein
a mark is imprinted at the same time that a character is
imprinted, the mark being a short line that is imprinted
underneath any of the selected characters.
Subclass:
23
FOR TYPING ON FLAT RECORD-MEDIUM OR AGAINST FLAT PLATEN:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the significance is attributed to a
typewriter in which the record-medium* that is being typed on
is planar or in which the record-medium is backed by a
platen* that is planar.
(1) Note. In the definition of the term platen in the
Glossary, section III, there is a discussion of some of the
various forms of platen. Included therein is a discussion of
the difference between a flat or planar platen and a
cylindrical platen. This and indented subclasses are the
loci of disclosures wherein a typewriter is provided with a
significant flat or planar platen.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
648 for a cylindrical platen in a typewriter.
Subclass:
24
For typing on a book:
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
particularly intended for typing on a book.
(1) Note. A "book" is an assemblage of pages* or sheets
that have been fastened or bound together. One of the
characteristics of a book that is significant in this
subclass or the subclasses indented hereunder is that pages
are turned to be inverted for recording of information
thereon. As a consequence of such use, the number of pages
on one side of the binding will increase as the number of
pages on the other side of the binding decreases, resulting
in unequal thicknesses of material on each side of the
binding.
Subclass:
25
Including a type-head (e.g., cylinder, disc, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 24. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a type-head* element
that carries type-face* elements thereon.
(1) Note. A type-head is distinguished from a type-face* in
that a type-head carries in one member a complete (or
substantially complete) type-set-assemblage* that includes
many type-faces.
Subclass:
26
Against cylindrical backing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 24. Subject matter
wherein the book that is being typed on is supported against
movement away from the type-face* that is impressed against
the book, the support being an elongated member that is
circular in cross section.
(1) Note. The back or supporting is similar in
configuration to a cylindrical platen*, but the book is not
partially wrapped about the platen as in the usual typewriter
where the record-medium* encompasses the platen through
approximately 180 deg.. In this typewriter, the book is
approximately tangent to the surface of the cylindrical
backing.
Subclass:
27
Including adjustment of typewriter relative to book (e.g., to
compensate for book thickness):
This subclass is indented under subclass 24. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to modifications made in
the position of operating portions of the typewriter that are
required due to the configuration of the book that is being
typed on.
(1) Note. See the (1) Note of subclass 24 for one of the
configurations of a book that requires special adjustments to
be made to a typewriter to type on a book.
Subclass:
28
Including adjustment of book support relative to typewriter
(e.g., for top or bottom of book, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 24. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to modifications made in
the position of that portion of a typewriter that holds a
book in position to be typed on.
(1) Note. This subclass also provides for a support that
holds a book upright so that the top or the bottom of a book
may be typed on.
Subclass:
29
For typing on flat blueprint or drawing (e.g., "platenless"
typewriter):
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
the record-medium* that is being typed on has length and
width dimensions that are substantially greater than the
corresponding dimensions of the typewriter, and wherein the
typewriter is moved in directions parallel to said dimensions
to properly locate the typewriter relative to the
record-medium.
(1) Note. The term platenless has been ascribed to such a
typewriter because it does not have a platen* ( in the usual
sense of the word) connected thereto. Instead, the drawing
board or other large, flat surface that ordinarily supports a
blueprint or drawing also supports the typewriter, and serves
as the platen for this form of typewriter.
Subclass:
30
For typing on carton or package:
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
the record-medium* that is being typed on is a
three-dimensional object that has flat surfaces defining its
sides, and wherein either the typewriter or the object may be
moved to enable the typewriter to type on one of the
surfaces.
Subclass:
31
By multidirectional movement of typewriter structure (e.g.,
"Elliot-Fisher" structure):
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter that is
mounted relative to a flat platen* so that the typewriter,
its key-board*, type-bar* members, and all its operating
mechanisms move as a unit in the widthwise and lengthwise
dimensions of the platen.
(1) Note. The term Elliot-Fisher derives from the names of
the persons to whom the invention and development of this
form of typewriter is ascribed.
(2) Note. This subclass also includes structure for
levelling the carriage* frame relative to the flat platen.
Subclass:
32
Bottom-strike typewriter including type-bar action or bar
platen or anvil platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
type-face* elements impact against a flat platen* from
underneath the platen, to structure that moves a type-bar*
carrying a type-face element from its rest position to its
impact position, or to a bar platen (e.g., a platen having
dimensions corresponding to the height of a character* and
the length of a print-line*), or to an anvil platen (i.e., a
platen having dimensions corresponding to the height and
width of one character).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
408 for a bottom-strike typewriter and its type-bar action
mechanism.
Subclass:
33
Top-strike typewriter including pivoted type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
type-face* elements impact against a flat platen* from above
the platen, and wherein significance is also attributed to
structure that moves a type-bar* carrying a type-face from
its rest position to its impact position, the movement being
arcuate.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
415 for a top-strike typewriter and its type-bar-action
mechanism.
Subclass:
34
Including carriage-return mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
type-face* elements impact against a flat platen*, and
wherein significance is also attributed to movement of the
carriage* of the typewriter in a direction opposite to the
character-space* direction.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
313 for carriage-return mechanism.
Subclass:
35
Including case-shift by shifting platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
type-face* elements impact against a flat platen*, and
wherein significance is also attributed to movement of the
platen to accomplish case-shift* from a lower-case* form of a
letter to an upper-case* form of that letter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
251 for case-shift mechanism.
Subclass:
36
Including ribbon-feed mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
type-face* elements impact against a flat platen* at a
print-point*, and wherein significance is also attributed to
mechanism for feeding a ribbon* relative to the print-point.
(1) Note. Mechanism for feeding a ribbon is found in
subclass 223, which subclasses should be searched for ribbon
feed, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
223 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
37
For typing on manifold set (e.g., with type-die, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
type-face* elements or type-die* elements impact against a
record-medium* that is backed by a flat platen*, and wherein
significance is also attributed to the use of manifold set
that includes carbon paper so that the typewriter produces an
original copy and at least one carbon copy.
(1) Note. The terms "carbon paper" and "manifold set" are
discussed in (1) Note and (2) Note, respectively, of subclass
497.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
497 for a cylindrical-platen typewriter for typing on a
manifold set and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
38
Including feeding of wide carbon paper transverse to feed of
record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 37. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* of a typewriter is fed in a first
direction coinciding with the line-space* direction, and
wherein said carbon paper is moved (i.e., fed) in a second
direction substantially perpendicular to the first direction
and the carbon paper has a width dimension that is relatively
large and approximately equal to the length of a page* of
record-medium.
(1) Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the carbon
paper is wound on either a supply roll or a take-up roll or
both.
Subclass:
39
Including spool for roll of carbon paper:
This subclass is indented under subclass 37. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper is of indeterminate length and is
wound on a reel either for supply or take up of the carbon
paper or both.
Subclass:
40
Including clamp or guide for carbon paper:
This subclass is indented under subclass 37. Subject matter
wherein the flat platen* or another portion of the typewriter
is provided with means to firmly hold said carbon paper to
the platen, or to lead or direct the carbon paper relative to
the platen.
Subclass:
41
Including adjustment of platen perpendicular to its surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 37. Subject matter
wherein the platen* of the typewriter is movable for the
purpose of varying its position relative to other portions of
the typewriter, the movement occurring along a line at right
angles to the flat surface of the platen.
Subclass:
42
Including aligning and feeding manifold set:
This subclass is indented under subclass 37. Subject matter
wherein said manifold set includes a plurality of pieces of
web record-medium* interleaved with a plurality of pieces of
web carbon paper, all the pieces being in surface-to-surface
relationship and the pieces are positioned so that their
corresponding side edges are located adjacent one another or
so that a particular indicium that occurs along the length
dimension of one piece is located adjacent to a corresponding
indicium that occurs along the length dimension of another
web, and wherein the manifold set is moved along the flat
platen* in a line-space* direction.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
606 for aligning and feeding of plural webs in a standard
typewriter.
Subclass:
43
Including feed of tally strip:
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the feeding of a tally
strip in a flat-platen* typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "tally strip" is discussed in the
definition of subclass 586, see the (1) Note thereof.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
586 for a cylindrical-platen typewriter for typing on a
tally strip and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
44
Including line-spacing mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
type-face* elements impact against a record-medium* that is
backed by a flat platen* at a print-point*, and wherein
significance is also attributed to effecting relative
movement between the record-medium and the print-point in a
step-by-step manner so that successively imprinted
print-lines* will be spaced apart by line-space* distances.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
545 for line-spacing by incremental rotation of a
cylindrical platen.
Subclass:
45
Platen shifted for line-spacing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 44. Subject matter
wherein line-space distances are effected by moving the flat
platen* along a line that is perpendicular to the
print-line*.
(1) Note. This subclass also includes some typewriters
wherein the platen is shifted for line-spacing and the platen
is also shifted for character-spacing.
Subclass:
46
Including adjustment of line-space distance or increment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 44. Subject matter
wherein the extent of the space intervention between two
successive print-lines* may be varied.
(1) Note. The difference between the two kinds of
adjustment herein provided for is as follows:
If a typist changes the space between one print-line and the
next print-line to be typed, by manual intervention for the
one print-line which is to be differently spaced, that is an
adjustment of line-space* distance. However, if the
typewriter is re-set to change the spaces between any
plurality of print-lines to make those spaces different from
the spaces between a previous plurality of print-lines, that
is adjustment of the line-space increment.
Subclass:
47
Including disengagement of line-spacing mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 44. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means whereby
structure for effecting the relative movement (i.e., of
subclass 44) may be disconnected temporarily.
(1) Note. The disengagement is usually for the purpose of
facilitating the loading of a flat platen* with
record-medium*. Also found herein is a typewriter wherein the
line-spacing* mechanism may be locked against movement.
Subclass:
48
Work support (e.g., sheet or card holddown or guide,
sheet-size platen, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a device or member for
backing the record-medium* as type-face* elements are
impacted thereagainst.
(1) Note. The device or member may include a flat platen*,
per se, for example, characterized as being of dimensions
corresponding to a sheet that it will hold, or may include
means for holding or guiding the record-medium relative to
the flat platen, these being only examples of the subject
matter of this subclass.
Subclass:
49
Collating-table attachment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 23. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a collating-table* that
is associated with a flat-platen* typewriter.
Subclass:
50
INCLUDING DELAY MEANS FOR PREVENTING MALFUNCTION IN POWERED
TYPEWRITER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a source of energy other than that
supplied by a typist is used to actuate, or aid a typist to
actuate, mechanism for performing first and second sequential
operations on a typewriter. The typewriter having a
capability of performing each of said operations in an
optimum time period from the instant that each operation has
been initiated by a signal, until the instant that each
operation is complete, and wherein there will be a failure in
proper performance of the second operation if the first
operation has not reached a first predetermined stage of
performance before the second operation has reached a second
predetermined state of performance and wherein significance
is attributed to sensing an occurrence wherein a signal to
initiate the second operation has been given prematurely. As
a result of such sensed occurrence, retarding the performance
of the second operation to assure the first operation has
reached the first stage before the second operation reaches
the second stage.
Subclass:
51
Delay of sequential character rate in programmed-control
typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 50. Subject matter
wherein the sequential operations are regulated by a
programmed-control-system*, and wherein the first and second
operations are each for typing of a character*, and wherein
the retarding of the second operation is by increasing the
period of time for performing the second operation from said
optimum period to a time greater than said optimum period.
Subclass:
52
Delay by storage of next character to be imprinted:
This subclass is indented under subclass 50. Subject matter
wherein the first and second operations are each for typing a
character*, and wherein after the second operation has been
initiated, it is retarded by holding it from completion for a
predetermined period of time.
Subclass:
53
INCLUDING ADJUSTMENT MEANS TO COMPENSATE FOR WEAR:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter whereby attrition of a typewriter part occurs
during use of the typewriter, and wherein significance is
attributed to changing the position of such part relative to
another part to counteract such attrition.
Subclass:
54
SAFETY SWITCH OR CONDITION-RESPONSIVE-CUTOFF SWITCH FOR
ELECTRICALLY POWERED TYPEWRITER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein typewriter mechanism is driven with
the help of force derived from electrical energy and wherein
significance is attributed to a device for influencing a
circuit through which the energy is supplied, said device
being either for preventing the typist from being harmed, or
for interrupting the circuit as a result or characteristic of
the state of the environment or the occurrence of a
predetermined event in a typewriter.
(1) Note. Examples of devices provided for in this subclass
are a switch which cannot be placed in an "on" position
unless a cover prevents access to the electrically powered
mechanism, and a switch that will automatically turn the
power "off" after a preset time interval if the typewriter is
left unattended.
Subclass:
55
INCLUDING ADJUSTMENT FOR OPTIMUM PRINTING PLANE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to
adjustment of the optimum printing plane of a typewriter as
that term is discussed and defined in (1) Note below.
(1) Note. In over simplified terms, a typewriter requires
at least two elements for a typing operation. One of these
elements is a type-member* that impacts against a
record-medium* at a print-point*; another of these elements
is a platen* that serves to prevent movement of the
record-medium away from the type-member during impact.
(Obviously, other structures and mechanisms are also required
for operation, but discussion of these may be deferred.) The
type-member includes a type-face* that lies in a plane; the
platen includes a surface that lies in a plane. In the
instance of a cylindrical platen, the platen plane is
theoretically tangent to the peripheral surface of the
platen, whereas the surface itself is arcuate, therefore not
planar, but considering the small area of a character*
compared to the area of a cylindrical platen, the difference
between the arcuate surface and the tangent plane is minimal;
the platen plane can be considered as planar. Theoretically,
the platen plane should coincide with the type-face plane
when the type-face is at the print-point to ensure an
imprinted character that is uniformly legible at any point on
its area. Actually, the two planes cannot coincide because of
the thickness of the record-medium and the thickness of a
ribbon*, both of which lie between the two planes in most
typewriters, but at the very minimum the two planes should be
parallel, one to the other. Because in an actual typewriter
the planes may become out of parallelism with each other, it
is necessary to provide means to adjust either the platen
plane or the type-face plane, or both, to correct the
possible misalignment. Moreover, in an actual typewriter the
number or thickness of record-medium sheets may vary. If the
record-medium of greater than usual thickness is used, the
type-face will impact the surface of the record-medium at a
print-point that is further from the axis of the platen than
is usual. The type-face plane would not be parallel to the
plane of the record-medium at the new print-point. To
summarize, the "optimum printing plane" is the plane at which
the type-face and the record-medium best meet to form an
imprinted character that is uniformly legible at any point on
its area, and is the result of adjustments to the typewriter
to ensure the coincidence and parallelism of the
record-medium with the type-face at the print-point.
Subclass:
56
Responsive to thickness of record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 55. Subject matter
wherein the thickness dimension of the record-medium* (i.e.,
its dimension perpendicular to a surface area) is measured,
and the adjustment of the optimum printing plane is made by
the typewriter as a result of such measurement.
Subclass:
57
In accordance with the number of sheets of record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 55. Subject matter
wherein the typist determines the number of sheets or
record-medium* that is to be typed upon during the typing
operation, and wherein the typist makes an adjustment to the
typewriter as a result of such determination.
Subclass:
58
By adjustment of platen relative to carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 55. Subject matter
wherein the optimum printing plane is adjusted by varying the
position of the typewriter platen* with respect to the
carriage* on which the platen is supported.
Subclass:
59
By adjustment of carriage (e.g., carriage-guide rollers):
This subclass is indented under subclass 55. Subject matter
wherein the optimum printing plane is adjusted by varying the
position of the carriage* of the typewriter with respect to
the print-point.
(1) Note. In this subclass the position of roller elements
or the carriage frame on which the carriage moves to and fro
is adjusted.
Subclass:
60
Via adjustment of case-shift linkage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 59. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a case-shift
mechanism that is connected to the carriage* for choice of
upper-case* or lower-case* form of type-face* element, and
wherein the optimum printing plane is adjusted by varying the
position of the carriage with respect to the case-shift
mechanism.
Subclass:
61
INCLUDING CONTROL OF FORMAT AND SELECTION OF TYPE-FACE BY
PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM (E.G., INPUT TYPEWRITER):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a programmed-control-system* governs
the operation of a typewriter so as to control the format of
the text to be imprinted on a record-medium* and so as to
impress selected or chosen type-face* elements against the
record-medium.
(1) Note. The term "format" refers to physical appearance.
As used in the typewriter art the term refers to the
appearance of a page* of text of typewritten character*
symbols. Control of format involves (a) movement of the
record-medium in the line-space* direction (i.e., the "Y"
direction of a graph) to locate the record-medium at a
desired print-line* location and (b) movement of the
carriage* (e.g., a platen* carriage or a type-head* carriage)
in a character-space* direction (i.e., the "X" direction of a
graph) to locate the first-imprinted-character symbol of the
print-line along that print-line. Format control also governs
such function* operations as carriage return (Found, per se,
in subclass 313), tabulation (found, per se, in subclass
284), subsequent line-spacing* (found, per se, in subclass
545), or record-medium feeding (found, per se, in subclasses
578), (these functions being only exemplary) so that the
entire format of the printed text on the record-medium is
controlled. In some typewriters having format control the
typewriter or the program is capable of being modified to
change the format as desired. For example, a paragraph of
text comprising six print-lines, each print-line having
approximately 70 characters thereon, may be changed to a
paragraph comprising 12 print-lines, each print-line having
approximately 35 characters thereon; or the distance between
successive print-lines may be varied as desired to compress
or expand the typed text to fit a page.
(2) Note. In the typewriter of this and indented
subclasses, the programmed-control-system also governs the
operation to select or choose the type-face elements that are
to be used to imprint the characters in sequence. The
difference between "select" and "choose" as to type-face, is
discussed in the glossary under definitions such as
case-shift*, type-face-carrier*, type-head, and
type-head-carrier*. Briefly, a particular type-face is
selected from among the many available from a
type-set-assemblage, whereas an upper-case* form of letter
(As distinguished from a lower-case* form of the same letter)
is chosen from the forms available on one key* element.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
70 for selection of type-face by a
programmed-control-system.
76 for control of format by a programmed-control-system.
Subclass:
62
Including means for responding to input program or incoming
signals and providing output program or signals representing
typing operations (e.g., output typewriter):
This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is governed by an
auxiliary-record-program* or is governed by an
instrumentality outside of the typewriter, which
instrumentality transmits to the typewriter the instructions
necessary to control the typing functions* and type-face*
selections and choices, and wherein the typewriter also
generates an auxiliary-record-program or also generates the
instructions necessary to control the typing functions and
type-face selections and choices for another typewriter.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass is known as an
"input-output" typewriter in the art. The "input" of this
typewriter may be from a program in the form of a punched or
magnetic tape or other record, or may be in the form of
signals from a "computer" or "register" or "memory" outside
of the typewriter. The "output" of this typewriter may also
be in the form of a program tape or other record, or may be
in the form of signals to a "computer" or "register" or
"memory", the signals being generated in response to
depression of the key* elements on a key-board* by a typist
and being transmitted to another typewriter. The typewriter
of this subclass is capable of responding to an input and of
producing an output. Also a typewriter of this subclass
could be one of several typewriters in a chain wherein the
"input" of one typewriter is converted to an "output" of that
typewriter, which "output" of the first typewriter becomes
the "input" of a second typewriter, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
80 for an "output" typewriter.
Subclass:
63
Including editing or revision system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter capable of
editing or revision as those terms are discussed and
explained in the notes below.
(1) Note. The term "revision" is applied to an operation
wherein the text of typewritten material is changed.
Typically, a typist types a "rough draft" text and generates
a "rough draft program". The text is proof-read and various
changes are indicated where necessary to add, delete, modify
spelling, or otherwise correct the text. The typist or
proofreader then locates on the rough draft text and program
the portion of text to be changed and reprograms to correct
the text. The reprogrammed corrections may be put onto a
correction program or onto the rough draft program or onto
another instrumentality. The correction program is then
combined with the rough draft program to in corporate all the
changes and corrections into a master program which is then
used to reproduce as many original copies as are desired. A
revision system typewriter is sometimes used as an input or
as an output, and usually additional equipment is necessary
to correlate the changes so that they may be entered properly
in the master program.
(2) Note. The term "editing" is applied to an operation
wherein the appearance (e.g., the format) as well as the text
of typewritten material is changed. An editing system will
usually operate similarly to a revision system, but will
include changes such as "centering", "indent paragraphing",
or other format control changes. An incoming program (i.e.,
input) will be modified by appropriate equipment to perform
format control or character-selection control that is
different from the original program.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
395, Information Processing System Organization, systems and
see (1) Note, section IV, of this class (400) under the
heading of class (395) for a note to the differences between
the subject matter of the two classes.
709, Electrical Computers and Digital Data Processing
Systems: Multiple Computer or Process Coordinating, 200 for
data transferring among multiple computer and digital
processing systems.
710, Electrical Computers and Digital Data Processing
Systems: Input/Output, 1 for transferring data from one or
more peripherals to one or more computers for the latter to
process, store, or further transfer or for transferring data
from the computers to the peripherals.
Subclass:
64
Including right-hand margin control system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter
wherein the programmed-control-system* governs the location
or extent of the margin* at the right side of the
record-medium* that is being typed on.
(1) Note. In this subclass the "input" to the typewriter
does not include right-hand margin control and such control
is added by the system, or the system does particularly
include a right-hand margin control and such control is
either retained or is particularly modified by the system.
The operation known as "justification" is not included here,
but is to be found in subclass 1.
Subclass:
65
Including typing of s:graphical representations:
This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter
wherein the programmed-control-system* governs the operation
of a typewriter so as to imprint character* symbols and also
governs the operation of said typewriter so as to produce a
graph denoting the imprinted character symbols.
(1) Note. A "graph" is defined as a diagram representing a
system of connections or interrelations among two or more
things by a number of distinctive dots, bars, etc. The graph
or chart produced in this subclass represents the letter
characters or number characters that are imprinted by the
typewriter.
Subclass:
66
Including baseplate attachment with electromagnets for input
or output operations:
This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a mechanism that is
connected as an adjunct to a typewriter, which mechanism is
used to convert a typewriter that is operable by a typist
depressing the key* elements of the key-board* to a
typewriter that is operable by a programmed-control-system*,
and which mechanism is located underneath the typewriter and
operates the type-face* selecting or choosing means and the
function* operations of the typewriter.
(1) Note. Usually the attachment is used to convert a
standard typewriter to an input-output typewriter, but it may
also be part of the typewriter that is used as a "computer
terminal".
Subclass:
67
Separate interrelated programs:
This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with at least two
programmed-control-system* programs, each of which programs
is intended for a different sequence of operations to be
performed, by the typewriter, and the programs being
coordinated to produce a final text.
(1) Note. In this subclass, one of the programs may be for
the selection or choice of character* symbols and another
program may be for the line-space* or the character-space*
control, and both programs are used together.
Subclass:
68
Including message writing (e.g., address program, form-letter
program, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 67. Subject matter
wherein at least one of the programs effects the typing of a
part of a communication of information and another of the
programs effects the typing of another part of the same
communication.
(1) Note. An example of the subject matter of this subclass
is a program for typing the body of a letter (i.e., "letter"
in the sense of a piece of correspondence) that will be sent
to various people, and a plurality of programs, each program
for typing the address of each of the people to whom the
correspondence will be sent.
Subclass:
69
Type-face selection via magnetic program tape:
This subclass is indented under subclass 61. Subject matter
wherein the program-control-systems* includes an
auxiliary-record-program* that comprises a band or ribbon* of
material containing ferrous particles capable of being
oriented or reoriented relative to the band or tape, the
orientation of the particles being sensed to effect selection
or choice of the type-face* elements that will be impressed
against the record-medium* to effect imprint of character*
symbols in sequence.
Subclass:
70
INCLUDING SELECTION OF TYPE-FACE BY PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM
OR BY REMOTE CONTROL:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a programmed-control-system or a
signal from outside of a typewriter governs the operation of
the typewriter so as to impress selected or chosen type-face*
elements against the record-medium* to imprint character*
symbols successively.
(1) Note. In the typewriter of this and indented subclasses
the programmed-control-system is used to select or choose the
type-face elements that are to imprint the characters in
sequence. The difference between "select" and "choose" as to
the type-face element is discussed in the glossary, section
III, under definitions such as case-shift*,
type-face-carrier*, type-head*, and type-head-carrier*.
Briefly, A particular type-face is selected from among the
many available from a type-set-assemblage*, whereas an
upper-case* form of letter (As distinguished from a
lower-case* form of the same letter) is chosen from the forms
of that letter available on one key* element.
(2) Note. The signal from outside the typewriter that
governs the operation of the typewriter is usually referred
to in such functional terms as "reader", "translator",
"storage", "input", etc. it is not a remote signal such as
that transmitted by a printing telegraph of Class 178. See
(1) note to Class 178, Telegraphy, in section IV of the class
definition of this class (400), for the distinction between
this class (400) and Class 178, Telegraphy.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
61 for selection of type-face and control of format by a
programmed-control-system.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
178, Telegraphy, and (2) note above.
Subclass:
71
Plural typewriters coupled for simultaneous operation (e.g.,
"master-slave" relationship):
This subclass is indented under subclass 70. Subject matter
wherein a first typewriter, while it is operating to type on
a record-medium*, produces signals. These signals (i.e.,
signals from inside the first typewriter, but from outside a
second typewriter) are used to govern the operation of the
second typewriter concurrently with the operation of the
first typewriter, whereby corresponding character* symbols
are typed onto a second record-medium at the same time that
character symbols are typed onto the first record-medium by
operation of the key-board* of the first typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
77 for a typewriter coupled to an information-recording
machine.
Subclass:
72
Including character-selection latches (e.g., for type-face
selection):
This subclass is indented under subclass 70. Subject matter
wherein the programmed-control-system* governs the selection
or choice of a type-face* element that is part of a
type-head* by way of components known in the typewriter
industry as "character-selection latches".
(1) Note. The term character-selection latch refers to a
component used in a typewriter having a spheroidal type-head
that is supported by a type-head-carrier* that is mounted on
a type-head carrier* (see the definition of carriage in the
glossary). A typewriter of this subclass is provided with a
plurality of these components (usually five or six), each of
which is hook shaped to "latch" to a common actuator bar or
member and is connected to a "whiffletree" arrangement of
links. A signal representing a selected character* or
function* causes one or character is selected, certain of the
components will be latched and when another particular
character is selected, other components will be latched or a
different permutation of components will be latched.
Movement of the common actuator will move those components
that have been permutatively latched thereto. Movement of
the latched components will move the links of the
whiffletree, and movement of the whiffletree links will be
converted into tilting and/or rotational movement of a
spheroidal type-head to thereby position the selected
type-face so that movement of the type-head-carrier to the
record-medium* will effect imprint of the selected character,
or movement of the whiffletree links will be converted into
movement of a selected function* (e.g., case-shift*).
Subclass:
73
Including particular reader structure and operation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 70. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for converting
the information stored on the program of a
programmed-control-system* into the operation of selection or
choice of a particular type-face* element and motion of the
selected or chosen type-face to the record-medium*.
(1) Note. In the patents of this subclass the converting
means (i.e., the "reader") is specifically claimed as a part
of the typewriter that controls the operation of the
typewriter in specific terms. In other words, the typewriter
is more than merely named as a load for the reader. The
reader having a named typewriter is classified elsewhere, see
the search class note below.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
395, Information Processing System Organization, subclass 106
for a reader of a programmed-control-system together with a
named typewriter.
Subclass:
74
Including error detection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 70. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a portion of the
program of a programmed-control-system* which provides
verification of the text to insure that the character*
symbols that are being imprinted on the record-medium* are
the characters that the programmed-control-system is
instructing the typewriter to imprint.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
6 for an error-correcting storage register in a
"justification" typewriter.
Subclass:
75
Including type-bar selection using mechanical program:
This subclass is indented under subclass 70. Subject matter
wherein the type-face* elements are mounted on type-bar*
members, and wherein the programmed-control-systems* includes
an auxiliary-record-program* that is directly linked to means
for actuating the type-bars for selection of the type-faces
to be impressed against the record-medium*, or is directly
linked to a case-shift* mechanism for choice of the
upper-case* or lower-case* form of the type-face to be
impressed against the record-medium.
(1) Note. In the typewriter of this subclass a plurality of
type-bars are used, each type-bar carrying usually two
type-faces thereon, one type-face for upper-case and another
type-face for lower-case character. Also the typewriter of
this subclass does not use an electrical "reader" of the
program for converting the program to signals that cause
actuation of the type-faces, but instead, this typewriter
actuates the typefaces directly from the program.
Subclass:
76
INCLUDING CONTROL OF FORMAT BY PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a programmed-control-system* governs
the operation of a typewriter so as to control the format of
the text to be imprinted on a record-medium*.
(1) Note. The term "format" is discussed in (1) Note of
subclass 61, above.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
61 for control of format and selection of type-face* by a
programmed-control-system.
Subclass:
77
TYPEWRITER CONTROLS OTHER INFORMATION RECORDER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a first typewriter is capable of
operation of imprint character* symbols on a record-medium*,
and wherein another machine is capable of operation to
imprint character symbols or to form indicia on the same or
on another record-medium, and wherein operation of the first
typewriter concurrently influences the operation of the other
machine.
(1) Note. The other machine may be a printing machine, an
accounting machine, a card-punch machine, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
71 for a typewriter that controls another typewriter.
Subclass:
78
Typewriter controls apparatus used for accounting function:
This subclass is indented under subclass 77. Subject matter
wherein the other machine influenced by the first typewriter
is a machine which prints indicia on a Record-Medium*, said
indicia resulting from a mathematical computation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
235, Registers, for a mechanical device or a record
controlled system for performing a mathematical computation.
705, Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice,
Management, or Cost/price Determination, 30 for an
electrical data processing accounting system.
Subclass:
79
And a tape-punch or card-punch apparatus:
This subclass is indented under subclass 78. Subject matter
wherein operation of the first typewriter also concurrently
influences a machine for providing indicia in the form of
apertures in a sheet or web of material.
(1) Note. A sheet is a relatively thin piece of material
having determinate width and determinate length. A web is a
relatively thin piece of material having determinate width
and indeterminate length. A card is a sheet that is slightly
thicker than a sheet and therefore stiffer than a sheet.
Subclass:
80
Typewriter (e.g., output typewriter) controls tape-punch or
card-punch apparatus:
This subclass is indented under subclass 77. Subject matter
wherein the other machine influenced by the first typewriter
is for providing indicia in the form of apertures in a sheet
or web of material.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
62 for an "input-output" typewriter.
Subclass:
81
And imprints the character represented by the punched code on
the tape or card:
This subclass is indented under subclass 80. Subject matter
wherein the apertures denote character* symbols and wherein
provision is made for imprinting the character symbols
denoted by the apertures on the web or sheet.
Subclass:
82
INCLUDING PLURAL, INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED KEY-BOARDS,
PLATENS, OR TYPE-SET-ASSEMBLAGES:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein there is provided more than one
key-board* mounted separate from each other, or there is
provided more than one platen* mounted separate from each
other, or there is provided more than one
type-set-assemblage* mounted separate from each other.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
353 for a typewriter having an auxiliary carriage*.
585 for a typewriter having a divided platen.
Subclass:
83
DISPLAYING TYPEWRITER-FORMED REPRESENTATION OF PRINT-LINE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
showing to the typist or another person a visible expression
or designation of the character* symbols that are to be or
are being imprinted on a record-medium* as a print-line*.
Subclass:
84
By projecting typed image on screen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 83. Subject matter
wherein the visible expression or designation is cast or
exhibited by way of an optical system that includes a surface
on which the likeness of the print-line* on the
record-medium* is visible.
Subclass:
85
Including transparent or translucent record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 84. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* enables passage of light
there-through, and the light is transmitted by said optical
system onto said surface to exhibit the print-line*.
Subclass:
86
OPERATING BY SOUND:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter responsive to the sound of the human voice to
perform typing operations.
Subclass:
87
FOR OPERATION BY A HANDICAPPED USER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter intended to be operated by a typist whose physical
capacities are limited.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
475 for a typewriter wherein some functions are foot
actuated.
Subclass:
88
POCKET TYPEWRITER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter that is sufficiently small to be carried on the
person of a user within a pocket or handbag.
Subclass:
89
KEY REASSIGNMENT:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter which changes the relationship between the key
designation and the printed character.
(1) Note. The term key designation includes either a change
in actuated printing element or key designator (e.g., mask or
overlay).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
380, Cryptography, subclass 51 and 55 for a cryptos:graphic
typewriter.
Subclass:
90
Electrically powered:
This subclass is indented under subclass 89. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter that is
operated with the help of electricity.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
380, Cryptography, subclass 55 for an electrical
cryptos:graphic typewriter.
Subclass:
91
STENOGRAPHIC TYPEWRITER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter intended to be used while typing in "shorthand" or
stenos:graphically.
(1) Note. Various terms are used in the art to refer to
such a typewriter, including "shorthand", "steno-typograph"
and "tachys:graphic", and variations of such words. A
typewriter capable of stenos:graphic operation has a
distinctive appearance that is different from that of the
usual typewriter. The keyboard* is arranged so that plural
key* elements are pressed simultaneously by the fingers of
one or both hands of the typist, and the type-face* elements
are impressed against the record-medium* simultaneously in
groups. The imprinted character* symbols therefore appear in
the record-medium in groups, and the record-medium, which is
usually a relatively narrow strip of elongated material, is
moved after each group of characters have been imprinted
thereon. The stenotypist thus forms groups of characters in
succession, each group corresponding to a syllable of a
word*, thus the operation of such a typewriter can be rapid
and can be used while recording a spoken conversation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
482 for a key-board specialized for use in a stenos:graphic
typewriter.
Subclass:
92
Using common-letter type-face:
This subclass is indented under subclass 91. Subject matter
wherein the type-face* elements in the stenos:graphic
typewriter are of the form or in one of the Fonts* that is
normal and usual in a typewriter.
Subclass:
93
Including plural type-faces mounted on carrier and movable
for selection of type-face:
This subclass is indented under subclass 92. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the support for the
type-bar* members, each of which carries at least one
type-face* element, and the selection of two or more
type-face elements to type a message stenos:graphically.
Subclass:
94
Electrically powered:
This subclass is indented under subclass 91. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a stenos:graphic
typewriter that is operated with the help of electricity.
Subclass:
95
LOGOTYPE TYPEWRITER (E.G., WORD TYPING):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter in which one or more of the imprinting members is
formed as an assemblage of type-face* or type-die* elements,
each of which elements imprints simultaneously or in quick
succession one with the others as if the assemblage was a
single element, thus imprinting a plurality of character*
symbols on the record-medium* by the one impression of the
member.
(1) Note. The difference between this form of typewriter
and a printing machine proper for Class 101 is discussed in
section IV of the definition of this class (400), under the
note to Class 101 in (1) note of section IV.
Subclass:
96
Including date-stamp type-face:
This subclass is indented under subclass 95. Subject matter
wherein at least one of the imprinting members is a typeface*
or an assemblage of type-face elements that form character*
symbols representing the name or number of a month or day or
year.
Subclass:
97
Including signature type-face:
This subclass is indented under subclass 95. Subject matter
wherein at least one of the imprinting members is a typeface*
or an assemblage of type-face elements that form character*
symbols representing a person's name as written by that
person.
Subclass:
98
Actuation of single key types plural characters:
This subclass is indented under subclass 95. Subject matter
wherein depression of one key* element by a typist will
effect the impressing of more than one type-face* element
onto a record-medium*
(1) Note. In this subclass separate type-face elements
imprint corresponding character* symbols in quick succession
when a single key is depressed.
Subclass:
99
Characters typed simultaneously:
This subclass is indented under subclass 98. Subject matter
wherein depression of one key* element will effect the
impressing of more than one type-face* element onto a
record-medium* at the same time.
Subclass:
100
PLURAL-KEY-ACTUATED TYPEWRITER (E.G., PERMUTATIVE
KEY-BOARD):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter in which a single type-face* element is caused to
be impressed against a record-medium* to imprint a single
character* symbol, the actuation of said single type-face
being initiated or powered by the pressing of a plurality of
key* elements on the key-board*.
(1) Note. As discussed in the definitions of character,
key, and type-member* in the glossary, section III, most
typewriters are provided with a mechanism whereby a single
key element is selected by a typist and pressed to cause a
single type-face to be impressed against a record-medium to
imprint a single character on the record-medium. In a
typewriter of this and indented subclasses a plurality of key
elements are pressed by the typist to imprint a single
character on the record-medium. This typewriter uses a
"permutative" mechanism in the key-lever linkage and the
type-bar* or type-head* action linkage which changes the
linkages and enables a particular selection of pressed key
elements to imprint a selected character and enables another
particular selection of pressed key elements to imprint
another selected character.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
472 for a key-board in a standard typewriter.
Subclass:
101
Having type-faces disposed on pivotable type-bars:
This subclass is indented under subclass 100. Subject matter
wherein a type-face* element is carried by a type-bar* member
that is mounted to be moved in an arcuate path as the
type-bar moves from a rest position to a print-point*
position.
Subclass:
102
Having type-faces disposed on rotatable type-head:
This subclass is indented under subclass 100. Subject matter
wherein a type-face* element is carried by a type-head*
element that turns about an axis while the typeface that is
to be selected or chosen is moved to a position where the
type-face will be impressed against the record-medium*.
Subclass:
103
CODE-PRINTING TYPEWRITER (E.G., FOR PRINTING A PATTERN OR
MARK):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter that is capable of imprinting a mark or spot of
ink* on a record-medium*, the imprint of a succession of such
marks or spots forming a particular coded pattern.
(1) Note. A typewriter of this and indented subclasses may
be capable of imprinting a succession of character* symbols
that together from an intelligible text, but this typewriter
is also capable of imprinting a pattern that is sensed or
"read" by another machine or a pattern that forms a picture
to a human's eye. In some instances the pattern embodies a
sequence of number digits, but the digits represent a pattern
of indicia or signs rather than a numerical value.
Subclass:
104
For typing and encoding:
This subclass is indented under subclass 103. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is capable of imprinting in a normal
or usual English Alphabet as well as capable of imprinting a
mark or spot of ink* on the record-medium*.
Subclass:
105
Including magnetic encoding:
This subclass is indented under subclass 104. Subject matter
wherein the mark or spot of ink* that is imprinted is in the
form of ferrous particles capable of being oriented or
reoriented by magnetism, or is in the form of ink containing
such ferrous particles.
Subclass:
106
Including coded ink (e.g., phosphorescent or color-coded ink,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 103. Subject matter
wherein the mark or spot of ink* is characterized by having a
particular color or pigment or chemical composition, any of
which characteristics is significant in determining the coded
pattern that is desired.
Subclass:
107
For coding by conductive mark:
This subclass is indented under subclass 103. Subject matter
wherein the mark or spot or ink* that forms part of the coded
pattern is capable of conducting a current of electricity.
Subclass:
108
For marking laundry:
This subclass is indented under subclass 103. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the imprinting of a
mark or spot of ink* on an article of apparel that is to be
washed.
Subclass:
109
FOREIGN-LANGUAGE TYPEWRITER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter that is capable of imprinting character* symbols
in an alphabet other than the standard English alphabet.
(1) Note. The standard "English" alphabet is one that is
derived from the Roman or Latin alphabet, and therefore is
common to languages used in many European countries,
including most of the western European countries. This and
indented subclasses provide for a typewriter capable of
typing in such alphabets as Cryllic (e.g., for Russian,
Bulgarian or Serbian), Semitic (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew), Greek,
Medieval German, etc., or is capable of typing such oriental
languages as Chinese, Japanese, etc., the enumeration being
only exemplary.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
484 for a key-board* specialized for use in a
foreign-language typewriter.
Subclass:
109.1
Braille:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein the character* symbols are embossed in the
record-medium* so as to be discerned by tactile sensation.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass usually forms a
character* in the form of a pattern of embossments, each
different pattern representing a different letter or number
or other symbol. A trained blind person feels the different
patterns with his/her fingers and so "reads" the character*s
that form the text.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
483 for a key-board* intended for use in a "Braille"
typewriter.
Subclass:
110
Including oriental language:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is capable of imprinting character*
symbols used in an oriental language.
(1) Note. An "Oriental" language is one that is used by the
inhabitants of Asia. Such languages as Chinese, Japanese,
Burmese, etc. are examples of Oriental languages.
Subclass:
111
Including semitic language:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is capable of imprinting character*
symbols used in a Semitic language.
(1) Note. A "Semitic" language is one that is used by such
people as Arabs and Hebrews. It is characterized by being
written and read from right to left.
Subclass:
112
ANNULAR TYPEWRITER (E.G., FOR TYPING AROUND CIRCUMFERENCE OF
PLATEN):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter having a cylindrical or partially cylindrical
platen* for supporting or backing a record-medium* in which
typewriter character* symbols are imprinted on the
record-medium in such manner that each successively imprinted
character in a direction extending around the periphery of
the platen.
(1) Note. Successive characters may be imprinted in a
helical arrangement around the periphery, thus requiring no
mechanism for line-space* distances, or the platen may be
moved axially between successive print-line* typing, thus
producing line-spaces.
Subclass:
113
Including vertically disposed platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 112. Subject matter
wherein said platen* turns about an axis during use of the
typewriter, and wherein said axis extends upwardly relative
to the typewriter.
(1) Note. The turning of the platen is in increments
corresponding to character-space* distances and may be
rotated in one direction for a cylindrical platen or be
rotated by increments followed by oscillation in a return
direction for a partially cylindrical platen.
Subclass:
114
Platen axis horizontal and extending front-to-rear:
This subclass is indented under subclass 112. Subject matter
wherein said platen* turns about an axis that is disposed to
be parallel to the base of the typewriter and parallel to the
sides of the typewriter.
Subclass:
115
Power actuated:
This subclass is indented under subclass 112. Subject matter
wherein one or more mechanisms of the typewriter is/are
driven with the help of energy derived from a source other
than the energy of the typist.
Subclass:
116
MUSIC-ROLL OR MUSICAL-NOTATION TYPEWRITER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter capable of imprinting character* symbols on a
music roll, or capable of imprinting character symbols
representing the notes used for indicating the signs and
tones of a musical composition.
(1) Note. A "music roll" is a web of record-medium* having
holes therein, the holes controlling the playing of a "player
piano". In the typewriter of this subclass the music roll is
also imprinted with the words of the song being played on the
player piano, so that a user may sing along with the music
being played.
Subclass:
117
Musical-notation typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 110. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter capable of
imprinting character* symbols representing the notes used for
indicating the signs and tones of a musical composition.
Subclass:
118.1
TYPING BY HEATED DIE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter in which character* symbols are successively
imprinted or formed in or on a surface of a record-medium* by
applying a piece of metal having a form (image) therein
directly against said record-medium* and heating said metal
to thereby provide the image on the record-medium*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
120.01 for apparatus for recording utilizing heat applied
indirectly to the record-medium*.
Subclass:
118.2
TYPING BY OTHER THAN TYPE-FACE OR TYPE-DIE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter in which character* symbols are successively
imprinted or formed on a surface of a record-medium* by
forming the character* portion by portion.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
345, Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface
Processing, and Selective Visual Display Systems, subclasses
141-142 and 467+ for character or font generation and
display.
358, Facsimile and Static Presentation Processing, subclasses
1.1-1.18 for processing of data for presentation to the
print-head.
707, Data Processing: Database and File Management, Data
Structures, or Document Processing, subclasses 500-542 for
document processing performed by a computer for
presentation.
Subclass:
118.3
Electroconductive transfer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 118.2. Subject
matter wherein a recording means conducts current through a
resistive layer of the record-medium* or an ink* carrier for
generating heat to produce a record upon the record-medium*
by the reason of the medium becoming scorched, burned,
marked, or otherwise thermochemically changed.
Subclass:
120.01
Thermal:
This subclass is indented under subclass 118.2. Subject
matter wherein a recording means, due to its being in a
heated condition, produces a record upon the record-medium*
as by reason of the medium becoming scorched, burned, marked,
or otherwise thermochemically changed.
Subclass:
120.02
Multicolor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject
matter wherein the record produced is polychromatic.
Subclass:
120.03
Having multilayered colored transfer material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.02. Subject
matter including an ink* carrier comprising stratified
strips, each with a different chromatic ink*.
Subclass:
120.04
Having single layer colored transfer material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.02. Subject
matter including an ink* carrier consisting of a single strip
having plural regions, each having a different chromatic
ink*.
Subclass:
120.05
Block driving:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject
matter wherein the recording means comprises recording
elements grouped into sections capable of being selectively
energized.
Subclass:
120.06
Sequentially:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.05. Subject
matter in which at least two of the sections are energized
alternately.
Subclass:
120.07
Gradational recording:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject
matter wherein the shading of the produced record varies.
Subclass:
120.08
Preheating:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject
matter wherein the recording means, record-medium*, or
ink*-carrier is warmed-up prior to recording.
Subclass:
120.09
Density control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject
matter comprising a regulating means for controlling the
amount of energy supplied to the recording means to maintain
a uniform output on the record.
Subclass:
120.1
By number of heated recording elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.09. Subject
matter wherein the regulating means controls the amount of
energy supplied to selected recording elements based on a
number of recording elements being simultaneously energized.
Subclass:
120.11
In accordance with output characteristic of recording
elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.09. Subject
matter wherein the regulating means responds to variations in
resistance values of heat radiating resistor elements
constituting recording elements of the recording means.
Subclass:
120.12
By voltage regulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.09. Subject
matter wherein the regulating means responds to changes in
electrical potential across a heating element used for
heating the recording means.
Subclass:
120.13
By transfer material or record receiver:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.09. Subject
matter wherein the regulating means is responsive to a
parameter associated with the ink* carrier, the ink*, or the
record-medium*.
(1) Note. Examples of the parameter are: the thickness of
the ink* carrier, the thickness of the paper, the volatility
of the ink*, etc.
Subclass:
120.14
In accordance with temperature of the recording means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.09. Subject
matter wherein the regulating means responds to variations in
temperature of the recording means.
Subclass:
120.15
By history of recording elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.09. Subject
matter wherein the regulating means responds to the amount of
energy supplied to a particular recording element during its
previous use.
Subclass:
120.16
Recording means support or actuator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject
matter comprising a mechanism for holding or moving the
recording means from an operative position in which the
recording means is pressed against the record-medium* to an
inoperative position in which the recording means is released
from pressing engagement with the record-medium*.
Subclass:
120.17
Adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.16. Subject
matter comprising means for selectively varying pressure
applying the recording means against the record-medium*.
Subclass:
120.18
Pre- or post-image recording treatment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 120.01. Subject
matter comprising fixing or fusing means for applying
substances, energy, or pressure upon the record-medium* or
the record.
Subclass:
124.01
Character formation by impact (e.g., wire matrix):
This subclass is indented under subclass 118.2. Subject
matter wherein the character* symbol is formed on the
record-medium by percussing two or more discrete elements
(i.e., impact members) arranged in a group by use of an
actuator directly or indirectly against the record-medium*.
(1) Note. The discrete elements are arranged into the
configuration of a selected character*, the same or different
discrete elements being selectable to arrange such elements
into the configuration of a different selected character*,
wherein each of the discrete elements is a member that is
movable from a rest position where it does not effect
imprinting to an active position where it effects printing,
and wherein the configuration of a selected character* symbol
is formed by moving selected members from a rest position to
an active position by energization of actuators in the
printhead.
Subclass:
124.02
With signal conditioning:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.01. Subject
matter including an electrically powered actuator and means
to modify the input power thereof (i.e., the signal) to
control operating parameters of the actuator.
(1) Note. These parameters include: length of actuation,
strength of actuation, and exact time of actuation.
Subclass:
124.03
Overheat protection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.02. Subject
matter wherein the input power is modified to prevent
excessive temperatures in the actuator.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
124.13 for details of the structure of the printhead which
dissipates heat produced by the printhead.
Subclass:
124.04
Responsive to impact member position:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.02. Subject
matter wherein the input power is modified according to the
location of the actuators along the print-line*.
Subclass:
124.05
Control of drive force:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.02. Subject
matter wherein the input power is modified in order to change
the strength of the pressure applied by the impact member
against the record-medium*.
Subclass:
124.06
Manifold form or plural copies:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.05. Subject
matter wherein the force which is applied to the
record-medium* by the impact members is varied according to
the number of sheets of the record-medium* being printed
upon.
Subclass:
124.07
With wear or defect compensation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.02. Subject
matter wherein impact member selection is determined so as to
distribute even consumption thereof, or to offset broken or
missing impact members.
Subclass:
124.08
Plural printheads:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.01. Subject
matter including more than one discrete groupings of impact
members arranged along the print-line*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
82 for typewriters which have more than one printhead, which
may be more than one type of printhead.
Subclass:
124.09
Multicolor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.08. Subject
matter wherein the character* symbol or successive character*
symbols produced are polychromatic.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
120.02 for thermal printers which print in multiple colors.
216.1 for ribbon* movement systems which are used in
multicolor printers.
240 for specifics of ribbon*s having multiple colors
thereon.
Subclass:
124.1
With inking:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.01. Subject
matter wherein ink* is applied to the impact members prior to
the impact members percussing the record-medium*.
(1) Note. This is generally done by providing a reservoir
for ink* on the printhead, and the impact members are driven
through or next to a pad which distributes the ink* onto the
impact members.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
470 for structure which directly inks type-faces in a
typewriter.
Subclass:
124.11
Printhead:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.01. Subject
matter including significant structure of the impact member,
the actuators, or the housing therefor (i.e., the
printhead).
Subclass:
124.12
Having assembly means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.11. Subject
matter including structure for interconnecting portions of
the printhead together or for connecting the printhead to a
support.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
29, Metal Working, various subclasses for methods of assembly
of printheads.
Subclass:
124.13
Overheat protection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.11. Subject
matter including cooling means.
(1) Note. This subclass is limited to patents wherein the
printhead has structure for transferring heat therefrom,
e.g., fins, fluid flow means, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
124.03 for ways of controlling the power to the printhead to
reduce heat buildup.
Subclass:
124.14
With actuator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.11. Subject
matter including significant structure of the means for
applying percussing force to the impact members (i.e., the
actuator).
(1) Note. Patents claiming a printhead having significant
actuator structure are classified here.
Subclass:
124.15
Single actuator for simultaneous actuation of plural impact
members:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.14. Subject
matter including means for concurrently percussing more than
one impact member against the record-medium* by use of a
single actuator.
Subclass:
124.16
Electrostrictive, magnetostrictive, or piezoelectric:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.14. Subject
matter wherein the percussive force is produced in the
actuator by periodic deformation of a dielectric body as a
result of an applied electric or magnetic field or electric
voltage.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
310, Electric Generator or Motor Structure, 311 for
specifics of general purpose piezoelectric actuators.
Subclass:
124.17
Actuator having electromagnet:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.14. Subject
matter wherein the means for producing the percussive force
includes a looped conductor for conducting electrical current
which produces a magnetic* field.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
335, Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets,
and Electromagnets, 209, for details of specific
electromagnet structure.
Subclass:
124.18
Electrical component:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.17. Subject
matter including significant structure to an electric circuit
or any portion thereof for conducting electric current
through the looped conductor.
(1) Note. The electromagnet is not considered to be a part
of the "significant structure to an electric circuit" for
purposes of classification in this subclass.
(2) Note. This subclass could include, for example, a
printhead with an electromagnet having a particular
electrical terminal or connector, etc.
Subclass:
124.19
Moving coil:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.18. Subject
matter wherein the looped conductor is displaceable relative
to the housing responsive to the magnetic* field produced
therein.
Subclass:
124.2
Permanent magnet:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.18. Subject
matter wherein the magnetic* field acts against the magnetic*
field of a material which is magnetically polarized.
(1) Note. This does not include magnetic* fields which
exist for a moving coil.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
335, Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets,
and Electromagnets, 229 for general purpose electromagnets
which include a permanent magnet.
Subclass:
124.21
With biasing means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.17. Subject
matter including resilient means acting to move the impact
members against the force exerted by the magnetic* field.
Subclass:
124.22
Backstop:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.21. Subject
matter including significant structure of means for halting
movement of the actuator towards its rest position.
Subclass:
124.23
Armature structure or mounting:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.17. Subject
matter including significant structure of a movable portion
of the electromagnet or support means therefor.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
124.31 for details of the attachment of an impact member to
an electromagnetically driven actuator.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
335, Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets,
and Electromagnets, 270 for details of mounting general
purpose electromagnetic* actuators, and subclasses 279+ for
structure of armatures used in general purpose
electromagnets.
Subclass:
124.24
Impact member guide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.11. Subject
matter including significant structure of means for directing
the impact member towards the record-medium*.
Subclass:
124.25
With lubricator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.24. Subject
matter including means for applying a friction reducing
substance between the impact member and the directing means.
Subclass:
124.26
Specific material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.24. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to the material
which forms the directing means for the impact member.
Subclass:
124.27
Including shifting of guide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.24. Subject
matter wherein the impact member directing means is movable
relative to the housing or to a carriage* which supports the
housing.
(1) Note. This is usually done in order to increase the
density of output by shifting one set of impact members
relative to another on the same printhead.
Subclass:
124.28
Impact member tip arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.11. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to the layout of
the record-medium* contacting portion of the impact members
within the housing.
(1) Note. To be in this subclass, the layout should be
arranged in other than a straight line.
Subclass:
124.29
Impact member structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.11. Subject
matter including significant structure of the member which
causes the impression on the record-medium*.
Subclass:
124.3
Tip cross-section:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.29. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to the shape of the
portion of the impact member that impacts against the
record-medium*.
(1) Note. This subclass does not include impact members
which are uniformly circular.
Subclass:
124.31
With attachment or engagement means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.29. Subject
matter including means for connecting or interfacing the
impact member with an actuator.
(1) Note. This subclass includes caps which are formed on
the impact members.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
124.23 for details of an electromagnetically driven
actuator.
Subclass:
124.32
Specific material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124.29. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to the material
which forms the impact member.
(1) Note. This includes but is not limited to different
materials for the impact tip as opposed to the remainder of
the impact member.
Subclass:
127
TYPING TO PRODUCE EMBOSSED CHARACTER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter in which imprinting on a record-medium* is
accomplished by a type-die* that contacts a surface of the
record-medium and permanently deforms the surface to raise or
lower the contacted surface relative to the uncontacted
surface into a line representing a character*.
(1) Note. An example of the form of typing accomplished by
the typewriter of this and indented subclasses is the making
of a credit card or an address plate having letters and
symbols raised above the surface of the card or plate.
Subclass:
128
Character embossed or typed on nonplanar article (e.g., golf
ball, toothbrush, etc):
This subclass is indented under subclass 127. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the record-medium* that
the typewriter is typing on, the record-medium being an
object having a shape or configuration that is other than
flat, and wherein the type-die* permanently embosses a
character* symbol in a surface of the object.
Subclass:
129
By type-die mounted on carrier movable for selection of
character:
This subclass is indented under subclass 127. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with a support for a
multiplicity of type-die* elements for embossing the
different character* symbols that the typewriter is capable
of embossing, which support is enabled to be moved relative
to the record-medium*, whereby any of the type-die elements
may be selected to be impressed against the record-medium;
and the selected type-die element may be impressed to emboss
a character symbol on the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
138 for similar structure for mounting piercing type-die
elements thereon.
Subclass:
130
Including programmed-control-system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 129. Subject matter
wherein the selection of a type-die*, or the control of a
function* of the typewriter, is governed by a
programmed-control-system*.
Subclass:
131
Electrically powered:
This subclass is indented under subclass 129. Subject matter
wherein electricity is used to energize selection of a
type-die* or the operation of a function* of the typewriter.
Subclass:
132
Type-die reciprocable on carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 129. Subject matter
wherein the selected type-die* element is moved to and fro
relative to the support, the movement occurring for the
purpose of impressing the selected type-die against the
record-medium*.
Subclass:
133
On endless-band carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 129. Subject matter
wherein the support for the type-die* elements is an
elongated, closed-loop strip movable in the direction of its
elongation, to select the type-die to be impressed against
the record-medium*.
Subclass:
134
On rotatable carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 129. Subject matter
wherein the support for the type-die* elements is a member
that turns about an axis to select the type-die to be
impressed against the record medium*.
Subclass:
134.1
Actuated by key-board control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 134. Subject matter
wherein the type-die* element that is to be impressed against
the record-medium* is selected by pressing a corresponding
key* element located on a key-board*, the pressing of which
key causes selection of type-die and movement of the selected
type-die to the print-point*.
Subclass:
134.2
Including type-die movable relative to carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 134.1. Subject
matter wherein the selected type-die* element moves to the
print-point* with respect to its support and to the other
type-die elements that are on the support.
Subclass:
134.3
With magazine for supply of record-medium plates:
This subclass is indented under subclass 134.2. Subject
matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means for
storing a quantity of record-medium* articles that are to be
embossed, said means including a receptacle or container for
storing the articles.
Subclass:
134.4
On manually held embosser:
This subclass is indented under subclass 134. Subject matter
wherein the member that supports the type-die* elements is
part of an instrumentality for embossing character* symbols
one at a time in succession, which instrumentality is
intended to be grasped in a hand of a user and operated while
so grasped.
Subclass:
134.5
Including web supply of record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 134.4. Subject
matter wherein the instrumentality is provided with means for
storing a quantity of record-medium* in the form of an
indeterminate-length strip of material on which character*
symbols are to be embossed.
Subclass:
134.6
Including web supply of record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 134. Subject matter
wherein the support for the type-die* elements is part of an
instrumentality, which instrumentality is provided with means
for storing a quantity of record-medium* in the form of an
indeterminate-length strip of material on which character*
symbols are to be embossed.
Subclass:
135
TYPING TO PRODUCE PIERCED CHARACTER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter in which imprinting on a record-medium* is
accomplished by a type-die* that contacts a surface of the
record-medium and cuts through that surface into the opposite
surface to form one or more perforations in the surface,
which perforations taken together represent a character*.
(1) Note. An example of the form of typing accomplished in
the typewriter of this and indented subclasses is the writing
of a bank check or money order representing an amount of
money to be paid, the digits representing the amount being
pierced or scarified into the surface of the check so that
alteration of the check cannot be accomplished without
visible indication of an attempt to alter the check.
Subclass:
136
Cutout character for stencil:
This subclass is indented under subclass 135. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the formation of a
character* symbol by excising the record-medium* using
type-die* elements that sever the record-medium to produce
perforations therein, each perforation having an outline of a
character symbol.
(1) Note. The record-medium so severed with cutout
characters is used as a stencil by placing the stencil on
surface and coating the stencil and surface with pigment.
When the stencil is lifted from the surface, the pigmented
areas on the surface will form the characters that have been
cut out of the stencil record-medium.
Subclass:
137
Check-protection character:
This subclass is indented under subclass 135. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the formation or
character* symbols on a form that directs a bank of financial
institution to pay money, or a form that shows the amount of
money to be paid for value received.
(1) Note. The significance of the particular form of
character in the typewriter of this and indented subclasses
is that such characters cannot be altered without detection;
thus, the amount of money that the check represents will not
be raised in value.
Subclass:
138
By type-die mounted on carrier movable for selection of
character:
This subclass is indented under subclass 137. Subject
matter+ wherein a typewriter is provided with a support for a
multiplicity of type-die elements for piercing the different
character* symbols that the typewriter is capable of
piercing, which support is enabled to be moved relative to
the record-medium* whereby any of the type-die elements may
be selected to be impressed against the record-medium and the
selected type-die element may be impressed to pierce a
character symbol on the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
129 for similar structure for mounting embossing type-die
elements thereon.
Subclass:
138.1
Electrically powered:
This subclass is indented under subclass 138. Subject matter
wherein electricity is used to energize selection of
type-die* or operation of a function* of the typewriter.
Subclass:
138.2
On rotatable carrier (e.g., for scarifying elements, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 138. Subject matter
wherein the support for the type-die elements is a member
that turns about an axis to select the type-die to be
impressed against the record-medium*.
(1) Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the type-die
elements usually pierce one surface of the record-medium to
roughen that surface beyond a level where the surface may be
made smooth again. The intent is not necessarily for the
type-die to perforate both surfaces of the record-medium, but
rather to scarify at least one surface.
Subclass:
138.3
Actuated by key-board control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 138.2. Subject
matter wherein the type-die* element that is to be impressed
against the record-medium* is selected by pressing a
corresponding key* element located on a key-board*, the
pressing of which key causes selection of a type-die and
movement of the selected type-die to the print-point*.
Subclass:
138.4
Including plural-character type-die:
This subclass is indented under subclass 138.2. Subject
matter wherein at least one of the type-die* elements is
constructed so as to have type-dies representing or
corresponding to more than one character* symbol, whereby
when one of such elements is impressed against the
record-medium*, a plurality of character symbols will be
formed in the record-medium.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass usually imprints
an amount of money spelled in letter symbols rather than
numeral symbols.
Subclass:
138.5
And rotating contact with platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 138.4. Subject
matter wherein the type-die* elements turn about an axis
while being impressed against the record-medium* that is
backed up by a platen*.
Subclass:
138.6
For type-die including piercing or cutting elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 138.2. Subject
matter wherein the type-die* elements include slender
elements, each having a sharp point at one end, or include
elements, each having a sharp edge, which sharp point or
edges penetrate through both opposite surfaces of the
record-medium* as the type-die impacts the record-medium.
Subclass:
139
INCLUDING TYPE-SET-ASSEMBLAGE MOUNTED ON CARRIER AND
RELATIVELY MOVABLE FOR SELECTION AND FOR IMPACT OF
TYPE-FACE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a
type-head-carrier* or with a type-face-carrier*, either of
which carriers supports a type-set-assemblage* for movement
of the type-face* elements thereon relative to the
record-medium*, whereby any of the type-face elements may be
selected or chosen to be impressed against a record-medium
and the selected or chosen type-face element may be impressed
to imprint a character* symbol.
(1) Note. The definition of type-head- carrier in the
Glossary, section III, discusses the difference between a
type-head-carrier and a type-face-carrier. Briefly, a
type-head-carrier supports a type-head* wherein all
type-faces are integral one with the others, whereas a
type-face-carrier supports type-faces that are movable, one
with respect to the others. The difference between
"selected" and "chosen" is also discussed in the Glossary
under the definition of case-shift* and other definitions.
Briefly, a particular type-face is selected from among the
many available from a type-set-assemblage whereas an
upper-case* form of letter (as distinguished from a
lower-case* form of the same letter) is chosen from the forms
available on one key* element.
(2) Note. In some typewriters movement of the selected or
chosen type-face for impact is a relative movement; that is,
in these typewriters the platen* (and the record-medium
supported thereby) are moved toward the selected or chosen
type-face, whereas in most typewriters the type-face moves
toward the platen.
(3) Note. The definition of type-bar-segment* discusses the
differencebetween a type-bar-segment and a type-face-carrier.
Briefly, a type-bar-segment supports a type-set assemblage
for case-shift movement (i.e., choice of upper-case or
lower-case), whereas a type-face-carrier supports a type-set-
assemblage for selection of type-face from among many
type-faces as well as for choice of upper-case or
lower-case.
Subclass:
140
Including type-faces movable relative to type-face-carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with a type-face-carrier*
that supports a type-set-assemblage* comprising a plurality
of separate type-face* elements, and wherein the typewriter
is also provided with a mechanism for selecting or choosing
the particular type-face that is to be impressed against the
record-medium* and with a mechanism for moving said type-face
toward the print-point*.
(1) Note. In this and indented subclasses the term
type-face may include, for example, an element carrying both
the upper-case* and lower-case* forms of the same letter, and
both forms on the same element are moved together, although
only the chosen form of the letter is impressed against the
record-medium. The relative movement referred to is that
which moves the element for the selected letter away from the
other type-face elements of a type-set-assemblage and toward
the print-point.
Subclass:
141
Slidable type-faces mounted on reciprocable carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 140. Subject matter
wherein the type-face-carrier* supports a plurality of
type-face* elements each of which elements may be
reciprocated relative to the type-face-carrier, and wherein
the type-face-carrier may be reciprocated relative to the
typewriter.
(1) Note. The direction of reciprocation of the type-face
elements is usually perpendicular to the direction of
reciprocation of the type-face-carrier.
Subclass:
141.1
On rotatable or oscillatable carrier reciprocable along its
axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 141. Subject matter
wherein the type-face-carrier* may be reciprocated relative
to the typewriter and may also be turned in one direction of
to-and-fro in opposite directions about an axis of turning,
and wherein the reciprocation of the type-face carrier is
along a line that coincides with said axis of turning.
Subclass:
142
Slidable type-faces on rotatable carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 140. Subject matter
wherein the type-face-carrier* supports a plurality of
type-face* elements each of which elements may be
reciprocated relative to the type-face-carrier, and wherein
the type-face-carrier may be turned on an axis relative to
the typewriter.
Subclass:
143
Rotatable type-face-carrier including type-faces on pivotable
arms:
This subclass is indented under subclass 140. Subject matter
wherein the type-face-carrier* supports a plurality of
members, each of which members is oscillatable to and fro on
its own axis, and each of which members supports one of the
type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage*, and wherein
the type-face-carrier may be turned on an axis relative to
the typewriter.
(1) Note. Usually the members (i.e., pivotable arms) extend
in a direction parallel to the axis of the type-face-carrier
and pivot in a direction extending radially of the axis.
Subclass:
144
Type-face-carrier including type-faces on flexible arms:
This subclass is indented under subclass 140. Subject matter
wherein the type-face-carrier* supports a plurality of
members, each of which members is resilient and oscillatable
to and fro relative to the carrier, and each of which members
supports one of the type-face* elements of a
type-set-assemblage*.
Subclass:
144.1
Rotatable or oscillatable carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 144. Subject matter
wherein the type-face-carrier* may be turned relative to the
typewriter either in one direction or to and fro in opposite
directions about an axis of turning, thereby to turn the
plurality of members and type-face* elements relative to the
typewriter.
Subclass:
144.2
Carrier having coplanar flexible arms (e.g., "daisy" wheel,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 144.1. Subject
matter wherein the type-face carrier* includes the plurality
of resilient members, and wherein the members extend radially
from the axis of the carrier in substantially the same plane,
and each member, and the type-face* element supported
thereby, oscillates in a second plane that is coincident with
said axis.
(1) Note. The term "daisy" wheel has been applied to this
form of type-set- assemblage* and carrier due to its
resemblance to a daisy.
Subclass:
144.3
Continuously rotated carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 144.2. Subject
matter wherein the type-face-carrier* turns in one direction
without stopping during the typing operation of the
typewriter.
Subclass:
144.4
Manually rotated carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 144.2. Subject
matter wherein the type-face-carrier* turns by power applied
directly by the typist to the carrier.
Subclass:
145
Type-faces on deformable type-face-carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 140. Subject matter
wherein the type-face-carrier* is made of a material that is
resilient and supports a plurality of type-face* elements
thereon, and wherein the selected or chosen type-face is
yieldably displaced relative to the type-faces remaining in
the type-set-assemblage* and the displaced type-face is
impressed against the record-medium*.
Subclass:
145.1
Rotatable carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 145. Subject matter
wherein the type-face-carrier* may be turned on an axis
relative to the typewriter.
Subclass:
145.2
Cylindrical carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 145.1. Subject
matter wherein the type-face-carrier* has the configuration
of a cylinder or a cylindroid.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
152 for a type drum having a cylindrical appearance.
Subclass:
146
Including endless-band carrier for type-faces:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with a member that supports
a type-set-assemblage* for movement of the type-face*
elements therewith relative to the typewriter, which member
is an elongated, closed-loop strip trained around two or more
pulleys and movable in the direction of its elongation to
select or choose the type-face to be impressed, and which
type-face elements are moved with the strip in a direction
substantially perpendicular to the elongation toward the
record-medium* to impress the type-face against the
record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
134 for an endless-band type-face-carrier* in an embossing
typewriter.
Subclass:
147
Type-faces arranged in rectilinear row and selected by
reciprocable movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with a member that supports
a type-set-assemblage* for movement of the type-face*
elements therewith relative to the typewriter, which member
may be reciprocated along a first straight line for selection
or choice of the type-face elements thereon, and on which
member the type-face elements are supported in a second
straight line that is parallel to said first straight line.
(1) Note. The reciprocating movement defined above is that
which is needed for selection of choice of a type-face. There
may also be another movement, for example, a pivoting motion
toward the record-medium*, imparted to the member for
impressing the type-face against the record-medium.
Subclass:
148
On rotatable carrier having plural rectilinear rows:
This subclass is indented under subclass 147. Subject matter
wherein the member is reciprocated along said first straight
line and also may be turned about an axis that is parallel to
said first straight line, and on which member two or more
sets of type-face* elements are supported, each set in a
straight line parallel to said first straight line.
(1) Note. Each set of type-face elements defined above may
comprise all or part of a type-set-assemblage*, or may
comprise upper-case* or lower-case* forms of the same letter,
or may comprise type-set-assemblage having different font*
assortments of type-faces. The rotation of the member
enables selection or choice from among the type-faces of
different sets of type-faces.
Subclass:
149
Plural type-heads mounted for selective individual
type-head-imprinting movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with two or more typehead*
elements that are supported on the typewriter to enable
motion of each of the typeheads toward the print-point* of
the typewriter separately from the other(s) to imprint the
selected or chosen type-face* element on the record-medium*.
Subclass:
150
Type-heads arranged for selective individual imprinting
movement away from coaxial rest position:
This subclass is indented under subclass 149. Subject matter
wherein each of the type-head* elements is supported for
rotation on its own axis of rotation and each of the
type-heads may be moved toward the print-point* of the
typewriter separately from the other(s) to imprint the
selected or chosen type-face* element on the record-medium*
and wherein all of the axes of rotation of all the type-head
elements are normally in the same line, the selected
type-head being moved away from said line when it is moved
toward the print-point.
Subclass:
151
Turret carrier for type-heads:
This subclass is indented under subclass 149. Subject matter
wherein the type-head* elements are each supported on a
platform or member, which platform or member is capable of
rotation about an axis of rotation, and each of the type-head
elements being capable of separate movement toward the
print-point* of the typewriter.
Subclass:
151.1
Axis of turret carrier parallel to platen axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 151. Subject matter
wherein the print-point* is located on or adjacent to the
platen* of the typewriter, which platen is rotatable about an
axis, and wherein the axis of rotation of said platform is
parallel to the axis of rotation of the platen.
Subclass:
152
Type drum having multiple type-set-assemblages:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a member that is (a)
cylindrical or cylindroidal, (b) rotatable about an axis that
extends through the cylinder parallel to the circumference of
the cylinder, and (c) supporting a plurality of
type-set-assemblage* groups of type-face* elements on the
circumference of the cylinder.
(1) Note. Usually the type drum extends in length to
substantially the full width of the record-medium* and each
of the type-set-assemblages extends around the circumference
of the type drum. The number of type-set-assemblages
provided on the type drum corresponds to the number of
character* symbols and character-space* distances that may be
included within the width of the record-medium. Selection of
type-face for the first character of a print-line* is made
from the first type-set-assemblage and selection of the
second character of that print-line is made from the next
adjacent type-set-assemblage, the action being repeated until
the entire print-line has been imprinted.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
145.2 for a cylindrical, deformable type-face-carrier*.
Subclass:
153
Imprint by movement of record-medium against type-face:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein the relative movement between a selected or chosen
type-face* and the record-medium* occurs as result of the
record-medium being moved to the type-face for imprint of a
character* symbol on the record-medium.
Subclass:
154
By hammer impacting record-medium against type-face on
type-head (e.g., type shuttle, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 153. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* is moved to a type-face* that is
supported by a type-head* by means of a striking member that
imparts to the record-medium a sudden movement toward the
selected or chosen type-face.
Subclass:
154.1
Including selection of type-face:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with mechanism for
selecting or choosing the particular type-face* that is to be
impressed against the record-medium* by the movement of the
record-medium toward the type-face.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
161.1 for selecting mechanism on a typewriter having a
type-head* movable for imprinting.
Subclass:
154.2
Via pulley and cord arrangement (e.g., summing
displacements):
This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject
matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes an
elongated, flexible element trained around a plurality of
rotatable wheels, the mechanism being connected to a
type-head* that supports the type-face* elements.
Subclass:
154.3
By shortest peripheral path:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject
matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a type-head*
having a cylindroidal or spheroidal surface having the
type-face* elements of a type-set-assemblage* thereon, which
type-head is normally in a particular rest position and is
moved to a second position at which the selected or chosen
type-face will be impressed against the record-medium*, and
wherein significance is attributed to movement of the
type-head that results in the least amount of type-head
movement as it moves from the rest position to the second
position.
Subclass:
154.4
Via coded disc in electric or magnetic circuit (e.g.,
photoelectric):
This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject
matter. wherein said selecting mechanism, includes one or
more circular plates, each plate being rotatable to a
position where particular index characteristics on the
plate(s) are related to an arrangement within the mechanism
that causes completion of an electrical or magnetic circuit,
the completion of the circuit effecting selection or choice
of the type-face* desired by the typist.
(1) Note. The index characteristics may be, for example,
notches or apertures in the discs, which permit passage of a
beam of light that actuates a photoelectric cell when the
notches or apertures in several discs are aligned, or may be
magnetic code in one or more discs, which completes a circuit
when proper alignment of the code disc(s) is accomplished.
Subclass:
154.5
Via stepping motor responsive to selection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject
matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes an electric
motor that rotates incrementally, the rotation being caused
by the selection or choice of a type-face* and the motor
being connected to a type-head* that supports the type-face
elements.
Subclass:
155
Via electrical or electromagnetic means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject
matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes an
electrical circuit or an electromagnetic device connected to
a type-head* that supports the type-face* elements.
(1) Note. The mechanism or circuit for this subclass may
include a commutator, a solenoid, an electromagnetic coil, an
induction coil, or other similar device used in the selection
or choice of a type-face.
Subclass:
155.1
Including plural-function actuation by electromagnet(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 155. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes an electromagnet
powered by an electrical current, and wherein the typewriter
includes mechanism for performing at least one other
function*, which function is energized by either the same
electromagnet that energizes the selecting mechanism or by a
different electromagnet powered by an electrical current.
Subclass:
156
Via helical arrangement of projections:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject
matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes a rotatable
cylindroidal member having elements on the cylindrical
surface thereof that protrude from the surface, which
elements are arranged to form a helix on the cylindrical
surface and which elements engage portions of the selecting
mechanism to connect the mechanism to a type-head* that
supports the type-face* elements.
Subclass:
156.1
Via mechanically permutated bar(s), disc(s), or plate(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject
matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes one or more
members, each member being either (a) an elongated component
that is movable along its length, or (b) a circular component
that is rotatable, or (c) a flat and relatively thin
component that is movable in a plane parallel to its width
and length dimensions, and also having particular index
characteristics on the member, which member(s) is/are moved
to a position relative to an arrangement within the mechanism
where the index characteristics are aligned to enable
movement of another component of the mechanism to effect
selection or choice of the type-face* desired by the typist.
Subclass:
156.2
Via planetary gear arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154.1. Subject
matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes a plurality
of toothed wheels in mesh one with the other(s) and at least
one rotating and revolving about another, while in mesh
therewith, which assemblage of toothed wheels in connected to
a type-head* that supports type-face* elements, one of which
elements is to be selected or chosen for impression.
Subclass:
156.3
Including latch means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 156.2. Subject
matter wherein the assemblage of toothed elements is provided
with means to temporarily secure the toothed elements
together until the selected or chosen type-face* has been
impressed against the record-medium*.
Subclass:
157
Including type-faces arranged along helical path(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a type-head* that is
formed as a rotatable, cylindroidal member having type-face*
elements on the cylindroidal surface thereof, which type-face
elements are arrayed as a helix on the cylindroidal surface,
and wherein selection or choice of the type-face that is to
be impressed against the record-medium* is made from one of
the helically arrayed elements.
(1) Note. The type-set-assemblage* of type-faces may be
arranged in one or more helical paths.
Subclass:
157.1
Including particular structure of hammer(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to said striking member or
the means for causing movement of, or supporting, said
striking member.
Subclass:
157.2
Electromagnetically actuated:
This subclass is indented under subclass 157.1. Subject
matter wherein the striking member is moved by a magnet that
is powered by electricity.
Subclass:
157.3
For variable impression (e.g., impact control):
This subclass is indented under subclass 157.1. Subject
matter wherein movement of the striking member is regulated
as to its striking force, whereby the striking force can be
changed as desired.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
116 for impact control in a typewriter wherein a type-head*
moves toward the record-medium.
Subclass:
157.4
Hammer(s) mounted on endless belt or in helical array:
This subclass is indented under subclass 157.1. Subject
matter wherein the striking member(s) is/are supported on an
elongated, closed-loop strip trained around two or more
pulleys and movable in the direction of its elongation, or
wherein the striking members are supported on a rotatable,
cylindroidal component and are arranged in a helix around the
circumference of said component.
Subclass:
158
Including platen for moving record-medium against type-face
and mechanism for feeding record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 153. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a platen* that is a
backup for the record-medium* and is also provided with a
mechanism for moving the record-medium in a line-space*
direction, which platen also moves the record-medium toward
the selected or chosen type-face* for imprint of a character*
symbol on the record-medium.
(1) Note. In this subclass the record-medium is moved in a
line-space direction by a mechanism other than the platen.
Subclass:
158.1
Including moving and feeding by platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 158. Subject matter
wherein the platen* also moves the record-medium* in a
line-space* direction by rotation of the platen.
Subclass:
159
Including platen for moving record-medium against type-face
and mechanism for inking type-face:
This subclass is indented under subclass 153. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a platen* that is a
backup for the record-medium* and is also provided with a
mechanism for applying ink* to the imprinting surface or line
of a type-face*, which platen moves the record-medium toward
the selected or chosen type-face for imprint of a character*
symbol on the record-medium after said type-face has been
inked.
Subclass:
160
Imprint by pivoting of type-head-carrier and type-head
against record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a type-head-carrier*
that supports a type-head* for movement relative to said
carrier so that any of the type-face* elements on the
type-head may be selected or chosen to be impressed on the
record-medium*, and wherein the type-head-carrier is
supported for arcuate movement of said carrier toward the
record-medium to imprint the corresponding character* symbol
on the record-medium.
Subclass:
161
Type-head-carrier movable on movable carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter
wherein said type-head-carrier* is mounted on a carriage* to
be arcuately movable toward the record-medium* to impress a
selected or chosen type-face* against the record-medium, and
wherein said carriage is movable to impart character-space*
and word-space* distances to the carriage and the
type-head-carrier that is mounted thereon.
Subclass:
161.1
Including selection of type-face (e.g., on "golf-ball"
type-head):
This subclass is indented under subclass 161. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with selecting mechanism
for moving the type-head* relative to its type-head-carrier*
to select or choose the particular type-face* that is to be
impressed against the record-medium* by movement of the
type-head toward the record-medium.
(1) Note. The term "golf-ball" type-head has been applied
to the type-heads of this subclass because of the spheroidal
configuration of the type-head elements found herein.
Subclass:
161.2
Via gear train:
This subclass is indented under subclass 161.1. Subject
matter wherein said mechanism for selecting or choosing the
particular type-face* is driven by an assemblage of toothed
wheels or toothed members in mesh, one with the other(s),
which assemblage is connected to a type-head* that supports
type-face elements, one of which elements is to be selected
or chosen for impression.
Subclass:
161.3
Gears mounted on type-head and type-head-carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 161.2. Subject
matter wherein at least one of the toothed wheels is
supported by, or integral with, the type-head* and at least
another of the toothed wheels is supported by the
type-head-carrier*.
Subclass:
161.4
Including gear (e.g., rack) reciprocated by transmission
mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 161.2. Subject
matter wherein said toothed member moves to-and-fro in a
straight line and is driven by an assemblage of elements that
converts movement of various kinds into the straight line
movement of the toothed member.
Subclass:
161.5
Via multiple cam surfaces:
This subclass is indented under subclass 161.1. Subject
matter wherein said mechanism for selecting or choosing the
particular type-face* is driven by a plurality of cam
surfaces that are connected by way of cam surface followers
to the type-head* that supports type-face elements, one of
which elements is to be selected or chosen for impression.
(1) Note. A "cam surface" is defined as the edge periphery
of a disc that rotates about an axis, the radial distance
from the axis to the periphery varying around the periphery.
As the disc rotates, the distance of a follower that is in
contact with the periphery will increase and decrease
relative to the axis of the disc, thus the rotation of the
disc will effect substantially radial movement of the
follower. The cam surfaces may be on separate disc elements
or may be on a single member having separate cam surfaces.
Subclass:
162
Type-head movable for selection of type-face:
This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with selecting mechanism
for moving the type-head* relatively to its
type-head-carrier* to select or choose the particular
type-face* that is to be impressed against the record-medium*
by movement of the type-head toward the record-medium.
(1) Note. The difference between this subclass (162) and
subclass 161.1 above is that in this subclass the type-head
is movable for selection of the particular type-face, whereas
in subclass 161.1 the type-head is mounted on a
type-head-carrier that is movable toward the record-medium,
and the type-head-carrier is mounted on a carriage* that is
movable for character-space* distances.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
154.1 for selecting a mechanism in a typewriter having a
hammer movable for imprinting.
161.1 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
162.1
Via pulley and cord arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes an elongated,
flexible element trained around a plurality of rotatable
wheels, the mechanism being connected to a type-head* that
supports the type-face* elements.
Subclass:
162.2
Via shortest peripheral path:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a type-head* having a
cylindroidal or spheroidal surface having the type-face*
elements of a type-set-assemblage* thereon, which type-head
is normally in a particular rest position and is moved to a
second position at which the selected or chosen type-face
will be impressed against the record-medium*, and wherein
significance is attributed to movement of the type-head that
results in the least amount of type-head movement as it moves
from the rest position to the second position.
Subclass:
162.3
Via coded disc in electric or magnetic circuit (e.g.,
photoelectric):
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes one or more
circular plates, each plate being rotatable to a position
where particular index characteristics on the plate(s) are
related to an arrangement within the mechanism that causes
completion of an electrical or magnetic circuit, the
completion of the circuit effecting selection or choice of
the type-face* desired by the typist.
(1) Note. The index characteristics may be, for example,
notches or apertures in the discs, which permit passage of a
beam of light, that actuates a photoelectric cell when the
notches or apertures in several discs are aligned, or may be
a magnetic code in one or more discs, which completes a
circuit when proper alignment of the code disc(s) is
accomplished.
Subclass:
163
Via stepping motor responsive to selection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes an electric motor
that rotates incrementally, the rotation being caused by the
selection or choice of a type-face* and the motor being
connected to a type-head* that supports the type-face
elements.
Subclass:
163.1
Via electrical or electromagnetic means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes an electrical
circuit or an electromagnetic device connected to a
type-head* that supports the type-face* elements.
(1) Note. The mechanism or circuit for this subclass may
include a commutator, a solenoid, an electromagnetic coil, an
induction coil, or other similar device used in the selection
or choice of a type-face.
Subclass:
163.2
Including electromagnetically actuated type-head movement
toward record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 163.1. Subject
matter wherein said electromagnetic device causes the
type-head* to be moved in the direction of the record-medium*
in order to effect the imprint of the selected type-face*
element.
Subclass:
163.3
Including plural-function actuation by electromagnet(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 163.1. Subject
matter wherein said selecting mechanism includes an
electromagnet powered by an electrical current, and wherein
the typewriter includes mechanism for performing at least one
other function*, which function is energized by either the
same electromagnet that energizes the selecting mechanism or
by a different electromagnet powered by an electrical
current.
Subclass:
164
Via helical arrangement of projections:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes a rotatable
cylindroidal member having elements on the cylindrical
surface thereof that protrude from the surface, which
elements are arranged to form a helix on the cylindrical
surface and which elements engage portions of the selecting
mechanism to connect the mechanism to a type-head* that
supports the type-face* elements.
Subclass:
164.1
Via pneumatic actuation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism is caused to operate by the
energy that is transmitted and said mechanism by way of
exertion of a force upon a gaseous material.
Subclass:
164.2
Via setting elements actuating selector-command members:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes one or more
members, each member being either (a) an elongated component
that is movable along its length, or (b) a circular component
that is rotatable, or (c) a flat and relatively thin
component that is movable in a plane parallel to its width
and length dimensions, and also having particular index
characteristics on the member, which member(s) is/are moved
to a position relative to an arrangement within the mechanism
where the index characteristics are aligned to enable
movement of another component of the mechanism to effect
selection or choice of the type-face* desired by the typist.
Subclass:
164.3
Control arm connected to selection gear and movable to engage
key-lever-actuated abutment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes a pivotable lever
having at one end thereof a toothed portion that is in mesh
with a toothed wheel that is associated with and drives the
type-head*, which lever has at the other end thereof a
portion that will engage any of a plurality of stops when one
of the stops is interposed into the path of pivoting of the
lever, the inter-position of the selected stop to be engaged
being made by the depression of a selected key* element.
Subclass:
164.4
Via stop pins actuatable by key-board:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes a plurality of
slender, elongated elements that are connected to the
type-head* for movement there of, each of said elements being
also connected to and moved by the depression of a selected
key* element.
Subclass:
164.5
Toothed member connected to selection gear and slidable by
key-lever movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes a bar having
serrations or teeth along one edge thereof, the serrations
being in mesh with a toothed wheel that is linked to the
type-head* for movement thereof, which bar is reciprocated to
various extents in accordance with the selection of a
particular key* element and the depression of the selected
key.
Subclass:
164.6
Selection gear rotated by key-lever movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism includes a toothed wheel
connected to the type-head* for movement thereof, which
toothed wheel is turned by the depression of a key* element
corresponding to the selected character* symbol desired to be
typed.
Subclass:
165
Simultaneous rotation and translation of type-head by
manually powered actuation (e.g., helical shift):
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein said selecting mechanism moves a type-head* that is
formed as a rotatable cylindroidal member having type-face*
elements on the cylindroidal surface thereof, which type-face
elements are arrayed as a helix on the cylindroidal surface,
and wherein selection or choice of the type-face that is to
be impressed against a record-medium* is made by turning the
member about its axis of rotation and moving the member along
the axis at the same time it is turning, the movement being
caused by a hand of the typist.
Subclass:
165.1
Via manually powered actuation other than by key-board (e.g.,
stylus selection):
This subclass is indented under subclass 162. Subject matter
wherein selection or choice of the type-face* that is to be
impressed against the record-medium* is made by a typist who
moves a member that is part of a selecting mechanism that
does not include a key-board*.
(1) Note. In this subclass (165.1) the typist manipulates a
slender, elongated rod (i.e., a stylus) to select or choose
the particular type-face for impression.
Subclass:
165.2
Including type-head movable to print-point by actuator common
to all type-faces:
This subclass is indented under subclass 165.1. Subject
matter wherein said mechanism includes a type-head* that is
moved from a rest position to the print-point* position by a
member that causes only such movement, and wherein selection
or choice of the type-face* element that is to be impressed
against the record-medium* is made by a hand of the typist.
(1) Note. In most typewriters that include a type-head
having a type-set-assemblage* thereon, depression of a key*
element causes at least two movements of the type-head. One
such movements is for selection or choice of the type-face
that is to be impressed, and another movement is for moving
the type-head against the print-point; therefore an actuator
for each key element is required. In a typewriter of this
subclass, selection is made by a typist who moves the
type-head manually, and movement of the type-head to the
print-point is made by a single actuator that only moves the
type-head to the print-point. A typewriter with this kind of
mechanism is often called a "toy" typewriter.
(2) Note. In this subclass (165.2) selection of the
particular type-face may be made by rotating the type-head
manually or with the aid of a rack and pinion that is
manually powered.
Subclass:
165.3
Selection by rotatable dial:
This subclass is indented under subclass 165.2. Subject
matter wherein the type-head* has affixed thereto a plate
bearing indicia, letters or character* symbols corresponding
to those which may be imprinted on the record-medium*, which
plate is turned by a hand of the typist to thereby turn the
type-head for selection or choice of the type-face* to be
impressed against the record-medium.
Subclass:
166
Including impact control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter
wherein the arcuate movement of said type-head-carrier*
toward the record-medium* is regulated as to its impression
force, whereby the impression force can be changed as
desired.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
157.3 for impact control in a typewriter wherein a hammer
moves the record-medium toward a selected type-face*.
Subclass:
167
Including rebound control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter
wherein the type-head-carrier* is supported for arcuate
movement from a rest position to a print-point* and for
return arcuate movement from the print-point to the rest
position, and wherein the return movement is regulated as to
the force with which the type-head* is returned whereby the
type-head will come to rest gently, or wherein the return
movement is stopped as soon as the type-head reaches its rest
position whereby the type-head is prevented from springing
away from its rest position after return.
Subclass:
168
Articulated-support joint:
This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter
wherein the type-head-carrier* is supported for arcuate
movement from a rest position to a print-point* and for
return arcuate movement from the print-point to the rest
position, and wherein significance is attributed to the
connection between the type-head-carrier and its support,
which connection enables the arcuate movement to occur.
Subclass:
169
Detenting to fix type-head for imprinting:
This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with mechanism on the
type-head-carrier* to temporarily secure the type-head* to
the type-head-carrier while said carrier is moving toward the
record-medium* whereby the selected or chosen type-face*
element will not move relative to the type-head-carrier.
Subclass:
170
Including movable printing anvil within type-head:
This subclass is indented under subclass 160. Subject matter
wherein the type-head* is a hollow member having type-face*
elements on the exterior surface thereof, and wherein the
member is provided with one or more elements adjacent to the
interior surface of the member, which element(s) move(s) to
engage the interior surface opposite to the type-face element
that has been selected or chosen to be impressed against the
record-medium*.
Subclass:
171
Plural type-set-assemblages selectively moveable from a
storage station to a printing station:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with more than one
type-set-assemblage*, only one of which assemblages is
actively in use during any particular period of time, the
other(s) of the assemblages being retained inactively at a
location on or adjacent to the typewriter for easy removal
from the inactive location to the active location.
Subclass:
172
Type-faces mounted on type chips and removable from storage
for printing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-set-assemblage* comprising type-face* elements all of
which elements are separate and separable one from the
others, and all of which elements are supported in or on a
type-face-carrier* from which carrier each selected or chosen
type-face is taken for impression of the type-face against a
record-medium* and replaced into the carrier.
Subclass:
173
With means for exposing last-typed character:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for showing the
typist the character* symbol that was imprinted just prior to
the time that the typist wished to see the character.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
124.01 for similar subject matter in a "matrix" printer
typewriter.
Subclass:
174
Type-head, per se:
This subclass is indented under subclass 139. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the type-head* that
bears a type-set-assemblage* in a typewriter.
Subclass:
175
Detachable from carrier (e.g., inter-changeable):
This subclass is indented under subclass 174. Subject matter
wherein the type-head* may be removed from the
type-head-carrier* and replaced thereon or another type-head
replaced on the type-head-carrier.
Subclass:
176
HAVING FLUID-PRESSURE POWER DRIVE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a typewriter or a portion thereof is
caused to operate by energy that is derived from or
transmitted via the exertion of force upon a fluid (i.e., a
flowable material).
(1) Note. The most usual fluid employed in these
typewriters is air, but a liquid may also be employed as a
fluid-pressure means.
Subclass:
177
Including pneumatic decoder for perforated tape:
This subclass is indented under subclass 176. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is controlled for operation by a
mechanism that includes (a) a strip having holes therein, and
(b) means for moving the strip relative to a bar having holes
therein whereby the strip will cover the holes in the bar
except when a hole in the strip matches a hole in the bar,
and (c) means for passing air or gas through the holes in the
bar when a hole in the bar is uncovered by a hole in the
strip, whereby a signal or pulse is generated by the passage
of air or gas through a hole in the bar, and (d) means for
converting the signals or pulses so generated into one or
more operation(s) of the typewriter.
Subclass:
178
For producing typewriter-control tape (e.g., perforated tape,
etc.)
This subclass is indented under subclass 176. Subject matter
wherein the energy of said fluid is used to form indicia on a
strip that will subsequently be used to regulate the
operation(s) of a typewriter.
(1) Note. The fluid pressure may be applied to a punch (or
a plurality of punches) that cause a tape to be perforated,
or may be applied to form indicia on a tape that will control
a typewriter.
Subclass:
179
For type-face selection or choice:
This subclass is indented under subclass 176. Subject matter
wherein the energy of said fluid is used to select or choose
a type-face* element that is to be impressed against a
record-medium*, or is used to cause the selected or chosen
type-face element to be impressed against the record-medium
to imprint a character* symbol thereon.
(1) Note. In this subclass the typewriter usually operates
by a typist depressing a key* element, the movement of the
key producing the air pressure that actuates a type-bar* (to
which the selected type-face is affixed) from rest position
to the print-point* position.
(2) Note. The terms "select" and "choose" (or variants of
those terms) and the differences between the terms are
discussed in the Glossary under definitions such as
case-shift*, type-face-carrier*, type-head* and
type-head-carrier*. Briefly, a particular type-face is
selected from among the many available from a
type-set-assemblage*, whereas an upper-case* form of letter
(as distinguished from a lower-case* form of the same letter)
is chosen from the forms available on one key* element.
Subclass:
180
Including key-board driven by external pneumatic source:
This subclass is indented under subclass 179. Subject matter
wherein the energy of said fluid is used to depress the
selected key* elements on the key-board* of the typewriter,
and wherein the force exerted upon the fluid is applied by
means outside of the typewriter.
Subclass:
181
By pneumatic actuation of type-face or type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 179. Subject matter
wherein the energy of said fluid is used to cause a selected
or chosen type-face* element or a type-bar* carrying such
element to be impressed against the record-medium* to imprint
a character* symbol thereon.
Subclass:
182
For movement of carriage or platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 176. Subject matter
wherein the energy of said fluid is used to cause motion of
either the carriage* or the platen* of the typewriter.
Subclass:
183
Including line-spacing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 182. Subject matter
wherein the motion of either the carriage* or of the platen*
is such as to effect line-space* distances to the
record-medium*.
Subclass:
184
HAVING TYPEWRITER-CONTROLLED RECIPROCABLE ELECTROMAGNETIC
DRIVE FOR PLURAL FUNCTIONS IN SAME TYPEWRITER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
to actuate the operation of more than one function* thereof,
each of said means including a magnetic* motor energized by
electricity and movable to-and-fro in a straight line, and
the actuation of each of said means being initiated by a
typist who is typing on the typewriter that is being
actuated.
(1) Note. The "motor" of this subclass is usually a
solenoid energized by electricity and initiated by pressing a
switch that is connected to a key* element other than a
character* key. For similar structure wherein character key
elements actuate type-bar* action mechanisms, see subclass
359.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
359 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
185
HAVING POWER-DRIVEN OPERATOR FOR PLURAL FUNCTIONS:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with means
to actuate the operation of more than one function* thereof,
each of said means being energized by force other than that
supplied by the typist.
(1) Note. For the purposes of this and indented subclasses,
the operation of line-space* means is considered to be
equivalent to the operation of record-medium* feeding means
and effectively is only a single function.
Subclass:
186
Via continuously rotated power roll selectively connected to
operate:
This subclass is indented under subclass 185. Subject matter
wherein the energizing force drives one function* or another
function at the will of the typist by way of a continuously
rotated power roll.
(1) Note. The term "continuously rotated power roll" is
defined below in subclass 370 as that structure is applied to
operate selected type-bar* members. In this subclass (186) a
similar structure is used to operate a selected one of plural
functions or is used to operate an auxiliary function.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
370 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
187
Usable selectively (e.g., for powered or manual operation,
alternative usable functions, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 185. Subject matter
wherein the energizing force drives one function* or another
function at the will of the typist, or wherein the energizing
force is either used or not used to operate the typewriter at
the will of the typist.
(1) Note. When the energizing force is not used to drive
the typewriter, the typist supplies the force needed to drive
the typewriter-actuating means.
Subclass:
188
FOR TYPING ON REVERSE SURFACE OF RECORD-MEDIUM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a record-medium* has a first surface
which faces toward a platen*, and the record-medium has a
second surface which faces toward a type-face* when the
type-face is at a print-point*, and wherein significance is
attributed to imprinting character* symbols on the first
surface of the record-medium.
(1) Note. The characters are usually in mirror image, and
the record-medium is either transparent so as to be able to
read the characters through the record-medium, or the
record-medium is a "hectograph" master. See Glossary,
section III, for further discussion of hectograph under terms
ribbon* and transfer-medium*.
Subclass:
189
By simultaneous use of both surfaces of same ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 188. Subject matter
wherein a ribbon* is used as a transfer-medium* for
imprinting said character* symbols on said first surface, and
wherein the same ribbon is used as a transfer-medium for
imprinting corresponding character symbols on another
record-medium surface or on a surface of another
record-medium at the same time the character symbols are
imprinted on the first surface.
Subclass:
190
By use of "carbon paper":
This subclass is indented under subclass 188. Subject matter
wherein carbon paper is used as a transfer-medium* for
imprinting said character* symbols on said first surface.
(1) Note. See (1) Note under subclass 497 in this class for
a discussion of the term carbon paper.
Subclass:
191
INCLUDING INTERPOSED INKING DEVICE (E.G., RIBBON) FOR
RECORD-MEDIUM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
transfer-medium* which is intended to be positioned between a
record-medium* and a type-face* to have simultaneous surface
contact with the type-face and the record-medium to form a
character* on the record-medium, or to the manner of renewing
the transfer characteristics of the transfer-medium while it
is on the typewriter, or to the manner of holding the
transfer-medium on the typewriter, or to the manner of moving
the transfer-medium relative to the print-point* on the
typewriter.
(1) Note. A transfer-medium which is only for correction of
an error in typing is found in this class, subclass 697.
(2) Note. Inking a type-face directly for forming a
character without the use of an interposed transfer-medium is
found in various subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 383.
(3) Note. This subclass (191) provides for an interposed
inking member having a configuration other than an elongated
ribbon*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
383 and see (2) Note above.
697 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
192
Moved by continuously rotating power drive intermittently
applied:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon* having a length
dimension and a width dimension, and wherein movement along
either dimension is imparted to the ribbon by way of a
rotated power drive intermittently applied, the rotation of
the drive shaft not stopping during the operation of the
typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "rotated power drive intermittently
applied" is defined below in subclass 365 as that term is
applied to operate selected type-bar* members. In this
subclass (192) a similar structure is used to cause feeding
of a ribbon or actuation of the vibrator* for a ribbon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
365 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
193
Inking device handheld during typing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is manually supported between
the record-medium* and the type-face* as the type-face is
impressed against the record-medium through the
transfer-medium.
Subclass:
194
Endless ribbon or cartridge therefor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon* in the form of a
closed-loop band having an elongated dimension.
(1) Note. The ribbon may be driven in a single direction,
thus avoiding need for ribbon-reversing structure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
237 for an ink* ribbon, per se.
Subclass:
195
Mobius strip:
This subclass is indented under subclass 194. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon is a one-sided surface formed by holding a
first end of an elongated rectangle fixed, rotating the
opposite end 180 about an axis coincident with a centerline
of the rectangle parallel to the long dimension thereof, and
securing the opposite end to the first end.
(1) Note. A Mobius strip is a unique topological phenomenon
in that an object formed as described above will apparently
have two "surfaces", but mathematically and actually will
have only one surface. This can be proved by forming a
Mobius strip as described and then applying a mark along the
surface continuously along the length thereof without lifting
the marker from the surface or crossing the edge of the
strip. The experimenter will find that the marker will
eventually reach the mark initially produced, thus proving
the actuality of only a single surface. In a ribbon*, this
permits typing against the apparently two "surfaces" without
further manipulation of the ribbon.
Subclass:
196
Including storage (e.g., in cartridge, etc.) of ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 194. Subject matter
wherein a portion of the band is supported in a holder, and
the band and holder are attachable to and removable from the
typewriter as a unit to facilitate replacement of the band.
Subclass:
196.1
Having ribbon stored in pleated form:
This subclass is indented under subclass 196. Subject matter
wherein the portion of the band in the holder is folded in a
regular pattern of folds that are transverse to the elongated
dimension of the band, and are alternately folded in opposite
folds.
Subclass:
197
Renovation of used ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon* which ribbon during
typing is at least partially depleted of ink*, and the ribbon
is treated to maintain or increase its efficacy as a
transfer-medium while the ribbon is on the typewriter.
(1) Note. Examples of ribbon treatment provided for in this
subclass are adding ink to the ribbon, moistening the ribbon,
etc.
Subclass:
198
With ink heater (e.g., for melting solid ink):
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein ink* which is on or to be added to the ribbon* is
relatively thick, hard, or viscous at normal room
temperature, and wherein the typewriter is provided with
means for elevating the temperature of the ink to increase
its flowability.
(1) Note. Also found in this subclass is a disclosure of
means to heat a record-medium* adjacent to the print-point*
to promote uniform distribution of the ink imprinted on the
record-medium.
Subclass:
199
By discrete auxiliary band movable with ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is movable in a direction parallel to its
longitudinal extent while it is on the typewriter, and the
ribbon treatment includes contacting the ribbon with a
separate elongated strip of material, said strip moving in
face to face contact and concurrently with at least a portion
of the ribbon.
(1) Note. The band may be loaded with ink* to replenish the
ink supply in the ribbon.
Subclass:
200
Selectively actuatable re-inker:
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is treated by a device which adds ink* to
the ribbon; said device being movable at the will of the
typist, to either a position on the typewriter at which the
device is operative to add ink to a position at which it is
inoperative to add ink.
Subclass:
201
Of multicolor ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* which is treated has plural fields of
differently pigmented or tinted ink* materials.
Subclass:
202
Renovator attachable to typewriter for replenishing ribbon
ink:
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is treated by a device which adds ink* to
the ribbon, said device being detachably mounted on the
typewriter.
Subclass:
202.1
Attached to ribbon spool:
This subclass is indented under subclass 202. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is wound in convolutions on a reel, which
is mounted on the typewriter, and the device for adding ink*
is mounted in or on said reel.
Subclass:
202.2
And includes refillable chamber (e.g., reservoir) for liquid
ink:
This subclass is indented under subclass 202. Subject matter
wherein the device for adding ink* to the ribbon* comprises a
container which can be resupplied with flowable ink.
Subclass:
202.3
And conveyor or discrete drops of ink:
This subclass is indented under subclass 202.2. Subject
matter wherein the ink* from the container is supplied to the
ribbon* via a member that transports the ink in separate
globulelike portions.
Subclass:
202.4
And re-inking roller:
This subclass is indented under subclass 202.2. Subject
matter wherein the ink* from the container is supplied to the
ribbon* via a rotatable member having a cylindrical surface
for receiving and transporting the ink.
Subclass:
203
Ribbon disposed within platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*, and the ribbon is
housed interiorly of a hollow typewriter platen*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
242 for a spool mounted on a typewriter.
Subclass:
204
For typing plural copies simultaneously with ribbon(s) (e.g.,
duplicate typing):
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon* and wherein plural
portions of the same ribbon, or plural ribbons, are
positionable relative to plural record-medium* pieces so that
a single impact of a type-face* against the record-medium*
imprints an identical character* on each of said pieces at
the same time.
(1) Note. Proper placement of a patent into this or an
indented subclass requires recitation of a transfer-medium in
ribbon form. Usually the typewriter of these subclasses is
used to type "duplicate original copy" texts of typed
material. The term "original copy" refers to typed text that
is imprinted with the use of a ribbon coated with ink* to
form characters that are not
easily erased from the record-medium. The ribbon used may
be an inked fabric ribbon, although in some typewriters a
different form of ribbon, called a "carbon ribbon" or a
"carbon-ink ribbon" has come into use. An " original copy"
is distinguished from a "carbon copy" in at least two
respects: an original copy is on a record-medium that is
located adjacent to a fabric ribbon or a carbon ribbon at the
print-point*, so that a type-face will impact directly or
through the ribbon to cause transplacing of ink directly onto
the surface of the record-medium, and the character imprinted
onto the original may be erased only with difficulty; a
carbon copy is on a record medium that under lies an original
copy and a sheet of transfer-medium, usually consisting of
"carbon paper", and the character imprinted onto a carbon
copy is erased easily.
(2) Note. In placing a patent as an original into this or
one of the subclasses indented hereunder, consideration must
be taken of the intent of the patent as determined by various
criteria. The primary criterion is the intent to produce a
plurality of original copy texts. This is determined by a
positive disclosure of at least one of the following
criteria: (a) at least two record-medium pieces are
imprinted each via a ribbon with "permanent" (i.e., not
easily erasable) ink, (b) the ribbon(s) being used are
reversible (i.e., fed in two opposite directions so that the
ribbon is used and reused). If the specification is not clear
as to plural original copy texts, the patent may be
cross-referenced herein, but placed as an original patent
into subclass 497 as appropriate. The use of carbon paper in
typing carbon copies is found in this class, subclass 497.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
497 and see (2) Note above.
Subclass:
205
Including holder for short length of ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 204. Subject matter
wherein there is provided a device for supporting at least
one ribbon* in position relative to a platen* to receive a
type-face* impact and wherein the length of the ribbon or
ribbons supported by said device approximates the platen
dimension along the print-line*.
Subclass:
205.1
Holder movable to inoperative position on typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 205. Subject matter
wherein the device, while mounted on the typewriter, is
selectively positionable by the typist to move the ribbon* or
ribbons supported by the device to a position where the
ribbon or ribbons will not receive the type-face* impact.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
206.2 for a similar holder for plural ribbons.
Subclass:
206
Using plural ribbon(s) {e.g., additional ribbon(s)}:
This subclass is indented under subclass 204. Subject matter
wherein the imprinting of identical character* symbols on the
record-medium* pieces is accomplished by the concurrent use
of more than one ribbon.
Subclass:
206.1
Including "carbon paper" ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 206. Subject matter
wherein at least one ribbon* is a ribbon formed from carbon
paper.
(1) Note. See (1) Note under subclass 497 in this class for
a discussion of the term carbon paper.
Subclass:
206.2
And ribbon holder movable to inoperative position on
typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 206. Subject matter
wherein there is provided a device for supporting at least
one ribbon* in position on the typewriter to receive a
type-face* impact, and wherein said device, while mounted on
the typewriter is selectively positionable by the typist to
move the ribbon or ribbons supported by the device to a
position where the ribbon or ribbons will not receive the
type-face impact.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
205.1 for a similar holder for a short length of ribbon.
Subclass:
206.3
On plural coaxial spools:
This subclass is indented under subclass 206. Subject matter
wherein ribbon*-receiving reels are provided to mount the
ribbons on the typewriter, and wherein at least two of the
reels are so mounted on the typewriter, as to have a common
centerline about which the reels may rotate in paying-out or
taking-up the ribbons.
Subclass:
206.4
On single spool:
This subclass is indented under subclass 206. Subject matter
wherein at least one ribbon*-receiving reel is provided to
mount the ribbons on the typewriter, and wherein more than
one ribbon is convoluted on a single reel.
Subclass:
207
Package for ribbon facilitating mounting of ribbon on
typewriter (e.g., ribbon cartridge):
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon* housed in a
receptacle, and wherein the ribbon and receptacle are
attachable to and removable from the typewriter as a unit, or
the receptacle contributes in simplifying attachment of the
ribbon to the typewriter.
(1) Note. A ribbon spool for a typewriter with no
additional package structure is found in this class,
subclasses 242+.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
242 and see (1) Note above
Subclass:
208
Package attached to typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 207. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* and the receptacle remain on the
typewriter during typing.
Subclass:
208.1
And includes separable assemblage of spools:
This subclass is indented under subclass 208. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* receptacle comprises a pair of
interconnected ribbon-receiving reels, and wherein the reels
are disconnected from each other when attached to the
typewriter.
Subclass:
209
For bottom-strike typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a ribbon* specialized
for use in a typewriter in which type-face* elements impact
against the platen* (and thereby impact against a
record-medium* that is backed by the platen) at a
print-point* located adjacent to an underneath part of the
platen.
Subclass:
210
For boldface typing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to imprinting character*
symbols formed of lines having greater than normal
thickness.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
304 for varying carriage feed to accomplish a similar
result.
466 for a type-face* configuration which accomplishes a
similar result.
Subclass:
211
Including mechanism for shifting ribbon laterally at
print-point:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon and provision is
made for moving the ribbon in a direction transverse to its
elongated dimension, such movement occurring in an area of
the typewriter adjacent to the print-point*.
(1) Note. In this subclass (211) the transverse movement
occurs by reason of the entire ribbon and the spool(s) on
which the ribbon is wound or mounted being moved in the
transverse direction.
Subclass:
212
Via electrically powered actuator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 211. Subject matter
wherein the movement of a ribbon* in a transverse direction
is accomplished with the help of force derived from
electrical energy.
Subclass:
213
For impact of successive type-face on one field of ribbon in
path not parallel to longitudinal extent of ribbon (e.g.,
"zigzag", oblique, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 211. Subject matter
wherein type-face* elements strike the same print-point* of a
typewriter in a series of impacts against a ribbon* that
moves in a length direction between successive impacts and
that has a zone of a particular color, the dimensions of
which zone correspond to the length and to at least part of
the width of the ribbon, and wherein succeeding elements
impact the zone at areas of the zone that are spaced
widthwise as well as lengthwise of the ribbon.
(1) Note. The path of the successive impacts on the ribbon
so moved may be zigzag, oblique, sinusoidal, etc., as the
ribbon moved longitudinally and transversely of the
print-point.
Subclass:
213.1
Via ribbon vibrator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 213. Subject matter
wherein the transverse movement of the ribbon* is
accomplished by a ribbon vibrator*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
215 for a ribbon vibrator and means for moving the
vibrator.
Subclass:
214
Plural ribbons shiftable laterally (e.g., by duplicate
vibrators):
This subclass is indented under subclass 211. Subject matter
wherein more than one ribbon* is mounted on the typewriter,
and provision is made for such transverse movement to be
given to each of the ribbons.
Subclass:
215
By ribbon vibrator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 211. Subject matter
wherein at least a portion of an elongated ribbon* is
constrained for movement within a vibrator* and wherein the
vibrator moves the constrained portion transversely to the
elongated dimension of the ribbon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
213.1 for a ribbon vibrator producing a particular path on
the ribbon.
Subclass:
215.1
Including vibrator shiftable during use of nonfeed character
key (e.g., for typing accent mark, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 215. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means for normally
moving the carriage* to the extent of a character-space* for
each depression of a character* key* and with means for
normally moving the vibrator* concurrently with carriage
movement, and wherein significance is attributed to a mode of
operation in which a character key is depressed to move the
vibrator without concurrent movement of the carriage.
(1) Note. The mode of operation defined above enables two
type-face* elements to be impacted successively at the same
print-point* on the record-medium* so that a letter and an
accent mark for that letter may be imprinted.
Subclass:
215.2
With retardation of vibrator return after type-face impact
(e.g., with dashpot):
This subclass is indented under subclass 215. Subject matter
wherein the vibrator* movement is regulated in such a manner
that the ribbon* is temporarily held at its print-point*
covering position for receiving successive type-face* impacts
without completely uncovering the print-point after each
impact.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for a disclosure wherein
the print-point remains covered by the ribbon when typing at
a normal rate, but if the typist stops typing, the vibrator
moves the ribbon to permit viewing the print-point.
Subclass:
215.3
With elevation and holding of vibrator above print-point
(e.g., to facilitate ribbon insertion:
This subclass is indented under subclass 215. Subject matter
wherein provision is made for selectively lifting and
sustaining the vibrator* in a position higher than the
print-point* to facilitate access to the vibrator.
Subclass:
215.4
With inactivation of vibrator (e.g., for cutting a stencil):
This subclass is indented under subclass 215. Subject matter
wherein provision is made for selectively controlling the
movement of the vibrator* in a manner such that the typist
may choose to not have the vibrator move transversely so that
the ribbon* will not cover the print-point* during typing.
Subclass:
216
Including variable throw of vibrator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 215. Subject matter
wherein provision is made for changing the extent of
transverse movement imparted to the vibrator* so as to change
the extent the ribbon* is moved transversely relative to the
print-point*.
Subclass:
216.1
For diverse-field (e.g., plural-color) ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 216. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* has zones with different characteristics,
each zone having dimensions that correspond to the length and
to at least part of the width of the ribbon, and the change
in the extent of the transverse vibrator* movement is for
changing the ribbon zone which is over the print-point* to
receive the type-face* impact.
Subclass:
216.2
With typewriter-controlled change of field:
This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject
matter wherein a first part of a typewriter moves to
accomplish its intended first-part function, and during said
movement the first part engages a second part to move the
second part, and wherein movement of the second part causes
movement of the vibrator* that changes the ribbon* zone that
is over the print-point*.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for a typewriter wherein
the typist may preset the typewriter to imprint selected
columns of type in different colors of ink*.
Subclass:
216.3
By movement parallel to print-line:
This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject
matter wherein the vibrator movement is in the same direction
as the longitudinal extent of the print-line*.
Subclass:
216.4
Vibrator throw controlled via alternate pins selectively
inserted in slots:
This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject
matter wherein an assemblage of elements for moving the
vibrator* to change ribbon* zones includes one member or
members having plural peg-like projections selectively
positionable in respective elongated openings in another
member or members, and wherein the extent of vibrator
movement is controlled according to which of the pins is
positioned relative to its respective opening.
Subclass:
216.5
Field selection by selectively positioned stop faces to limit
vibrator movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 215.1. Subject
matter wherein an assemblage of elements for moving the
vibrator* to change ribbon* zones includes a member having a
surface which, during vibrator movement, is intended to
contact an abutment surface on another member, and wherein
the extent of vibrator movement for zone selection is
controlled by the position of said abutment surface.
Subclass:
216.6
To compensate for case-shift:
This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to accommodating
the extent of transverse vibrator* movement to take into
account relative change of position between a record-medium*
and a type-face* as a result of case-shift*.
Subclass:
217
To shift impact path (e.g., during ribbon reversal):
This subclass is indented under subclass 211. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is intended to receive multiple
type-face* impacts along a first zone extending parallel to
the elongated dimensions of the ribbon, and wherein
significance is attributed to the manner of moving the ribbon
transversely relative to its elongated dimension so that
subsequent type-face impacts will be in a different zone
transversely spaced from the first zone.
Subclass:
217.1
By adjustable ribbon guide spaced from supply spool:
This subclass is indented under subclass 217. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is wound in convolutions of a reel and is
led from the reel past the print-point* via a member which
causes the ribbon to follow a predetermined path, and wherein
the transverse movement of the ribbon is caused by
selectively changing the position of said member relative to
the print-point.
Subclass:
218
Ribbon-reversing mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon* and the provision
is made for moving the ribbon relative to a print-point* in a
first direction as character* symbols are imprinted on a
record-medium* during typing, and wherein significance is
attributed to a manner of causing the ribbon to move relative
to the print-point in a direction opposite to said first
direction for further typing of characters on the
record-medium using the same ribbon.
Subclass:
219
Including means responsive to depletion of ribbon supply:
This subclass is indented under subclass 218. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is moved to the print-point* from a
location where the ribbon has been stored on the typewriter,
and wherein there is means for detecting when such ribbon
storage has been exhausted to cause the ribbon to move in the
opposite direction.
Subclass:
219.1
Including an electric switch:
This subclass is indented under subclass 219. Subject matter
wherein said detecting means includes a device for
influencing an electrical circuit used in the operation of a
member or members controlling the direction of movement of
the ribbon*.
Subclass:
219.2
Including lever retained in spool by wound ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 219. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is stored on the typewriter in
convolutions on a reel, and wherein said detecting means
includes a member mounted on the reel and held in a first
position by the convoluted ribbon, said member being movable
to a second position to influence ribbon direction-changing
means when the ribbon has been unwound from engagement with
the member.
Subclass:
219.3
Including sensor for diameter of wound ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 219. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is stored on the typewriter accumulated
in wound convolutions, and wherein said detecting means
includes a detecting member which is biased against the
outermost convolution in a manner such that said member moves
as the number of convolutions increases or decreases and
wherein the movement of said member influences the ribbon
direction-changing means.
Subclass:
219.4
Sensor received in depression in core of spool:
This subclass is indented under subclass 219.3. Subject
matter wherein the ribbon* is stored on the typewriter in
convolutions around a cylindrical surface of a reel, and
wherein said cylindrical surface includes an opening or
cavity which receives said detecting member when all the
convolutions have been exhausted from the reel.
Subclass:
219.5
Including projection from ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 219. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* includes a protuberance from a surface
thereof, and said detecting means includes a member actuated
by said protuberance to influence ribbon direction-changing
means when the ribbon storage is exhausted.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
239 for a ribbon, per se, having a protuberance for
actuating reversing mechanism.
Subclass:
220
Alternative pawl-and-ratchet drive including ratchet directly
connected to spool or spindle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 218. Subject matter
wherein opposite ends of the ribbons* are attached
respectively to first and second cylindrical members, the
first member having a first ratchet* secured thereon to be
driven by a first pawl* and thereby move the ribbon in the
first direction by winding it on the first member, and the
second member having a second ratchet secured thereon to be
driven by a second pawl and thereby move the ribbon in the
opposite direction by winding it on the second member, and
wherein means are provided for causing the first pawl to be
operative in its driving relationship with the first ratcher
while the second pawl is caused to be inoperative, or for
causing the second pawl to be operative in its driving
relationship with the second ratchet while the first pawl is
caused to be inoperative.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
236.1 for pawl-and-ratchet drive for ribbon feeding.
Subclass:
220.1
Including common pawl member (e.g., double-toothed pawl):
This subclass is indented under subclass 220. Subject matter
wherein the first and second pawls* are formed as integral
parts of a single component.
Subclass:
220.2
Including member interposed in pawl drive path:
This subclass is indented under subclass 220. Subject matter
wherein the means for causing a pawl* to be inoperative
includes an element having a surface positionable in the path
of the pawl to prevent engagement of the pawl with its
ratchet*.
Subclass:
221
Alternative gear drive including gear directly connected to
spool or spindle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 218. Subject matter
wherein opposite ends of the ribbon* are attached
respectively to first and second cylindrical members, the
first member having a first toothed-driven wheel secured
thereto, and the second member having a second toothed-driven
wheel secured thereto, the first and second driven wheels
being driven by a toothed driving wheel selectively
engageable with either of the driven wheels or being driven
by first or second driving wheels engageable respectively
with the first or the second driven wheels, the driving wheel
or wheels having a different axis of rotation than the driven
wheels, and wherein shiftable means are provided to
selectively cause a driving wheel to operatively engage the
first driven wheel to move the ribbon the first direction by
winding the ribbon on the first member, or to cause a driving
wheel to operatively engage the second driven wheel to move
the ribbon in the opposite direction by winding the ribbon on
the second member.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
236.2 for gear drive for ribbon feeding.
Subclass:
221.1
And gears mounted on ends of axially shiftable common shaft:
This subclass is indented under subclass 221. Subject matter
wherein a first driving wheel is secured to one extremity of
a rod having an elongated dimension and a second driving
wheel is secured to the opposite extremity of the same rod,
the rod being shiftable in opposite directions parallel to
the elongated dimension of the rod to either engage the first
driving wheel with the first driven wheel or to engage the
second driving wheel with the second driven wheel.
Subclass:
221.2
And gears mounted on ends of pivoted common shaft:
This subclass is indented under subclass 221. Subject matter
wherein a first driving wheel is secured to one extremity of
a rod having an elongated dimension, and a second driving
wheel is secured to the opposite extremity of the same rod,
the rod being movable about an axis perpendicular to its
elongated dimension to either engage the first driving wheel
with the first driven wheel or to engage the second driving
wheel with the second driven wheel.
Subclass:
222
Alternative clutch drive including clutch member directly
connected to spool or spindle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 218. Subject matter
wherein opposite ends of the ribbon* are attached
respectively to first and second cylindrical members, the
first member having a first driven coupling device secured
thereto, and the second member having a second driven
coupling device secured thereto, the first and second driven
coupling devices being driven by a driving coupling device
selectively engageable with either of the driven coupling
devices or being driven by first or second driving coupling
devices selectively engageable respectively with the first or
the second driven coupling devices, the driving coupling
device or devices being coaxial with the driven coupling
devices and the driving and driven devices having a
one-to-one drive ratio, and wherein shiftable means are
provided to selectively cause a driving coupling device to
operatively engage the first driven coupling device to move
the ribbon in the first direction by winding the ribbon on
the first member, or to cause a driving coupling device to
operatively engage the second driven coupling device to move
the ribbon in the opposite direction by winding it on the
second member.
Subclass:
223
Ribbon-feeding mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon* and significance is
attributed to a manner of moving the ribbon relative to a
print-point* in a direction parallel to the longitudinal
extent of the ribbon as character* symbols are imprinted on a
record-medium* or to the manner of regulating such ribbon
movement.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
36 for ribbon feed in a flat-platen typewriter.
218 for ribbon reversing wherein ribbon feeding is
disclosed.
Subclass:
224
For feeding ribbon angularly to print-line at print-point:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein the lengthwise dimension of at least a portion of the
ribbon* which is at the print-point* extends in a direction
other than parallel to the print-line*.
Subclass:
224.1
Ribbon fed perpendicular to print-line at print-point:
This subclass is indented under subclass 224. Subject matter
wherein the lengthwise dimension of the portion of the
ribbon* which is at the print-point* extends at a right-angle
to the print-line*.
Subclass:
224.2
Ribbon is full-page wide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 224.1. Subject
matter wherein a dimension of the ribbon* transverse to the
longitudinal extent of the ribbon is approximately the same
as the dimension of the record-medium* parallel to the
print-line*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
246 for a cylindrical member for convoluting thereon a
ribbon of similar dimension.
Subclass:
225
Including electrically powered drive means (e.g., solenoid,
stepping motor, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein movement of the ribbon* is accomplished with the help
of force derived from electrical energy.
Subclass:
226
For feeding ribbon partial character-space before impact and
partial character-space after impact:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon is moved relative to the print-point* in
incremental distances approximating the width of a character*
as characters are imprinted on the record-medium*, and
wherein the ribbon is moved a portion of such incremental
distance prior to a type-face* contacting the ribbon, and the
ribbon is moved the remaining portion of such incremental
distance after the same type-face contacts the ribbon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
232 for ribbon feeding at a particular feed rate.
Subclass:
227
For narrow carbon ribbon (e.g., carbon ink, "single use",
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* being moved is a carbon-ink ribbon or a
"carbon-paper" ribbon.
(1) Note. See the definition of ribbon in the Glossary,
section III, for a discussion of carbon-ink and carbon-paper
ribbons, and see (1) Note under subclass 497 for a discussion
of the term carbon-paper.
Subclass:
227.1
Ribbon destroyed after use:
This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter
wherein provision is made for treating the ribbon* on the
typewriter after the ribbon leaves the print-point* so as to
render illegible any type-face* impressions on the ribbon or
to make the ribbon useless for further typing.
Subclass:
227.2
Or for alternately used fabric ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter
wherein a "fabric" ribbon* is also mounted for use on the
typewriter and provision is made for either moving the fabric
ribbon relative to the print-point* or for moving the
"carbon-paper" or "carbon-ink" ribbon relative to the
print-point, the ribbon which is so moved being selectable by
the typist which is so moved being selectable by the typist.
(1) Note. See the definition of ribbon in the Glossary,
section III, for a discussion of fabric ribbon.
Subclass:
228
Including pin-feed-engaging ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is moved by contacting the ribbon with
elements that are movable in a ribbon-feeding direction,
which elements either pierce the ribbon or move into
preformed openings in the ribbon.
Subclass:
229
Mounted with movable type-face-carrier or type-head-carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is attached to a type-face-carrier* or is
attached to a type-head-carrier* either of which carriers
moves relative to a stationary record-medium* for imprinting
the character* symbols along the print-line*, whereby the
ribbon moves with either the type-face-carrier or the
type-head-carrier.
Subclass:
230
With fast rewind of ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is supplied to the print-point* from a
coiled supply of the ribbon so that the supply is depleted
while the ribbon is moved in a first direction during
imprinting of character* symbols, and wherein provision is
made for rapidly moving the ribbon in the opposite direction
to replenish the coiled supply, no character symbols being
imprinted during such rapid movement.
Subclass:
231
With prevention of ribbon feed (e.g., for nontype operation,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein there is a drive mechanism for moving the ribbon*
relative to the print-point*, and wherein significance is
attributed to stopping or disconnecting such drive mechanism
while a function* is performed on the typewriter.
(1) Note. It is usual to have ribbon movement depend on
carriage* movement as the carriage is moved in the direction
of the print-line* while character* symbols are imprinted so
that a fresh ribbon surface is presented for each type-face*
impact. There are other carriage movements (e.g., for spacing
between words, backspace, etc.) where no imprint takes place
and so a fresh ribbon surface is not needed as a result of
the latter movements. This subclass (231) provides for
disclosures wherein ribbon drive mechanism is disconnected
for carriage movements when no imprinting takes place.
Subclass:
232
Including feed at particular feed rate (e.g., "creep"
feed):
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is moved a predetermined distance
relative to the print-point* each time a character* is
imprinted on the record-medium*, and wherein significance is
attributed to the speed at which the ribbon is so moved or to
the distance the ribbon is so moved.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
226 for feeding ribbon a partial character-space* before
type-face* impact and a partial character-space after
type-face impact.
Subclass:
233
Ribbon feed from supply only during carriage return:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein a carriage* is moved in a first direction along a
print-line* as character* symbols are imprinted, and the
carriage is moved in a second direction opposite to the first
direction to begin another print-line, and wherein the
ribbon* is moved to the print-point* from a location where
the ribbon has been stored on the typewriter, such movement
of the ribbon from storage taking place only when the
carriage is moved in the second direction.
Subclass:
234
Including ribbon tensioner:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for maintaining
the ribbon* in a relatively taut or non-sagging condition as
the ribbon is moved relative to the print-point*.
Subclass:
235
Drive applied by means directly engaging ribbon in advance of
takeup:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is accumulated at a location on the
typewriter after the ribbon has moved past the print-point*,
and wherein the ribbon is moved in the direction parallel to
its longitudinal extent by a motion-transmitting mechanism
which contacts the ribbon at a place on the typewriter
between the print-point and the accumulated location of the
ribbon.
Subclass:
235.1
Drive applied by pinch-roller couple:
This subclass is indented under subclass 235. Subject matter
wherein the motion-transmitting mechanism includes a pair of
rotatable cylindrical members positioned with respect to each
other, and to the ribbon*, in a manner such that one member
engages one surface of the ribbon, and the other member
engages the opposite surface of the ribbon, whereby rotation
of the members in opposite rotational directions moves the
ribbon toward the location wherein the ribbon is
accumulated.
Subclass:
236
Drive applied directly to spool or spool spindle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein one end of the ribbon* is attached to a cylindrical
member, and wherein the ribbon is moved past the print-point*
by rotating the member about its axis to wind the ribbon in
convolutions thereon, said member being rotated by a
motion-transmitted mechanism, and said mechanism including a
component rigidly secured to the cylindrical member.
Subclass:
236.1
By a pawl driving a ratchet on the spool or spindle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 236. Subject matter
wherein the component secured to the cylindrical member is a
ratchet*, and wherein the motion-transmitting mechanism
includes a pawl* for moving the ratchet.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
220 for pawl-and-ratchet drive used with ribbon reversing.
Subclass:
236.2
By a gear driving a gear on the spool or spindle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 236. Subject matter
wherein the component secured to the cylindrical member is a
first toothed wheel, and wherein the motion-transmitting
mechanism includes a second toothed wheel engageable to
rotate the first toothed wheel, said first and second toothed
wheels having different and non-coextensive axes of
rotation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
221 for gear drive used with ribbon reversing.
Subclass:
237
Ribbon, per se:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon* and significance is
attributed to the structure or characteristics of the
ribbon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
194 for an endless ribbon.
Subclass:
238
Having leader portion (e.g., for threading, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a modification of
either end of the ribbon*.
(1) Note. Such modification may be for various reasons
including facilitating attachment to a spool, facilitating
threading of the ribbon through a guide, or permitting
handling without soiling the typist's fingers with ink*.
Subclass:
239
With ribbon-reversing indicator or device on ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is of a kind which, when in use on a
typewriter, is intended to be moved in either of opposite
directions relative to a print-point*, and wherein
significance is attributed to a modification of the ribbon
which either alerts the typist that directional change of the
ribbon is desired or controls the mechanism for changing the
directional movement of the ribbon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
218 for a mechanism for moving a ribbon in either of
opposite directions.
Subclass:
240
Including differently pigmented fields:
This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* has plural zones impregnated or coated
with a coloring agent intended to be transferred from the
ribbon to the record-medium* during typing, the coloring
agent in one zone being ink* of a first color, and the
coloring agent in another zone being of a different shade or
color than the first color.
Subclass:
240.1
Including correction-material field:
This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter
wherein one of the zones includes a coloring agent which is a
coating of a color approximating the color of the
record-medium*, which coating will adhere to the ink*, of an
imprinted character*, or wherein one of the zones includes a
chemical agent which eradicates the ink that has been
imprinted on the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
697 for an error-correcting sheet or tape.
Subclass:
240.2
With prevention of bleeding between adjacent fields:
This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a manner of impeding
the migration of the coloring agent from one zone to another
zone next to it.
Subclass:
240.3
Including fields arranged transversely to elongated dimension
of ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter
wherein each zone has a dimension that corresponds to the
width and to only a part of the length of the ribbon*.
Subclass:
240.4
Including more than two fields:
This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* has at least three zones.
Subclass:
241
Particular ribbon material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the substance from
which the ink*-carrying portion of the ribbon* is made.
Subclass:
241.1
Synthetic material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter
wherein the substance is a compound formed from chemical
reaction involving elements, radical, or simpler compounds.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for disclosure of a
ribbon* wherein the ink*-carrying substance of the ribbon is
a "man-made" substance rather than a substance which occurs
naturally.
Subclass:
241.2
Wherein ink is entrapped in ribbon material (e.g.,
microcapsules, micropores, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 241.1. Subject
matter wherein the substance includes a component having
extremely small orifices or openings or chambers therein, the
orifices or openings or chambers each holding a discrete
quantity of ink*.
Subclass:
241.3
Particular weave pattern:
This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon is formed from interlaced thread-like
elements, and wherein significance is attributed to the
manner in which such elements are arranged relative to each
other.
Subclass:
241.4
Including ink-impervious backing for ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* has first and second surfaces, the first
surface contacting a record-medium* to imprint a character*
by transferring ink* from the ribbon to the record-medium
when the second surface is contacted by a type-face*, and
wherein the second surface of the ribbon is formed of a
substance through which ink is incapable of passing to
preclude direct contact of the type-face with ink.
Subclass:
242
Ribbon spool or mount therefor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon* in the form of an
elongated tape that is spirally wound around a cylindrical
member, and wherein significance is attributed to said member
or to holding the member and the ribbon wound thereon on a
typewriter.
(1) Note. The member (i.e., spool) may have flanges
extending radially to retain the spiral convolutions of the
ribbon wound thereon, or may be a core having no flanges.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
203 for a spool mounted within a platen*.
207 for a package for ribbon spool(s) simplifying mounting
the ribbon and spool on a typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
242, Winding, Tensioning, or Guiding, 600 and 118+ for a
spool to support wound material.
Subclass:
243
Universally adaptable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 242. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a modification of, or
an attachment for, the cylindrical member which facilitates
holding the member on any of diverse shapes or kinds of
supports on a typewriter.
Subclass:
244
Including ribbon-reversing indicator or device on spool or
mount:
This subclass is indented under subclass 242. Subject matter
wherein the cylindrical member is intended to be rotated in
either of opposite directions depending on whether the ribbon
is to be wound thereon or to be unwound therefrom, and
wherein significance is attributed to a modification of such
cylindrical member which either alerts the typist that a
change in directional rotation of the member is desired, or
which controls the mechanism for changing the directional
rotation of the member.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
218 for a mechanism for moving a ribbon in either of
opposite directions.
Subclass:
245
Including magnetic retainer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 242. Subject matter
wherein magnetic* force is used to hold the cylindrical
member in position on the typewriter.
Subclass:
246
Spool for full-page-wide ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 242. Subject matter
wherein the cylindrical member is intended to accommodate a
ribbon* having a dimension transverse to its longitudinal
extent which dimension is approximately the same as the
dimension of the record-medium* parallel to the print-line*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
224.2 for a mechanism for feeding ribbon of similar
dimension.
Subclass:
247
Means auxiliary to ribbon mechanism (e.g., shield, guide,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the transfer-medium* is a ribbon*, and wherein
significance is attributed to a device used in conjunction
with the ribbon, but which device does not itself effect the
imprint of a character* or function* of the typewriter, or
which device is not provided for in any of the subclasses
indented under subclass 191.
Subclass:
248
Including guide for ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 247. Subject matter
wherein the device is a member for conducting or leading the
ribbon* from its place of storage on the typewriter to the
print-point* or from the print-point to a place of storage on
the typewriter.
Subclass:
248.1
Ribbon guide opening expandable to facilitate ribbon
insertion:
This subclass is indented under subclass 248. Subject matter
wherein the member includes a pair of components between
which the ribbon* extends, said components having first and
second positions movable relative to each other and being
spaced further from each other at said second position than
at said first position to facilitate placement of the ribbon
between the components at said second position.
Subclass:
248.2
And typewriter-actuated closing of guide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 248.1. Subject
matter wherein a first part of a typewriter moves to
accomplish its intended first-part function, and during said
movement the first part engages a second part to move the
second part, and wherein movement of the second part causes
relative movement of said components from said second
position to said first position.
Subclass:
248.3
Including electrical, magnetic, or pneumatic guide means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 248. Subject matter
wherein the member for conducting or leading the ribbon* is
influenced by electrical, magnetic, or pneumatic energy.
Subclass:
249
Including indicator for depletion of ribbon (e.g., bell,
sign, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 247. Subject matter
wherein the ribbon* is supplied to the print-point* from a
supply of ribbon, and wherein significance is attributed to a
device for informing the typist that the supply has been
exhausted.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
703 for an indicator of general utility in a typewriter.
Subclass:
250
Including tool for inserting ribbon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 247. Subject matter
wherein said device comprises an implement for installing the
ribbon* in position on the typewriter.
Subclass:
251
CASE-SHIFT MECHANISM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a means
in a typewriter for performing a case-shift* function by
effecting relative movement between a record-medium* and a
type-face* element that is at the print-point* whereby a
typist is enabled to choose which one of two or more forms of
character* symbols that may be imprinted by pressing a
particular character key* element will be imprinted, the
choice being made by the typist who presses or does not press
a case-shift key.
(1) Note. As discussed in the definition of case-shift in
the Glossary, section III, case-shift is the function* that
enables a typewriter to imprint either an upper-case* form or
a lower-case* form of character symbol with the same key
element, depending on whether the case-shift key is used or
not used.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
35 for case-shift in a flat-platen* typewriter.
Subclass:
252
Including programmed-control-system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein the operation of the case-shift* mechanism to effect
the form of a type-face* that is to be impressed against the
record-medium* is governed by a programmed-control-system*.
Subclass:
253
Including electronic control or code-bar control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein the operation of a case-shift* mechanism to effect
the form of a type-face* that is to be impressed against a
record-medium* is governed by either (a) an electrical system
involving the flow of electrons in a circuit, or (b) a
plurality of members having particular index characteristics
thereon, which members are moved to a position relative to an
arrangement of element(s) within the mechanism where the
index characteristics are aligned one with another to enable
movement of another component of the mechanism to effect
choice of operation or non-operation of the case-shift
mechanism.
Subclass:
254
Controlled by typewriter-actuated mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein the operation of the case-shift* mechanism to effect
the form of a type-face* that is to be impressed against the
record-medium* is governed by an arrangement of parts in the
typewriter, which arrangement includes a first part that
moves to accomplish its intended first-part function*, and
during such movement the first part engages a second part to
move the second part, which second part is connected to the
case-shift mechanism to accomplish case-shift as the first
part moves to accomplish its first-part function.
Subclass:
255
Including plural case-shift mechanisms (e.g., for
simultaneous or selective use):
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein one typewriter is provided with at least two
case-shift* means.
(1) Note. One exemplary use of two case-shift mechanisms is
in a typewriter wherein the carriage*, and thereby the
platen* that is carried by the carriage, is vertically
movable in a case-shift mode, and wherein the
type-bar-segment*, and thereby the type-set-assemblage* that
is carried by the type-bar-segment, is also movable for
case-shifting.
Subclass:
256
Actuated by toggle-linkage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein the case-shift* mechanism includes a toggle-linkage*
assemblage that is used to move a portion of the typewriter
for case-shifting.
Subclass:
257
For case-shift by type-head (e.g., spherical type-head)
movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a type-head* that
includes a type-set-assemblaged*, which type-head is moved by
case-shift* mechanism for selection of the form of character*
symbol to be used.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass often is provided
with a "golf-ball" or spheroidal type-head*. See the
definition of type-head in the Glossary, section III, for a
discussion of other configurations of type-head elements.
Subclass:
258
Power-operated mechanism (e.g., for locking shift key):
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein the case-shift* mechanism is actuated with the help
of force generated by or derived from a source other than the
typist.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for power applied for a
miscellaneous function* in the case-shift mechanism of the
typewriter, including some disclosures of a solenoid used for
locking the shift-key element of the key-board.
Subclass:
259
For shifting platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 258. Subject matter
wherein said force is used to move the platen* in its
case-shift* movement.
Subclass:
260
For shifting type-bar-segment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 258. Subject matter
wherein said force is used to move the type-bar-segment* in
its case-shift* movement.
Subclass:
261
Multiple-shift mechanism (i.e., for type-bar having three or
more type-faces thereon):
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a plurality of
type-bar* members, each type-bar having at least three
type-face* elements thereon, only one of which type-face is
to be impacted to form only one character* on record-medium*
for each pressing of a character key* element, and wherein
the case-shift* mechanism is arranged to cause relative
movement between a record-medium and the selected type-bar
that is at a print-point* into one of at least three
positions, whereby a chosen one of the type-face* with
respect to the type-bar* that carries the type-face, the
movement being a turning motion.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for a typewriter wherein a
platen* is shifted vertically, or horizontally, as in a
bottom-strike or top-strike typewriter.
Subclass:
262
For shifting type-bar-segment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 261. Subject matter
wherein case-shift* is effected by moving the
type-bar-case-shift* is effected by moving the
type-bar-segment* relative to the typewriter thereby moving
the type-bar* members and the type-face* elements carried
thereby to the platen*.
Subclass:
263
For shifting type-bar or type-face on type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 261. Subject matter
wherein case-shift* is effected by moving the type-bar*
relative to the typewriter, or by moving the type-face*
relative to the type-bar, whereby in either event the
type-face is moved relative to the platen*.
Subclass:
263.1
By pivoting type-face relative to type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 263. Subject matter
wherein case-shift* is effected by moving the type-face* with
respect to the type-bar* that carries the type-face, the
movement being oscillatory or arcuate.
Subclass:
263.2
By rotating type-face relative to type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 263. Subject matter
wherein case-shift* is effected by moving the type-face* with
respect to the type-bar* that carries the type-face, the
movement being a turning motion.
Subclass:
264
For shifting platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein case-shift* is effected by moving the platen*
relative to the typewriter, thereby moving the record-medium*
relative to the type-face* element which will impact
thereagainst.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
261 for case-shift by moving platen in a multiple-shift
typewriter
Subclass:
265
Fore-and-aft (e.g., for top-strike or bottom-strike
typewriter):
This subclass is indented under subclass 264. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the platen* during case-shift* is in
a direction that extends between the front and rear of the
typewriter and substantially parallel to the bottom of the
typewriter.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass is usually one
wherein the type-face* impacts against the top of the platen
or the bottom of the platen.
Subclass:
266
Mounted on pivotally movable platen carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 264. Subject matter
wherein the platen* is supported by structure that moves the
platen in the arc of a circle for case-shift* purposes.
(1) Note. In most typewriters, the platen- carrier or
platen-support structure is a carriage*.
Subclass:
266.1
With movement of platen out of typing position:
This subclass is indented under subclass 266. Subject matter
wherein said structure enables the platen* to be removed from
adjacent the print-point*.
(1) Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the platen is
movable out of typing position or may be entirely removed
from the carriage* that normally supports the platen.
Subclass:
266.2
Including adjustable counterbalance spring:
This subclass is indented under subclass 266. Subject matter
wherein the platen* and the structure that moves the platen
has mass that exerts a downward force, and wherein the
typewriter is provided with a component or assemblage of
elements that exerts an upward force on the said structure to
compensate for this downward force of said structure, which
component or assemblage of elements is resilient and the
upward force exerted by the component or assemblage is
variable.
Subclass:
266.3
Including a yieldable link (e.g., spring, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 266. Subject matter
wherein said structure includes movable members that effect
movement of the platen*, at least one of which members is a
resilient member.
Subclass:
267
By depression of space-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 264. Subject matter
wherein movement of the platen* for case-shift* is
accomplished by pressing the space-bar* element on the
key-board*.
Subclass:
268
For shifting type-face or type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein case-shift* is effected by moving a type-face* or by
moving a type-bar* relative to the typewriter platen*, the
direction of such movement being considered to be parallel to
a plane in which the print-point* lies, thereby causing a
chosen type-face to be impacted against a record-medium* at
the print-point.
(1) Note. The type-face may be one of many type-faces on a
type-head* containing a type-set-assemblage*, in which event
case-shift occurs by moving the type-head so that the chosen
type-face will be in position to be impacted. Or the
type-face may be movable relative to a type-bar that carries
only two (or three) type-faces.
Subclass:
269
By shifting type-bar or type-face on type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 268. Subject matter
wherein case-shift* is effected by moving a type-bar*,
together with the type-face* supported thereby relative to
the platen* or by moving a type-face relative to the type-bar
that supports the type-face, thereby moving the type-face
relative to the platen.
Subclass:
269.1
By pivoting type-face relative to type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 269. Subject matter
wherein case-shift* is effected by moving a type-face* with
respect to the type-bar* that supports the type-face thereby
moving the type-face relative to the platen*, the movement
being oscillatory.
Subclass:
270
Mounted on type-bar support (e.g., guide pin,
type-bar-segment, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 268. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with structure that
sustains the type-bar* members in an operative relationship
to enable the type-bars, and the type-face* elements carried
by the type-bars, to move from rest position to print-point*
position as each type-bar is selected to impact its type-face
against the record-medium*, which structure also enables
movement of the type-set-assemblage* that is sustained on the
structure, the movement of the type-set-assemblage being for
the purpose of effecting case-shift*.
(1) Note. In some of the typewriters of this subclass the
type-bars are mounted on a type-bar-segment* which moves so
that a chosen type-face of the selected type-bar will impact
the record-medium.
Subclass:
270.1
Ring hanger support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 270. Subject matter
wherein said structure includes a generally annular member to
which the type-bar* members are connected.
(1) Note. The ring hanger of this subclass is usually used
in a top-strike typewriter or bottom-strike typewriter.
Subclass:
270.2
Including ball-bearing support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 270. Subject matter
wherein said structure includes a mechanical assemblage known
as a "ball bearing" to which the type-bar* members are
connected for movement.
(1) Note. A ball bearing is a device in which a shaft or
journal turns upon a number of balls running in an annular
track.
Subclass:
270.3
Including pivoted-lever support (e.g., cantilever spring,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 270. Subject matter
wherein said structure includes elements that are fulcrumed
for arcuate movement, which elements the type-bar* members
are connected for movement of the type-bars from rest
position to print-point* position.
Subclass:
271
By choosing from one of a plurality of type-bars operated by
a single key:
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein choice of which form of type-face* (i.e., upper-case*
form or lower-case* form) is to be impressed against the
record-medium* is made from one of a group of type-bar*
members any of which members may be chosen to be actuated by
depressing one particular character* key* element of the
key-board*.
Subclass:
272
Including key attachment for case-shift:
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein case-shift* is effected by a key* element on the
key-board* that is pressed, the pressing of the case-shift
key being caused by a device that is connected to the
typewriter, which device is actuated or operated by the
typist.
Subclass:
273
Operated by user's leg, (e.g., foot, knee, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 272. Subject matter
wherein said device is energized by a lower limb of the
typist.
(1) Note. A typewriter of this subclass is usually intended
to increase typing speed by giving the typist the capability
of actuating case-shift* by a key* element that is pressed by
action of a foot, knee, etc., rather than pressed by a
finger. A typewriter for handicapped persons is found in
subclass 87 above.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
87 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
274
For locking case-shift mechanism in position (e.g., rebound
lock, cam, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein said relative movement effects a rearrangement of
parts on the typewriter to at least two locations relative to
the typewriter frame, and wherein significance is attributed
to means for maintaining the particular arrangement of parts
as desired by the typist until another location of said parts
is desired.
(1) Note. In the typewriter of this subclass, the
case-shift* mechanism is held by a cam, or is prevented from
rebounding out of position into an undesired position. Also
included herein is a typewriter wherein the platen* is locked
in a raised position.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
663 for other locking mechanism in a typewriter.
Subclass:
275
For locking platen in fore-and-aft position (e.g., by
overcenter spring, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 274. Subject matter
wherein the platen* of the typewriter during case-shift* is
in a direction that extends between the front and rear of the
typewriter and substantially parallel to the bottom of the
typewriter, and said two locations are the extreme front and
rear of the extent of movement of the plate, and wherein
significance is attributed to means for maintaining the
platen in its extreme front or rear location until another
location is desired by the typist.
Subclass:
276
For locking shift-key lever in depressed position:
This subclass is indented under subclass 274. Subject matter
wherein the case-shift* function is accomplished by pressing
a particular key* element known as a shift key, which
shift-key element is connected to a fulcrumed bar for
movement of the bar when the shift-key element is pressed by
a typist, and wherein significance is attributed to means for
maintaining the shift key in the position it has been moved
to when it is pressed by the typist.
Subclass:
276.1
By toggle-linkage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 276. Subject matter
wherein said means includes a toggle-linkage* connected
between said fulcrumed bar and the typewriter.
Subclass:
276.2
By means pivoted on shift-key lever:
This subclass is indented under subclass 276. Subject matter
wherein said means includes a component that is oscillatably
mounted on said fulcrumed bar.
Subclass:
277
Including limit stop (e.g., block, chain, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 251. Subject matter
wherein said relative movement is halted at the extreme ends
of the desired movement by the interengagement of a component
that moves with the case-shift* mechanism and a component
that is fixed to the typewriter.
Subclass:
278
Including limit screw:
This subclass is indented under subclass 277. Subject matter
wherein at least one of said components is an elongated
helically threaded member that is rotatable about an axis
extending in its elongated dimension and is movable along its
axis as it is rotated about its axis.
Subclass:
279
CONTROL OF PRINT POSITION ALONG PRINT-LINE BY SIGNAL
GENERATED BY PROGRAMMED-CONTROL-SYSTEM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a programmed-control-system* is
provided for transmitting instructions to a typewriter
mechanism to govern the location where a type-face* element
will be impressed against the record-medium*, the location
being along a path parallel to the print-line*.
Subclass:
280
Program is indicia on auxiliary member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 279. Subject matter
wherein the instructions are in the form of marking or
openings on an element which is supplementary to the
record-medium*.
Subclass:
281
Member is punched tape or card:
This subclass is indented under subclass 280. Subject matter
wherein the supplementary element is an elongated, relatively
narrow strip of material, or a sheet of material, said
material having apertures formed therein in a particular
pattern, and the apertures representing the instructions
governing the operation of the typewriter.
Subclass:
282
Program is indicia on record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 279. Subject matter
wherein the instructions are in the form of markings or
openings on the record-medium* itself.
Subclass:
283
CARRIAGE OR CARRIAGE-MOVING OR MOVEMENT-REGULATING
MECHANISM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
carriage* of a typewriter, or to movement of the carriage, or
to control of movement or stoppage of movement of the
carriage, which movement occurs along a line that is parallel
to the print-line*.
(1) Note. The definition of the term "carriage" in the
Glossary, section III, includes a discussion of the movement
referred to the above, the direction of such movement, and
the difference between a "platen* carriage" and a "type-head*
carriage".
Subclass:
284
For stopping carriage in tabular position (e.g., column-set
positions):
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved in a direction
that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted in
succession (i.e., the character-space* direction), and
wherein the movement in said direction is controlled such
that after the carriage has moved past a predetermined number
of character-space distances, the carriage will be stopped in
a position corresponding to a print-point* for the start of a
column of character symbols.
(1) Note. The term "column" refers to a plurality of
print-lines* arranged one above or below another in vertical
array (i.e., a particular character of each successive line
of type being equally spaced from one of the side edges of a
sheet or web record-medium*).
(2) Note. The term "tabular" refers to at least one, but
usually a plurality of columns each arranged in vertical
array and each parallel to a side edge of a sheet or web as
well as to other column(s) that are produced on the sheet or
web.
(3) Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the tab-stop
elements on the tab-rack* are set in active position to
effect typing of a column. The typewriter is thus said to be
"column set".
Subclass:
285
In denominational positions:
This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is used to imprint one or more columns
of numeral digits, and wherein the carriage* is stopped in a
position such that the decimal point of a succession of
numbers typed one below the other(s) will be arranged in
vertical array.
(1) Note. In the instance of a "denominational" column the
left character* of successive print-lines* will not
necessarily be one below the others, depending on whether the
left character represents a "hundreds" digit, a "tens" digit,
etc. Rather the decimal point will be in vertical array.
Moreover, in the instance where the decimal point of
successive numbers is not actually imprinted, but is merely
understood to be present, the particular character is the
basis of the columnar arrangement, is in fact the "units"
digit of the successive numbers.
Subclass:
285.1
And column-set positions:
This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* may be stopped in a column position and
then be further moved and again stopped in a denominational
position within said column.
(1) Note. The term "column" is discussed in (1) Note of
subclass 284; the term "column set" is discussed in (3) Note
of subclass 284; and the term "denominational" is discussed
in (1) Note of subclass 285. The typewriter of this and
indented subclasses combine features of two forms of
tabulation, that is, carriage is brought to a selected column
field and the carriage is further brought to a selected
denominational position within the selected column field.
Subclass:
285.2
Tab-rack stop intercepted by denominational-stop:
This subclass is indented under subclass 285.1. Subject
matter wherein the carriage* is stopped by the
interengagement of a selected denominational-stop* with a
"tab stop" that is mounted on a tab-rack*.
(1) Note. The term "tab stop" is discussed in the definition
of tab-rack in the Glossary, section III.
Subclass:
285.3
Tab stops grouped in stepped fashion:
This subclass is indented under subclass 285.2. Subject
matter wherein the "tab stop" elements are arranged on the
tab-rack* in sets or assemblages of tab stops, the individual
tab stops of each set being in an ascending or descending
scale of individually varying length in each assemblage, and
each set or assemblage being arranged for a different
"columnar" arrangement.
(1) Note. The term "tab stop" is discussed in the
definition of tab-rack in the Glossary, section III, and the
term "columnar" is a variation of the term "column" which is
discussed in (1) Note of subclass 284.
Subclass:
285.4
With control of zero or space for decimal point:
This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the suppression or
regulation of the imprinting of a "zero" digit in a sequence
of number digits, or wherein significance is attributed to
the regulation of the occurrence of a character-space*
associated with a "decimal point" in a sequence of number
digits or the regulation of the decimal point associated with
a sequence of number digits.
Subclass:
285.5
With reverse-direction movement of carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is moved in a direction opposed to the
normal character-space* direction during the imprinting of
numeral digits in denominational columns.
(1) Note. In this subclass the number is imprinted from the
most significant to the least significant digit by
backspacing the carriage from right to left along the
print-line*, or the number is imprinted so that the first
denominational digit typed is the least significant digit.
Subclass:
285.6
Helically mounted denominational-stop(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to an arrangement of
denominational-stop* components, the components being carried
on a drum or cylinder in an array that has the configuration
of a helix around the surface of the drum or cylinder.
Subclass:
286
Shiftable denominational-stop(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the movement of a
denomination-stop* or the interengagement of said
denominational-stop with a tab-stop element on a tab-rack*.
Subclass:
286.1
Step-shaped denominational- or tab-stop(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 286. Subject matter
wherein either the denominational-stop* components or the
"tab-stop" elements on the tab-rack* are arranged in sets or
assemblages, the components or elements of each set being in
an ascending or descending scale of individually varying
length in each assemblage.
Subclass:
286.2
Engaging movable tab-rack means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 286. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the interengagement of
a denominational-stop* with a tab-stop element on a tab-rack*
or to the movement of said tab-stop element from inactive
position to active position or return from active to inactive
position.
Subclass:
286.3
With latch or lock means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for temporarily
securing against unwanted or undesired movement any parts of
the mechanism that is included in the tabulator mechanism for
denominational column(s).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
663 for other locking mechanism in a typewriter.
Subclass:
287
Column set by control of mutilated carriage-rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to move quickly to its
"column-set" position by use of a carriage-rack* that has
gaps in the teeth or notches of the bar that is part of the
carriage-rack, the length of the gap determining the length
of the character-space* distance that is to be jumped in
moving the carriage to the column-set position.
Subclass:
288
Column set by control of tab-rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to move to its "column-set"
position by moving a tab-rack* component from an inoperative
position to an operative position, the tab-rack having
tab-stop elements thereon which are active to govern or
regulate the column-set position.
Subclass:
289
Column set by control of tab-stops or column stops or
counter-stops:
This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved to its
"column-set" position and stopped in that position by
"tab-stop" elements mounted on a tab-rack*, selected of said
elements having been moved from a "clear" position to a "set"
position, or the carriage is stopped in a column-set position
by a "counter-stop" element.
(1) Note. For further discussion of the terms used and
their operation, see the definition of tab-rack in the
Glossary, section III.
Subclass:
289.1
Tab-stops grouped in stepped fashion:
This subclass is indented under subclass 289. Subject matter
wherein the "tab-stop" elements are arranged in sets or
assemblages of tab stops on the tab-rack*, the individual tab
stops of each set being in an ascending or descending scale
of individually varying length in each assemblage, and each
set or assemblage being arranged for a different "columnar"
arrangement.
Subclass:
290
Forward or reverse tabulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved and is caused to
be stopped in a position corresponding to a print-point* for
the start of a column of character* symbols, the movement
occurring in a character-space* direction, or the carriage is
caused to be moved in a direction opposite to the
character-space direction and caused to be stopped in a
position corresponding to a print-point for the end of a
column of character symbols.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass is sometimes also
provided with a carriage-shuttling mechanism, which enables
the carriage to travel in a forward or a reverse direction
directly between tabular positions without having to first
return to home position following a tabulating movement.
Subclass:
291
With impact cushion or rebound check:
This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is moved in a first direction and then
stopped in a tabular position, and wherein the stopping of
the carriage is regulated by a component or assemblage that
is yieldable or limited in the movement of said component or
assemblage when used to stop the carriage, whereby the energy
of movement of the carriage is absorbed and/or any movement
in a direction opposite to said first direction is
inhibited.
Subclass:
292
With control of carriage velocity:
This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is moved and then stopped in tabular
position, and wherein the speed of movement of the carriage
is regulated.
Subclass:
293
By multiple pitch tab-racks or mutilated gear:
This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is moved and then stopped in tabular
position, the movement and stopping being regulated or
governed by either (a) a tab-rack* component in which one
plurality of tab-stop elements are spaced to one pitch*
distance and another plurality of tab stops are spaced to
another pitch distance, or a plurality of tab-racks, each
tab-rack having tab-stop elements spaced to a different pitch
from one from another, or (b) a toothed driving member having
gaps in the teeth of the member.
Subclass:
294
Stop-setting or stop-clearing mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure for causing
movement of a "tab-stop" element from a passive position
(i.e., a position at which it will not engage with a
"counter-stop" element) to an active (i.e., "set") position
(i., e., a position at which it will engage with a
counter-stop element to stop a moving carriage* in a
"tabular" position), or for causing movement of a tab-stop
element from an active position to a passive (i.e., "clear")
position, or wherein significance is attributed to structure
for causing movement of a counter-stop element from a passive
position to an active position or for causing movement of a
counter-stop element from an active position to a passive
position.
(1) Note. The terms "tab-stop" element and "counter-stop"
element have been discussed in the definition of tab-rack* in
the Glossary, section III, and the term "tabular" has been
discussed in the definition of tab* as well as in (2) Note to
the definition of subclass 284 above.
(2) Note. This subclass provides for a type-writer wherein
the tab stop(s) is/are cleared, i.e., moved from active
position to inactive position.
Subclass:
294.1
With stop magazine (i.e., for supply of stops):
This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a receptacle in which
the "tab-stop" elements are contained ready for use, from
which receptacle the tab stops are removed to be used for use
in the tabulating mechanism, and to which receptacle the tab
stops are returned after use in the tabulator mechanism.
Subclass:
294.2
With key-locking mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means to prevent
activation of the key* element that effects tabulation or the
key element that effects any action or function* other than
the setting or clearing of a "tab-stop" element during the
time that the tab stop is cleared or set.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
663 for other locking mechanism in a typewriter.
Subclass:
294.3
Drum-mounted tab-stops:
This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter
wherein the "tab-stop" elements are carried on a cylindrical
member or on a segment of a cylindrical member, either on the
inner or the outer periphery of the member or on the radial
surface of the member.
Subclass:
295
Stop setting by linear shift or tab-stop or counter-stop:
This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter
wherein the "tab-stop" element or the counter-stop element is
set into its active position by moving the tab stop or the
counter stop along a straight-line path relative to the
structure that supports the element.
Subclass:
295.1
Stop shifts horizontally from tab-rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 295. Subject matter
wherein the "tab-stop" element is set into an active position
by moving the tab stop forwardly or rearwardly relative to
the tab-rack* component that carries the tab-stop elements.
Subclass:
295.2
Stops shifts laterally along tab-rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 295. Subject matter
wherein the "tab-stop" element is set into one position or
another position to accomplish the tabulation by moving the
tab stop along the length of the tab-rack* component that
carries the tab-stop elements.
Subclass:
296
Stop setting by movement of tab-rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter
wherein the tab-rack* of the typewriter is movable from one
position to another relative to the carriage* of the
typewriter, and wherein the "tab-stop" element on the
tab-rack is set into active position by moving the tab-rack.
Subclass:
296.1
Tab-rack rotates about its axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 296. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the tab-rack* is a turning movement
that occurs about a center that extends through the tab-rack
component along the length of the component.
Subclass:
296.2
Plural tab-racks:
This subclass is indented under subclass 296. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with more than one
tab-rack* component.
Subclass:
297
Stop setting by partial rotation of tab stop relative to
tab-rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter
wherein the "tab-stop" elements are mounted on a tab-rack*
component for arcuate motion of the tab stops with respect to
the tab-rack, and wherein the tab-stop element is set into
active position for tabulation by moving the tab stop with
such arcuate motion.
Subclass:
297.1
Stop setting by pivoting pawllike stop:
This subclass is indented under subclass 294. Subject matter
wherein the "tab-stop" element is set into active position
for tabulation by moving the tab-stop element with an arcuate
movement.
(1) Note. The tab stop is usually hook- shaped and has a
pivot axis on the end remote from the hook.
Subclass:
298
Tab-stop or tab-rack structure, per se:
This subclass is indented under subclass 284. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the conformation or
other characteristics of the tab-stop element, per se, or the
tab-rack* component, per se.
Subclass:
299
With rotatable type wheel for repeat printing in response to
carriage movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a type-member* in the
form of a disc that turns about an axis and bears on the edge
of the disc a plurality of type-face* elements all of which
type-faces imprint the same character* symbol on the
record-medium* when the edge of the disc is impressed against
the record-medium, and wherein the typewriter is provided
with means to urge the disc against the record-medium as the
carriage* is moved in a character-space* direction, whereby
as the carriage so moves as the disc is impressed against the
record-medium, a series of the same character symbol is
imprinted on the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
21 for a liner responsive to carriage movement.
Subclass:
300
Key-actuated mechanism for nonfeed of carriage (e.g.,
"silent" key, locking carriage, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is normally caused to be moved in a
direction that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted
in succession (i.e., the character-space* direction) by or
concurrently with successive pressing of successive character
key* elements, but wherein significance is attributed to a
mode of operating the typewriter whereby pressing of a
particular key element will not cause movement of the
carriage.
(1) Note. The purpose of this mechanism is to permit the
imprinting of a character* symbol without an accompanying
character-space* movement of the carriage, thereby permitting
two or more symbols to be imprinted at the same print-point*.
The mechanism thus permits a letter and an accent mark, or a
letter and a vowel symbol, or two different letters (these
being only exemplary of the possibilities), to be imprinted
at the same print-point.
Subclass:
301
By disabling carriage-escapement mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 300. Subject matter
wherein the nonfeed or the nonmovement of the carriage* is
caused by temporarily making the normal carriage-feed
mechanism ineffective to move the carriage.
(1) Note. For discussion of how the normal
carriage-escapement mechanism operates, see the definition of
subclass 329.
Subclass:
302
By key actuated independently of carriage feed:
This subclass is indented under subclass 300. Subject matter
wherein the nonfeed or nonmovement of the carriage* is caused
by the pressing of a special key* element on the key-board*,
which special key is used only to prevent carriage movement
and has no other effect on the carriage movement.
Subclass:
303
For varying carriage feed:
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved in a direction
that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted in
succession (i.e., the character-space* direction), and
wherein the movement in said direction is regulated to occur
in irregular or unequal increments of movement, the
increments corresponding to variable character-space
distances or variable word-space* distances.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
10 for a variable carriage-feed mechanism used in a
"justification" typewriter.
Subclass:
304
For kerning or overlap imprinting:
This subclass is indented under subclass 303. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the carriage* in the character-space*
direction is regulated to enable (a) imprinting a first
character* symbol in a first character-space, moving the
carriage to a distance less than a full character-space
distance, and imprinting a second character different from
the first character partly within the character-space of the
first-character, or (b) imprinting a first character symbol
in a first character-space, moving the carriage a very short
distance relative to the first character-space, and
imprinting the first character again almost within the first
character-space, but only slightly displaced from the first
character.
(1) Note. The operation described in (a) above is known as
"kerning" and is sometimes used to form a compound letter
symbol out of two standard letter symbols. The operation
described in (b) is known as overlap imprinting and is
sometimes used to form a "boldface" letter symbol.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
210 for a ribbon used for boldface typing.
Subclass:
305
By force-feed or screw-feed mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 303. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved in a
carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction through
irregular increments by a mechanism that positively engages
the carriage or a portion affixed thereto and that positively
moves in a direction to thereby move the carriage therewith
in said direction, or wherein the carriage is caused to be
moved by the rotation of a helically threaded member.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
328 for force-feed mechanism in an equal increment carriage
feed.
Subclass:
306
Proportional to variable widths of imprinted characters:
This subclass is indented under subclass 303. Subject matter
wherein the irregular or unequal increments of movement of
the carriage* correspond to the various widths of the
character* symbols that are imprinted on the record-medium*.
(1) Note. In the definition of the term character-space* in
the Glossary, section III, there is a discussion of the
reason for variable carriage feed. Briefly, in this mode of
operation the carriage is moved along the print-line* to the
extent that a particular character extends along the
print-line. Therefore the distances between adjacent
characters are more nearly equal one to another, and the
resulting text appears uniform and gives a pleasing
appearance.
Subclass:
306.1
By settable elements (e.g., pins, bars, slides, etc):
This subclass is indented under subclass 306. Subject matter
wherein the irregular increments of carriage* movement are
caused by drive means that includes a movable member that is
provided with components that may be set into active position
to engage with another portion of the drive means, which
component may be cleared out of active position so as not to
engage with the other portion of the drive means, the
selection of the amount of increment of carriage movement
being made by setting or not setting the components.
Subclass:
306.2
By ratchet wheel and controlled pawl:
This subclass is indented under subclass 306. Subject matter
wherein the irregular increments of carriage* movement are
caused by drive means that includes a pawl* that is
oscillated and caused to move into engagement with the teeth
of a ratchet* in the form of a ratchet wheel.
(1) Note. The term "ratchet wheel" is defined in the
definition of ratchet.
Subclass:
306.3
Including multiple pawls:
This subclass is indented under subclass 306.2. Subject
matter wherein the drive means is provided with a plurality
of pawl* members.
Subclass:
306.4
And multiple wheels:
This subclass is indented under subclass 306.3. Subject
matter wherein the drive means is also provided with a
plurality of ratchet wheels.
Subclass:
307
By ratchet rack and controlled pawl:
This subclass is indented under subclass 306. Subject matter
wherein the irregular increments of carriage* movement are
caused by drive means that includes a pawl* that is
oscillated and caused to move into engagement with the teeth
of a ratchet* in the form of a ratchet rack.
(1) Note. The term "ratchet rack" is defined in the
definition of ratchet.
Subclass:
307.1
Including multiple pawls:
This subclass is indented under subclass 307. Subject matter
wherein the drive means is provided with a plurality of pawl*
members.
Subclass:
307.2
By cooperating toothed members (e.g., gear, segment, rack,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 306. Subject matter
wherein the irregular increments of carriage* movement are
caused by drive means that includes at least two components,
each of which is formed with notches or teeth, the notches of
one component intermeshing with the notches of the other so
that movement of one component is transmitted to the other
component.
(1) Note. Included in this subclass are drive means having
gears or differential gears, or gear and rack. or gear
segment and gear, in many arrangements of such components.
Subclass:
308
Carriage backspace mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved in a direction
opposite to the typing (i.e., character-space*) direction
that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted in
succession, and wherein the movement in said opposite
direction is regulated to occur in increments corresponding
to character-space distances but in the direction opposite to
the character-space direction.
(1) Note. The backspace increments may be regular (i.e.,
corresponding to equal character-space distances), or the
backspace increments may be irregular or unequal or variable
(i.e., corresponding to variable character-space distances,
mechanism for which is found in subclass 303).
Subclass:
309
Backspace proportional to variable width of imprinted
characters:
This subclass is indented under subclass 308. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved in irregular or
unequal increments, the increment of movement for any
particular movement corresponding to a variable
character-space* distance equivalent to the various widths of
the character* symbols that were imprinted on the
record-medium* just prior to the need for backspacing.
(1) Note. See the definition of character-space in the
Glossary, section III, for a discussion of the need for
variable carriage feed. This discussion is amplified in (1)
Note to the definition of subclass 306. In the typewriter of
this subclass the backspace distance is the same amount, but
in the opposite direction, as the variable character feed,
and is for the purpose of returning the carriage to exactly
the same print-point* that the carriage was before a
particular character was imprinted.
Subclass:
310
Including powered drive means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 308. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved by way of energy
supplied to the typewriter by other than the typist.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass is powered by
such energy as an electric motor, a solenoid, a continuously
rotated power roll the power of which is intermittently
applied, etc.
Subclass:
311
Including pawl and escapement wheel:
This subclass is indented under subclass 308. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved by the actuation
of a key* element that moves a pawl* that interengages with
one of the teeth of a toothed wheel to drive the carriage in
a backspace direction.
Subclass:
312
Including pawl and escapement rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 308. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved by the actuation
of a key* element that moves a pawl* that interengages with
one of the teeth of a ratchet* rack to drive the carriage in
a backspace direction.
Subclass:
313
Carriage-return mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved in a direction
opposite to the typing (i.e., character-space*) direction
that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted in
succession, and wherein the movement in said opposite
direction is regulated to retrogress the carriage back to the
beginning of a print-line*.
(1) Note. The carriage is usually returned until it is
stopped by a margin* regulator or margin-stop* element. In
some typewriters the carriage return may be modified to stop
at a preset position to permit the first character of a new
print-line to be indented from the margin*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
34 for carriage return in a flat-platen* typewriter.
Subclass:
314
With concurrent line-spacing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 313. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* is moved in a line-space*
direction during approximately the same time that the
carriage* is returned to the beginning of a print-line*.
(1) Note. The line-spacing movement may occur at the
beginning or at the end or during the carriage-return
movement.
Subclass:
314.1
Using electromagnetic drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 314. Subject matter
wherein the carriage*-return movement is powered by a
solenoid or similar electromagnetic means.
Subclass:
314.2
For selected number of line-spaces:
This subclass is indented under subclass 314. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* is moved in a predetermined number
of line-space* increments during the carriage-return
movement, and wherein the predetermined number may be changed
at the will of the typist.
Subclass:
314.3
With disconnection of return by margin-stop:
This subclass is indented under subclass 314. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to disablement of the
mechanism that returns the carriage* when the carriage
engages the margin* regulator that is located at the
beginning of a print-line*, wherein the carriage-feed drive
may regain control of the carriage movement.
(1) Note. The term "margin regulator" is defined in the
definition of subclass 342.
Subclass:
314.4
Initiated by user's leg or foot:
This subclass is indented under subclass 314. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to starting the return of
the carriage* by a movement of a lower limb of the typist.
Subclass:
314.5
Initiated by actuator adjacent key-board:
This subclass is indented under subclass 314. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to starting return of the
carriage* by movement by a typist of a key* element on or
near the key-board*.
(1) Note. In most manually powered typewriters, the
carriage return is by way of a lever adjacent to the platen*.
The typewriter of this subclass is usually electrically
powered, and pressing of a key initiates the return.
Subclass:
314.6
By return-clutch means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 314. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* return is powered by way of a clutch
mechanism that is provided in the typewriter especially for
carriage-return purposes.
(1) Note. A "clutch" is a mechanism for intermittently
connecting a rotating driving shaft to a driven shaft by way
of faces that are connected, one face to each shaft, and
intermittently connected to one another.
Subclass:
315
Responsive to carriage position:
This subclass is indented under subclass 313. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* return is initiated as a result of the
carriage having moved in the character-space* direction to a
predetermined location relative to the typewriter.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass is usually
electrically powered.
Subclass:
316
Partial return (e.g., for start of paragraph, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 313. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a return of the
carriage* to a position short of the normal or usual return
to a margin* of the page*.
(1) Note. The partial return is usually to a position where
a new paragraph will be started at a location on the
record-medium* that is indented from the margin of the text.
Subclass:
317
Including power drive (e.g., electric, spring, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 313. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is returned by way of energy applied to
the mechanism other than energy supplied by the typist at the
time of carriage return.
Subclass:
317.1
For bidirectional drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 317. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is moved in its return movement and in
its feed movement by way of energy applied to the mechanism
other than energy supplied by the typist.
Subclass:
317.2
By spring-driven motor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 317. Subject matter
wherein the carriage is moved in its return movement by way
of energy that is stored in a resilient or yieldable
component connected to a drive train that moves the
carriage.
(1) Note. The power for winding the spring to store energy
that will subsequently be used during typing to return the
carriage whenever so desired by the typist maybe supplied by
an electric motor or may be supplied by the user of the
typewriter. Disclosures of this form of spring energy are
properly classified herein because the energy is stored and
not applied by the typist at the time of carriage return.
Subclass:
317.3
Powered via engagement of a clutch:
This subclass is indented under subclass 317. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is moved in its return movement by way
of energy that is applied by way of a clutch connection.
(1) Note. A "clutch" is a mechanism for intermittently
connecting a rotating driving shaft to a driven shaft by way
of faces that are connected, one face to each shaft, and
intermittently connected to one another.
Subclass:
318
Initiated by actuator adjacent key-board:
This subclass is indented under subclass 313. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to starting return of the
carriage by movement by a typist of a key* element on or near
the key-board*.
Subclass:
319
Carriage-feed mechanism (e.g., escapement, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused or enabled to be moved in a
direction that enables the character* symbols to be imprinted
in succession (i.e., the character-space* direction), and
wherein the movement in said direction is regulated to occur
in regular or equal increments of movement, each increment
corresponding to a character-space distance or a word-space*
distance.
Subclass:
320
For carriage on which a type-head-carrier is mounted:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* supports a type-head-carrier* for
movement of both the carriage and the type-head-carrier in
said direction that enables the character* symbols to be
imprinted in succession (i.e., the character-space*
direction).
(1) Note. As discussed in the Glossary, section III, under
the definition of carriage, in some typewriters the
record-medium* is held by a platen* that is mounted on a
"platen carriage" that is moved in said direction (i.e., the
character-space direction) thereby moving the record-medium
for character-space and word-space* distances.
In the typewriter of this subclass the record-medium does not
move during the imprinting of characters symbols. Instead the
type-face* elements are impacted against a record-medium at a
different print-point* for each character. The type-face
elements are on a type-head* that is mounted on a
type-head-carrier that is supported on a "type-head carriage"
that moves relative to the stationary record-medium, thereby
moving the successively impacted type-faces for
character-space and word-space distances.
Subclass:
320.1
With concurrent movement of carriage for record-medium and
carriage for type-head-carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 320. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with two carriage*
mechanisms, one of which carriage (i.e., a "platen carriage")
supports a platen that holds a record-medium* for movement of
both the platen and the record-medium in a character-space*
direction and the other of which carriage (i.e., a
"type-head* carriage") supports a type-head-carrier* for
movement of both the type-head carriage and the
type-head-carrier in a character-space direction.
(1) Note. As discussed in the Glossary, section III, under
the definition of carriage, usually the direction of carriage
feed for a platen carriage is from right to left, whereas the
direction of carriage feed for a type-head carriage is from
left to right (but note the note exceptions discussed in that
definition).
Subclass:
321
With repeat spacing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is urged to be moved in successive
increments of movement (the increments corresponding to
character-space* distances) a plurality of said increments
occurring upon the pressing of one key* element on the
key-board*.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass is usually one
that is electrically powered, thus enabling repeat spacing
with one pressing of a space key or space-bar*.
Subclass:
322
By electric or magnetic power:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the carriage* is caused by
electricity or magnetism.
(1) Note. The electricity is supplied to an electric motor
or to an electromagnet (e.g., a solenoid) which effects
carriage-feed movements to the carriage. Also included in
this subclass is a typewriter wherein a spring motor is
assisted by an auxiliary electric motor.
Subclass:
323
Carriage-feed in two directions (e.g., continuous typing in
both directions):
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is urged in a first direction and the
movement in said first direction is regulated as defined in
subclass 319, and wherein said carriage is alternately urged
in a second direction that is opposite to said first
direction and the movement in said second direction is also
regulated as defined in subclass 319.
(1) Note. A "print-line*" is usually formed by imprinting
successive characters* in the order in which they are read.
However, some typewriters are capable of imprinting
successive characters in reverse order, that is, the first
character imprinted is the last character of the print-line,
the second character imprinted is the next-to-last character
of the print-line, etc. In the typewriter of this subclass
the first print-line may be imprinted in regular order and
the second print-line may be imprinted in reverse order, the
text being imprinted alternately from left to right, and then
from right to left in "continuous" typing action.
Subclass:
323.1
In selected direction (e.g., for semitic language, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 323. Subject matter
wherein one of said first or second directions is chosen for
the primary or significant direction of carriage* movement.
(1) Note. The purpose of this mode of operation is to
imprint successive character* symbols in a character-space*
direction that is opposite to that which is used in the usual
typewriter. In most typewriters, characters are imprinted
from left to right to conform to most European languages,
therefore a platen carriage that moves the record-medium*
effects movement of the platen carriage from right to left
whereas a type-head carriage that moves a type-head-carrier
effects movement of the type-head carriage from left to
right. Certain Semitic languages, e.g., Arabic and Hebrew,
are written from right to left, therefore in the typewriter
of this subclass, the carriage movement feed direction is
selectively changed to be reversed from the directions
referred to above.
Subclass:
324
Word-space concurrent with typing of last character of word:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a carriage*-feed
mechanism that produces a word-space* whenever the last
character* symbol of a word* has been imprinted on the
record-medium*.
Subclass:
325
By space-bar mechanism (e.g., separate connection to
escapement), or paragraph-indentation key:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the actuation of a
carriage*-feeding movement as a result of pressing a
space-bar*-key* element, or wherein significance is
attributed to the actuation of a carriage-feeding movement
that moves the carriage a distance equivalent to a plurality
of character-space* increments as a result of pressing a
single key element.
(1) Note. The distance referred to is that needed to start
a new paragraph in a text wherein the first letter of a
paragraph is indented from the margin* of the body of the
text.
Subclass:
326
With compensator for tilt of typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to mechanism that
counterbalances the force of gravity acting on a carriage*
when the typewriter is inclined to the horizontal.
(1) Note. A typewriter is usually operated while it is in a
horizontal position. The carriage therefore moves
horizontally, and the weight of its mass does not affect its
movement. However, if the typewriter is tilted and its
carriage is moved along a line that is inclined to the
horizontal, the weight of the carriage will affect its
movement. Disclosures in this subclass provided for means to
compensate for the weight of the carriage due to tilting of
the typewriter.
Subclass:
327
For diagonal print-line:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a mode of operating a
typewriter whereby successively imprinted character* symbols
form a print-line* that is inclined relative to the top or
bottom edge of a rectangular sheet.
(1) Note. The diagonal print-line is usually formed by
concurrently feeding the carriage* and feeding the
record-medium* between successive imprints of characters.
Subclass:
328
By force-feed or screw mechanism (e.g., direct drive,
screw-biasing carriage, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved in a
carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction by a
mechanism that positively engages the carriage or a portion
affixed thereto and that positively moves in said direction
to thereby move the carriage therewith, or wherein the
carriage is caused to be moved in said direction by a
helically threaded element that is rotated and cooperates
with another complementary element on the carriage to move
the carriage.
(1) Note. In this subclass the carriage may be moved by a
spring that is biased or tensioned by a screw, or the
carriage may be moved by a pawl* engaging and moving a
ratchet* wheel.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
305 for force feed in a variable-feed carriage mechanism.
Subclass:
328.1
Including pawl and toothed rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 328. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved by a pawl* that
engages in a notch between two teeth of a ratchet* rack,
which rack is connected to the carriage to cause movement of
the carriage when the pawl moves while in engagement with the
rack.
(1) Note. The term "rack" as used in this definition is
discussed under the definitions of pawl and ratchet in the
Glossary, section III.
Subclass:
329
Carriage escapement controlled by pawl:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is urged by a source of power to be
moved in a direction for imprinting successive character*
symbols on the record-medium* (e.g., a character-space*
direction), and the movement in said direction is regulated
by a mechanism that (a) restrains the carriage against
movement, and (b) releases the carriage momentarily to be
urged to move, and (c) again restrains the carriage against
movement, which mechanism includes a member or members having
movement relative to the carriage or to a portion connected
thereto, the relative movement between the member(s) and
carriage effecting the restraint and momentary release of the
carriage to produce the increments of movement corresponding
to character-space and word-space* distances.
(1) Note. The regulating mechanism defined above is usually
a pawl* and ratchet* mechanism as these members are defined
in the Glossary, section III.
(2) Note. Movement of the carriage during carriage feed is
related to movement of the type-face* element to the
print-point* for impressing the type-face against the
record-medium*. These movements occur in various terms
applied in the typewriter art. In all the sequences a typist
initiates the operation by pressing a key* element which
causes movement of a type-face (e.g., a type-face on a
type-bar*, a type-face on a type-head*, etc.) from its rest
position. In "full-drop" escapement the sequence is (a) the
type-face is impressed at the print-point, (b) the carriage
starts its movement through a full character-space distance,
and (c) the carriage completes a character-space and stops.
In a "half-drop" escapement the sequence is (a) the carriage
starts its movement but stops momentarily approximately
halfway in a character-space, (b) the type-face is impressed
at the print-point, and (c) the carriage continues its
movement through the remainder of the character-space. In
"speed" escapement (also known as "reverse" escapement) the
sequence is (a) the carriage starts its movement through a
full character-space distance, (b) the carriage completes a
character-space and stops, and (c) the type-face is impressed
at the print-point. In all the sequences the type-face is
returned to its rest position and the key* is also returned
to its rest position. The differences between the various
sequences are primarily in the time available to enable a
type-bar (which carries the type-face element) to move from
rest position to print-point position and back to rest
position (a) as related to the time available for a
next-actuated type-bar to perform the same movements without
interference from the previously actuated type-bar, and (b)
as related to the time available to move the carriage through
a carriage space.
Subclass:
329.1
Means to ensure engagement of pawl at start of print-line
(i.e., overbanking control):
This subclass is indented under subclass 329. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure that will
positively cause a pawl* of the regulating mechanism to
contact the carriage* or a portion (e.g., a ratchet*)
connected thereto whenever the carriage has been properly
positioned at the beginning of the print-line* (i.e., in most
typewriters at the left margin* or the print-point* proper
for the imprint of the first character* symbol of a
print-line).
Subclass:
329.2
Carriage-feed initiated and completed during depression of
character key (e.g., "speed" or "reverse" escapement):
This subclass is indented under subclass 329. Subject matter
wherein a key* element that is used to cause imprint of a
character* symbol is pressed, the pressing of said key
element initiating (a) the movement of a type-face* from its
rest position to the print-point*, and (b) the movement of
the carriage* through a character-space* distance, and
wherein the movement of the carriage is started and completed
through a complete character-space before the type-face
impacts the print-point.
(1) Note. The differences between "full-drop" escapement,
"half-drop" escapement, and "speed" or "reverse" escapement
are discussed in (2) Note to the definition of subclass 329
above.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
330.2 for "half-drop" escapement and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
329.3
Pawl rocker spring regulating device:
This subclass is indented under subclass 329. Subject matter
wherein a pawl* is supported by a component, which component
is mounted for oscillation relative to a carriage-rack* or to
a ratchet* disc or wheel and is urged into engagement with
the teeth or notches of the carriage-rack or the ratchet disc
by a yieldable element, and wherein the force with the
yieldable element urges the component is adjustable.
Subclass:
330
Via ratchet wheel connected to pinion and carriage-rack:
The regulating mechanism includes (a) a carriage-rack*
affixed to the carriage*, and (b) a rotatable gear having
teeth that are engaged with teeth or notches in the
carriage-rack, and (c) a ratchet* that is in the form of a
rotatable disc or wheel and is joined to the rotatable gear,
and (d) a pawl* that cooperates with the ratchet, the
assemblage of parts cooperating to effect the restraint and
momentary release of the carriage.
Subclass:
330.1
And plural pawls:
This subclass is indented under subclass 330. Subject matter
wherein the regulating mechanism includes more than one pawl*
member.
(1) Note. Usually two pawls are provided, one of the pawls
disengaging from between two adjacent teeth of a ratchet*
momentarily, and the other of the pawls holding the ratchet
against movement in excess of one increment.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
332.1 for escapement mechanism having plural pawls and one
or more ratchet racks.
Subclass:
330.2
For half-drop escapement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 330.1. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to an action of the
pawl* and ratchet* mechanism that restrains, momentarily
releases, and again restrains the movement of said carriage*
to produce a "half-drop" escapement.
(1) Note. The term half-drop escapement is discussed in (2)
Note to subclass 329 above, wherein the action of various
forms of carriage escapement (including "speed" escapement)
is discussed and compared.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
329.2 for "speed" escapement and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
330.3
Mounted on pivotable pawl carrier or rocker:
This subclass is indented under subclass 330.1. Subject
matter wherein said pawl* members are supported by a
component, which component is mounted for oscillation
relative to said ratchet* disc or wheel to enable one or
another of the pawls to engage one or another of the teeth or
notches of the ratchet disc or wheel, whereby the disc or
wheel, and thereby the carriage*, is alternately restrained
against movement, released for movement, and restrained
against movement.
Subclass:
330.4
Including pawl(s) fixed to rocker:
This subclass is indented under subclass 330.3. Subject
matter wherein one or more of said pawl* members are integral
with or fixedly secured to said component.
(1) Note. This subclass includes some typewriters wherein
the component or rocker includes fixed offset pawls.
Subclass:
330.5
And slidable pawl:
This subclass is indented under subclass 330.4. Subject
matter wherein at least one of said pawl* members is mounted
for rectilinear movement relative to said oscillatable
component.
Subclass:
330.6
Including pawl pivoted about axis parallel to rocker axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 330.4. Subject
matter wherein said component oscillates about a first axis
and one of said pawl* members oscillates about a second axis
that is parallel to said first axis.
Subclass:
330.7
Mounted on movable (e.g., rotatable, slidable) pawl carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 330.1. Subject
matter wherein said pawl* members are supported by a
component, which component is mounted for movement relative
to said ratchet* disc or wheel to enable one or another of
the pawls to engage one or another of the teeth or notches of
the ratchet disc or wheel, whereby the disc or wheel, and
thereby the carriage*, is alternately restrained against
movement, released for movement, and restrained against
movement.
(1) Note. The movement of the component or pawl carrier may
be reciprocation or rotation.
Subclass:
330.8
Including particular structure of pawl (e.g., pivoted,
unitary, with roller, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 330.1. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to the construction
of manner or mounting of said pawl* member.
(1) Note. Included herein are typewriters wherein the pawl
is pivoted in a particular way, or is a unitary member, or is
provided with a roller at the ratchet*-engaging end thereof,
etc.
Subclass:
331
Including plural ratchet wheels:
This subclass is indented under subclass 330. Subject matter
wherein the regulating mechanism includes more than one
ratchet* that is in the form of a rotatable disc or wheel.
Subclass:
331.1
Including particular structure of ratchet wheel:
This subclass is indented under subclass 330. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the construction of the
rotatable ratchet* disc or ratchet wheel.
Subclass:
331.2
Including cushioned escapement support (e.g., rocker, pawl
buffer, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 330. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the construction of the
support for the pawl* member or of the component on which the
pawl is oscillatable, or of the ratchet* wheel with which the
pawl cooperates, which construction is characterized in that
it is provided with yieldable or resilient means.
(1) Note. The support absorbs excess movement or the force
or shock of movement of the carriage* or its driving or
escapement mechanism.
Subclass:
331.3
Including particular structure of mount for ratchet wheel
(e.g., bearing, clutch, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 330. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the construction of the
support for the rotatable ratchet* disc or ratchet wheel that
enables the disc or wheel to rotate.
Subclass:
332
Via toothed rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 329. Subject matter
wherein the regulating mechanism includes (a) a ratchet* that
is in the form of a bar having teeth or notches along one of
its sides, and (b) a pawl* that cooperates with the ratchet,
the assemblage of parts cooperating to effect the restraint
and momentary release of the carriage*.
(1) Note. In a "platen-carriage" typewriter (see the
discussion of platen carriage in the definition of carriage
in the Glossary, section III), the ratchet is usually a
carriage-rack*. In a "type-head carriage" typewriter (see
the discussion of type-head* carriage in the Glossary,
section III) the ratchet {defined in (a) above} is usually
fixed to the frame of the typewriter.
Subclass:
332.1
And plural pawls:
This subclass is indented under subclass 332. Subject matter
wherein the regulating mechanism includes more than one pawl*
member.
(1) Note. Usually two pawls are provided, one of the pawls
disengaging from between two adjacent teeth of a
carriage-rack* momentarily, and the other of the pawls
holding the carriage-rack against movement in excess of one
increment.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
330.1 for escapement mechanism having plural pawls and one
or more ratchet* wheels.
Subclass:
332.2
Mounted on pivotable pawl carrier or rocker:
This subclass is indented under subclass 332.1. Subject
matter wherein said pawl* members are supported by a
component, which component is mounted for oscillation
relative to a carriage-rack* to enable one or another of the
pawls to engage one of the teeth or notches of the
carriage-rack, whereby the carriage* is alternately
restrained against movement, released for movement, and
restrained against movement.
Subclass:
332.3
Mounted on movable (e.g., rotatable, slidable) pawl carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 332.1. Subject
matter wherein said pawl* members are supported by a
component, which component is mounted for movement relative
to said ratchet* bar to enable one or another of the pawls to
engage one or another of the teeth or notches of the ratchet
bar, whereby the ratchet bar, and thereby the carriage*, is
alternately restrained against movement, released for
movement, and restrained against movement.
(1) Note. The movement of the component or pawl carrier may
be reciprocation or rotation.
Subclass:
332.4
Including particular structure of pawl (e.g., slidable,
pivoted, unitary, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 332.1. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to the construction
or manner of mounting of said pawl* member.
(1) Note. Included herein are typewriters wherein the pawl
is pivoted in a particular way, or is slidable relative to
the carriage-rack* with which it cooperates, or is a unitary
member, etc.
Subclass:
332.5
Including plural toothed racks (e.g., pivoted, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 332. Subject matter
wherein the regulating mechanism includes more then one
ratchet* that is in the form of a bar having teeth or notches
along one of its sides, or includes a bar having teeth or
notches along more than one of its sides.
Subclass:
332.6
Including particular structure of rack (e.g., toothed,
slidable, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 332. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the construction of the
ratchet* bar.
Subclass:
333
Universal-bar or actuator therefor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the universal-bar* in
the drive train of the carriage-feed mechanism or of any
other mechanism of the typewriter, or to a means for moving
the universal-bar.
(1) Note. Included in this subclass is a typewriter wherein
the universal-bar is actuated by a key* lever.
Subclass:
333.1
Connected to actuator for another function:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein the universal-bar* is part of the drive train for a
function* of the typewriter in addition to the carriage*-feed
function.
(1) Note. The term "carriage feed" is defined in the
definition of subclass 319. The other function mentioned
above may be the vibrator* for the ink*-ribbon* feed, or the
ink-ribbon feed itself.
Subclass:
333.2
Adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for varying the
relationship of the universal-bar* to the drive train of
which it is a part.
Subclass:
333.3
Actuated by type-bar or type-bar action:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a universal-bar* which
is caused to be moved by a type-bar* or by the actuating
mechanism of a type-bar.
Subclass:
334
Carriage-feed-release mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is moved and the movement is controlled
by a movement-regulating mechanism that engages the carriage
or a portion affixed thereto, which mechanism may be
temporarily disconnected from the carriage to enable
unregulated movement of the carriage.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for a disclosure wherein
the carriage may be disengaged from a carriage-feed spring
which, per se, is provided for in subclass 336.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
553 for a line-space* actuator that also has an effect on
the carriage-feed release.
Subclass:
334.1
By disengagement of clutch between ratchet wheel and pinion:
This subclass is indented under subclass 334. Subject matter
wherein the regulating mechanism that enables carriage feed
includes a rotatable gear having teeth with teeth or notches
in a carriage-rack* and a ratchet* in the form of a rotatable
disc or wheel that is joined to the rotatable gear, and also
includes a clutch that connects the gear to the disc wheel,
and wherein significance is attributed to means for
disconnecting the clutch to disconnect the gear from the disc
or wheel.
Subclass:
334.2
By disengagement of escapement pawl(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 334. Subject matter
wherein the regulating mechanism that enables carriage feed
includes a pawl* or pawl members that engage with teeth or
notches in a carriage-rack*, and wherein significance is
attributed to means for disconnecting the pawl or pawls from
the carriage-rack to enable temporary unregulated movement of
the carriage*.
Subclass:
334.3
From carriage-rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 334.2. Subject
matter wherein the means for temporarily disconnecting the
pawl* or pawl members from the carriage-rack* acts by moving
the carriage-rack away from the pawl or pawl members.
Subclass:
335
With particular connection to carriage (e.g., gear train,
pulley and strap, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for enabling or
causing carriage-feed movement, which movement is regulated
to occur in regular or equal increments of movement, and
which means is not provided for in previous subclasses.
(1) Note. Included herein are such means as gear drive, a
pulley and strap connection, etc.
Subclass:
336
Spring-biasing carriage for feed:
This subclass is indented under subclass 319. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a yieldable element
that urges the carriage* of a typewriter to be moved in a
carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction, the
movement being regulated by a mechanism previously provided
for in this schedule.
Subclass:
336.1
Torsion spring in rotatable barrel:
This subclass is indented under subclass 336. Subject matter
wherein said yieldable element is in the form of an elongated
member wound in a plurality of spiral convolutions housed
within a hollow drum, one end of the member being fixed to
the drum to effect rotation of the drum when the yieldable
element is tensioned.
Subclass:
337
Carriage-retarder mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused to be moved in either a
character-space* direction or in a direction opposite to said
character-space direction, and the movement in either of said
directions in controlled to slow or decelerate said movement
or to maintain a uniform rate of movement whereby
acceleration is controlled.
Subclass:
338
Including governor responsive to speed or momentum:
This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter
wherein said movement of the carriage* is controlled by a
regulator that acts as a result of a tendency for the
velocity of the carriage to increase, the action of the
regulator being to inhibit said tendency.
Subclass:
338.1
Using centrifugal force:
This subclass is indented under subclass 338. Subject matter
wherein the regulator utilized the tendency of a mass that is
rotating about an axis to be impelled away from that axis by
the rotation, the action of the regulator being to control
the velocity of the carriage.
Subclass:
338.2
Using inertial force retarder (e.g., flywheel, weight,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 338. Subject matter
wherein the regulator utilizes the tendency of a mass that is
in motion to remain in motion or the tendency of a mass that
is at rest to remain at rest, the action of the regulator
being to control the velocity of the carriage.
Subclass:
339
Using fluid or fluent-material retarder:
This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter
wherein said movement of the carriage* is controlled by a
regulator that utilizes the movement of a flowable substance
as a means to control the velocity of the carriage.
(1) Note. The flowable substance used includes a gas, a
liquid, or a fluent material such as sand or small particles
in a device sometimes termed a "dashpot" or similar
structure.
Subclass:
340
Using frictional retarder (e.g., strap, disc, drum, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter
wherein said movement of the carriage* is controlled by a
regulator that utilizes the motion of two surfaces in close
contact with each other, and the consequent resistance to
such motion due to the close contact, as a means to control
the velocity of the carriage.
(1) Note. Among the various structures used as friction
retarder or friction brake means are: a drum, a disc, a
helically wrapped spring, a strap, etc., any of which
cooperate with a surface moving relatively thereto for
causing a frictional retarding force to be generated.
Subclass:
341
Carriage-buffer stop or rebound control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a regulator that is
located at the end of travel of a carriage* and controls the
stopping of the carriage when the carriage reaches the end of
its travel, or inhibits a tendency for the carriage to bounce
or retract from its stopping position when it reaches the end
of its travel.
Subclass:
342
Margin-regulator (e.g., adjustable margin-stop) mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused or enabled to be moved in
either a character-space* direction or an opposite direction,
and wherein significance is attributed to a margin-stop* for
controlling the movement of the carriage in either of said
directions by stopping the carriage at a preset point, which
point is adjustable relative to the typewriter, and which
point corresponds to either the left margin* or the right
margin of the record-medium* that is being typed on.
(1) Note. In most typewriters the right-hand margin
regulator (i.e., of a typewriter that imprints successive
character* symbols from left to right) is usually combined
with a mechanism to prevent further typing on the
print-line*, although the preventing mechanism may be
disengaged at the will of the typist to enable imprinting of
several additional characters on the same print-line.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
671 for a lock responsive to the end of a type print-line.
Subclass:
343
With intermediate margin-stop:
This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with one margin-stop* for
the left margin* and another margin-stop for the right
margin, and is further provided with a third margin-stop
between the one and the other margin-stops.
(1) Note. The third margin-stop is used selectively. That
is, for a particular text, the typist may require the
temporary use of a margin-stop located at a margin other than
the usual left-hand or right-hand margin. The intermediate
margin-stop is then used for this temporary purpose.
Subclass:
344
With other typewriter function controlled by margin-stop
(e.g., signal, line-space):
This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter
wherein said margin-stop* also regulates the action or
nonaction of another typewriter function*.
(1) Note. In this subclass the margin-stop causes the
ringing of a bell or the actuation of a signal in response to
the travel of the carriage* to the end of a print-line* or
the margin-stop causes platen*-increment rotation for
line-spacing and the end of a carriage* movement to the end
of a print-line.
Subclass:
345
Carriage-arrest function (e.g., "overbank"):
This subclass is indented under subclass 344. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is moved in a carriage-return direction
and the movement in that direction is stopped in a controlled
manner to prevent or inhibit shock to the mechanism or
rebound from the stopping position.
Subclass:
346
Print-line locking function:
This subclass is indented under subclass 344. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is caused or enabled to be moved in a
carriage-feed (i.e., character-space*) direction, and the
movement in that direction is stopped by the margin-stop* and
also causes the key* elements to be locked to prevent
pressing any of the character* keys so that no further
character symbols may be imprinted on the record-medium*.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass is provided with
a margin-stop to stop the carriage at the end of its print-
line*. However, the margin stop may be released by a
margin-stop-release key on the keyboard*, the pressing of
which key will disengage the locking of the carriage and of
the key elements so that several more characters may be
imprinted on the print-line.
Subclass:
347
With multiple-pitch selector:
This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means to determine
the pitch* of the character-space* distances and to change
the pitch by changing the carriage*-feed mechanism for
different character-space distances and wherein significance
is attributed to set the margin-stop* members in conformance
with different pitches used for a particular size or font* of
type-face*.
Subclass:
348
With release of margin-stop:
This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to selective disengagement
of one or another margin-stop* member from its active
carriage-stopping position, thereby to enable one or more
character* symbols to be imprinted on the record-medium* to
the right or to the left of the normal margin* of the text
being typed.
Subclass:
349
Conjointly set or centrally spring biased:
This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter
wherein the margin-stop* members at opposite ends of the
carriage* or at opposite ends of the travel of the carriage
are both moved to a new position at the same time, or wherein
the movement of one or both of the margin-stop members is
urged by a yieldable member toward the middle of the carriage
or toward the middle of movement of the carriage.
Subclass:
350
On record-medium table or paper-finger:
This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter
wherein the margin-stop* member is mounted on the support
that holds the record-medium* or is mounted on the
paper-finger* that helps to hold the record-medium to the
platen*.
Subclass:
351
Margin-stop structure, per se:
This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the structure of the
margin-stop* member itself.
Subclass:
352
Carriage, per se, or guideway therefor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure of the
carriage* of the typewriter or to the structure of the rail
or track or component(s) that enable the carriage to move
relative to the typewriter during carriage feed, or carriage
return of carriage-backspace motion of the carriage.
(1) Note. In many typewriters the carriage is a structure
on which the platen* is supported or mounted for intermittent
or incremental rotation of the platen to effect line-space*
distances. In such typewriters the platen carriage
intermittently moves the platen (and the record-medium* that
is held thereto) along the print-line* to effect
character-space* and word-space* distances. In other
typewriters the type-head carriage* is a structure on which a
type-head-carrier* is supported or mounted for movement of a
type-head* that includes a multiplicity of type-member* or
type-face* elements. In such latter typewriters the
record-medium remains stationary during the imprinting of a
print-line, and the type-head carriage intermittently moves
the type-along the print-line to effect character-space and
work-space distances.
Subclass:
353
Including auxiliary carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 352. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a main carriage* that
supports a platen* and is also provided with a secondary or
auxiliary carriage that supports the same or an auxiliary
platen in cooperative relationship therewith.
(1) Note. A distinction should be made between the
typewriter of this subclass, wherein the main and the
auxiliary carriages cooperate in the same typewriter, and the
typewriter of subclass 82 wherein plural platens may be
independently supported in an assemblage of typewriters.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
82 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
354
Guideway or bearings for carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 352. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the rail or track or
component(s) associated with the carriage*, which
component(s) enables the carriage to move relative to the
typewriter during carriage feed, or carriage return, or
carriage backspace motion of the carriage, or wherein
significance is attributed to the journals, gudgeons, or
assemblages that reduce the effects of friction between
moving parts.
Subclass:
354.1
Guideway cooperating with ball bearings or roller bearings:
This subclass is indented under subclass 354. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the cooperative
association of the rail or track with the journals, gudgeons,
or assemblages, which assemblages include a bearing known as
a ball bearing or a roller bearing.
(1) Note. The form of bearing for this and indented
subclasses includes two annular members having an annular
space therebetween, in which annular space a plurality of
rollers or balls are provided. By this construction, one of
the members is enabled to rotate relative to the other
member, the rollers or the balls revolving and rotating
within annular space.
Subclass:
354.2
Including bearing holder geared to carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 354.1. Subject
matter wherein said bearings are provided with toothed
portions, and a part of the carriage* is provided with other
toothed portions, and wherein the toothed portions of the
bearings intermesh with the toothed portions of the
carriage.
Subclass:
354.3
Including repositionable guideway:
This subclass is indented under subclass 354.1. Subject
matter wherein the rail or track for the carriage* may be
shifted or adjusted relative to the typewriter.
(1) Note. This construction enables an operator to clean,
or align or adjust the parts of the typewriter.
Subclass:
355
Means for repositioning carriage or platen thereon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 283. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* of the typewriter may be shifted or
adjusted relative to the typewriter, or the platen* that is
on the carriage may be adjusted relative to the carriage.
Subclass:
356
To nonprint position:
This subclass is indented under subclass 355. Subject matter
wherein the shift or adjustment is from a position at which
the platen* supported by the carriage* is in an operative
(i.e., typing) position, to a position at which the platen,
still supported by the carriage, is not in operative
position.
(1) Note. This construction enables a carriage to be moved
out of the way to facilitate cleaning, inspection, or
adjustment of the interior of the typewriter.
Subclass:
357
To detach carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 355. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* of the typewriter may be readily
removed from, and the same or another carriage may be
replaced in, the typewriter.
(1) Note. This construction enables a carriage to be
removed to facilitate cleaning of the interior of the
typewriter, or to replace the carriage with one of a
different size.
Subclass:
358
To detach platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 355. Subject matter
wherein the platen* of the typewriter may be readily removed
from, and the same or another platen may be replaced in, the
carriage.
Subclass:
359
HAVING TYPEWRITER-CONTROLLED RECIPROCABLE ELECTROMAGNETIC
DRIVE FOR TYPE-BAR ACTUATION IN SAME TYPEWRITER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with one or
more magnetic* motors energized by electricity and movable
to-and-fro in a straight line, the magnetic motor(s) being
used for effecting the movement of any type-bar* member from
a rest position to a print-point* position and being
initiated by a typist who is typing on the typewriter that is
being actuated.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
184 for a typewriter having electromagnetic actuators for
plural functions*.
Subclass:
360
Including electromagnetic return of universal actuator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 359. Subject matter
wherein said one magnetic* motor is used to retract any or
all of the type-bar* members from a print-point* position to
a rest position by way of one linkage that serves to move any
of the members.
Subclass:
361
Including actuator to complete depression of selected key or
key lever:
This subclass is indented under subclass 359. Subject matter
wherein one or more of said magnetic* motors is energized
when a selected key* element or a selected key lever is
pressed by the typist, the energization of the magnetic motor
causing the continuance of movement of the selected type-bar*
member connected to said selected key or key lever has
completed movement from a rest position to a print-point*
position.
(1) Note. The term "selected" is discussed in the
definitions of case-shift* and type-bar assemblage in the
Glossary, section III, and the term "key lever" is defined in
subclass 472 below.
(2) Note. The typewriter of this subclass may include one
magnetic motor (i.e., "universal" actuator) that completes
the depression of any key or key lever, or may include a
magnetic motor (i.e., an individual solenoid) for each of the
keys or key levers.
Subclass:
362
Including universal actuator to actuate selected type-bar
action:
This subclass is indented under subclass 359. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a plurality of
type-bar* members and a plurality of linkages connected so as
to join one linkage to one type-bar member, whereby pressing
of a selected key* element will cause movement of a
corresponding selected type-bar, and wherein one said
magnetic* motor is provided, which magnetic motor causes
movement of any selected type-bar member by way of a
corresponding linkage.
Subclass:
363
And individual solenoids to connect the type-bar action to be
actuated:
This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with magnetic* motors in
addition to said one magnetic motor, which additional
magnetic motors are used to join one linkage to a
corresponding type-bar*, and wherein one additional magnetic
motor corresponding to a selected type-bar is energized to
join the selected linkage to the selected type-bar when said
one magnetic motor is energized to cause movement of the
selected type-bar.
Subclass:
364
Including individual solenoids to actuate the selected
type-bar action:
This subclass is indented under subclass 359. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a plurality of
type-bar* members and with a plurality of magnetic* motors,
one such motor being effective to cause movement of one
type-bar, and wherein the pressing of a selected key* element
causes energization of a corresponding selected magnetic
motor to cause movement of its connected type-bar.
Subclass:
365
HAVING ROTATED POWER DRIVE INTERMITTENTLY APPLIED FOR
TYPE-BAR ACTUATION:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein mechanical energy is used to turn a
shaft, said shaft being the origin of the force needed to
perform any of the typing operations in a typewriter, and
wherein said shaft is caused to be connected temporarily to a
force-transmitting member only when an operation is to be
performed, which operation includes the movement of a
type-bar* (i.e., having a type-face* element thereon) from a
rest position to a print-point* position for imprinting a
character* on a record-medium*, or the movement of any
element of a typewriter to perform a typing function*.
(1) Note. The mechanical energy is usually supplied by a
electric motor that is powered to rotate continuously. The
operation usually performed is the intermittent (i.e., on
demand of the typist) actuation of a succession of type-bar
members that are on a type-bar-segment*, but is not limited
to that operation. A typist using such an "electric
typewriter" needs to exert only as much force in depressing a
key* element as is needed to connect the force-transmitting
member to the shaft or to release the energy stored in a
spring to actuate an operation such as type-bar actuation,
carriage feed, carriage return, case-shift*, etc., the named
operations being only exemplary. The power may be applied
directly via a power roll of a linkage or may be applied
indirectly via means to transfer the power to an intermediate
selectively operated actuator (e.g., such as a spring)
capable of storing the power.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
192 for a continuously rotated power drive intermittently
applied for ribbon* feed or vibrator* actuation.
Subclass:
366
Including jam-release means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter
wherein a power-driven typewriter is provided with means for
freeing a blockage caused by two movable parts of the
typewriter tending to occupy the same space at the same
time.
(1) Note. The most frequent occurrence of a jam results
from two type-face* elements, each on its respective
type-bar*, that arrive at the print-point* at the same time.
Since a print-point accommodates only one type-face element,
a jam will occur if two such elements tend to occupy the
print-point simultaneously. The mechanism of this subclass
inhibits the actuation of one of the type-bars to prevent
such an occurrence. In a typewriter that is not provided
with such preventing means, or in a typewriter in which such
a jam occurs despite said means, the mechanism effects the
release of such a jammed condition.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
425 for other jam-release mechanism.
Subclass:
367
Interposed components driven by filter shaft:
This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is driven by a power drive that
includes said shaft and a second shaft, which second shaft is
rotated intermittently (i.e., when an operation is to be
performed), and has radial projections thereon one of which
projections strikes a member when the second shaft is
rotated, which member is moved substantially tangentially of
the second shaft when struck, and which member lies between
the second shaft and a linkage that actuates the operation to
be performed.
(1) Note. The operation that is performed is usually the
selection of a type-face* to be impacted against the record-
medium* and the actuation of the type-bar* that carries the
selected type-face.
Subclass:
368
For repeat-type action:
This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is driven by a power drive and is
capable of an operation in which a typist presses one
particular character*-key* element and the type-face*
corresponding to said key will impact the record-medium*
again and again to produce a succession of character symbols
during the one pressing of the key element, all of which
symbols are the same character.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
299 for a typewriter capable of forming a succession of
character symbols, all of which symbols are the same
character.
Subclass:
369
With prevention of repeat typing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
wherein said typewriter is capable of said operation in which
repeated typing of the same character* symbol occurs, or is
capable of inhibiting the repeated typing operation.
(1) Note. A typewriter of this subclass includes a
mechanism that is either (a) particularly designed to prevent
repeat typing that might otherwise occur, or (b) capable of
selectively inhibiting the repeated typing operation.
Subclass:
370
Via continuously rotated power roll:
This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter
wherein said shaft is turned uninterruptedly (i.e.,
continuously rotated) and is fixed to a generally cylindrical
member for similar continuous rotation of the member, which
cylindrical member is positioned transversely of the
type-bar* action mechanisms and the key* lever mechanisms of
the typewriter, and is provided with surface modifications or
characteristics intended to be engaged temporarily with a
component that is connected to a type-bar action or to means
for actuating a function* when a typist depresses a selected
key element that initiates said one action or said one
function*.
(1) Note. This subclass includes a typewriter having (a) a
plurality of pulleys fixed on a continuously rotated drive
shaft, each type-bar action being selectively connected with
its respective pulley by a flexible band, or (b) a
continuously rotated cam-shaped element selectively
engageable by each key lever to limit the rate of depression
of the key lever and to drive the selected key lever to its
rest position subsequent to impact of the type-bar against
the record-medium*.
(2) Note. A power roll of this subclass (370) differs from
a drive shaft of subclass 365 in that a drive shaft is merely
a continuously rotated shaft, whereas a power roll is located
in the typewriter in a particular transverse relationship,
has a surface that is particularly modified to engage a
selected component for movement of the component, and
cooperates with the selected component under control of the
typist by way of key lever elements.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
186 for a continuously rotated power roll selectively
connected to plural functions.
Subclass:
371
And oscillatable cam:
This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter
wherein said continuously rotated cylindrical member
intermittently drives a component, which component has a cam
surface and pivots to-and-fro in an arc to move a lever on
which the component is mounted.
(1) Note. A "cam surface" is defined as the edge periphery
of a disc that oscillates or rotates about an axis, the
radial distance from the axis to the periphery varying around
the periphery. The cam is mounted on a lever that is
pivotally mounted and is connected to the type-bar* action
linkage. When the cam is temporarily connected to the
cylindrical member, the cam oscillates about its axis,
thereby pushing the lever through the pivot axis of the cam.
The resulting oscillation of the lever actuates the type-bar
linkage.
Subclass:
372
And rotatable cam (e.g., single-lobe cam):
This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter
wherein said continuously rotated cylindrical member
intermittently drives a component, which component has a cam
surface and turns around an axis to move a lever on which the
component is mounted.
(1) Note. A "cam surface" is defined as the edge periphery
of a disc that oscillates or rotates about an axis, the
radial distance from the axis to the periphery varying around
the periphery. The cam is mounted on a lever that is
pivotally mounted and is connected to the type-bar* action
linkage. When the cam is temporarily connected to the
cylindrical member, the cam rotates about its axis, thereby
pushing the lever through the pivot axis of the cam. The
resulting oscillation of the lever actuates the type-bar
linkage.
Subclass:
373
Including double-lobe cam:
This subclass is indented under subclass 372. Subject matter
wherein said cam surface is so configured that it will effect
two complete oscillatory movements of the lever on which it
is mounted during each rotation (i.e., through 360 deg.) of
said component, a complete oscillatory movement comprising a
movement away from and a movement toward a rest or normal
position.
Subclass:
374
And friction leg (e.g., other than by cam):
This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter
wherein said continuously rotated cylindrical member
intermittently drives a component by nonslidable contact
between a surface of the member and a surface of the
component.
Subclass:
375
Snatch roll:
This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter
wherein the surface characteristics of said continuously
rotated cylindrical member include toothlike projections
extending circumferentially around the member, each
projection being substantially parallel to the axis of
rotation of the member to form a longitudinally corrugated
surface on the member, and wherein said component is a pawl*
or a star wheel (i.e., a rotatable element having projections
or teeth extending radially), which component is temporarily
engaged with said surface when an actuation of the typewriter
is desired.
Subclass:
375.1
Including plural coaxial snatch discs:
This subclass is indented under subclass 375. Subject matter
wherein said continuously rotated cylindrical member is
formed as a composite assemblage of elements rotating on the
same axis, each of which elements extends in an axial
direction to only part of the axial length of said member,
but is otherwise similar in configuration to said member as
to its toothlike projections.
(1) Note. The elements may be arranged so that the teeth of
the side by side discs form a composite projection that is
parallel to the axis, or may be arranged with the side by
side discs rotationally displaced so that the teeth form a
composite projection that is helical about the axis.
Subclass:
375.2
With control of impact force:
This subclass is indented under subclass 375. Subject matter
wherein the cylindrical member and the component cause a
type-bar* together with its type-face* element to be
impressed against a record-medium* with a particular impetus,
and wherein the cooperation between the cylindrical member
and the component, or movement of the component itself, may
be regulated as to its impression impetus.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
376 for impact control in a typewriter having a power roll.
Subclass:
375.3
With electromagnetic control of pawl:
This subclass is indented under subclass 375. Subject matter
wherein said component is a pawl* that engages a notch
between the projection of said cylindrical member when an
actuation of the typewriter is desired, the pawl being moved
into engagement with the notch by the energization of an
electromagnetically driven element.
Subclass:
375.4
And star wheel:
This subclass is indented under subclass 375. Subject matter
wherein said component is a rotatable element having
projections or teeth extending radially from the axis of
rotation of the element, and wherein a projection or tooth of
said element engages a notch between the projections of said
cylindrical member when an actuation of the typewriter is
desired.
Subclass:
376
With control of impact force:
This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter
wherein the member and the component cause a type-bar*
together with its type-face* element to be impressed against
a record-medium* with a particular impetus, and wherein the
cooperation between the cylindrical member and the component,
or the movement of the component itself, may be regulated as
to its impression impetus.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
375.2 for impact control in a typewriter having a snatch
roll.
Subclass:
377
Via limited-rotation clutch:
This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter
wherein said continuously rotated shaft is caused to be
connected intermittently and temporarily to said
force-transmitting member by way of a clutch that is engaged
for only a predetermined number of degrees of rotation and
disengaged after the predetermined number of degrees of
rotation has been transmitted.
(1) Note. A clutch is a mechanism that includes a first
element rotatable with a first shaft and a second element
rotatable to drive a second shaft. The elements and shafts
are rotatable about a common axis, and at least one of the
elements is movable relative to the other element into
nonslidable engagement therewith. When the elements are in
engagement the rotation of the first shaft will be
transmitted to the second shaft and when the elements are not
in engagement the second shaft will not be rotated by the
first shaft. The rotation of the continuously rotating shaft
causes rotation of the first shaft, which causes rotation of
the second shaft by way of the intermittently engaged
elements, and the force-transmitting member is connected to
the second shaft to be intermittently driven thereby.
Subclass:
378
Plural cams clutched to drive shaft:
This subclass is indented under subclass 377. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a plurality of said
second elements, each of which second elements includes a cam
surface that is connected by way of a cam-surface follower to
a force-transmitting member for a selected type-bar* action.
Subclass:
379
Via spring drive (e.g., spring-driven snatch roll):
This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter
wherein said shaft is caused to be connected intermittently
and temporarily to said force-transmitting member by way of
at least one resilient or yieldable component, which
component is stressed by rotation of the shaft, and the
stress in the component is released intermittently or
selectively to actuate a selected type-bar* action.
Subclass:
380
Including Individual spring for each type-bar action:
This subclass is indented under subclass 379. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a plurality of said
components corresponding to the number of type-bar* members
and the number of mechanisms that actuate the type-bars, one
of said components being connected to each one of said
type-bars.
Subclass:
381
Including reciprocable common actuator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 379. Subject matter
wherein one force-transmitting member is capable of being
connected to any of a plurality of type-bar* action
mechanisms as selected by a typist, and wherein said
force-transmitting member moves to-and-fro to make such
connection.
Subclass:
382
Via reciprocating common actuator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter
wherein said shaft is caused to be connected intermittently
and temporarily to said force-transmitting member by way of a
component that moves to-an-fro, and wherein a plurality of
force-transmitting members are provided, each member
effecting movement of one of a plurality of type-bar* action
mechanisms as selected by a typist.
Subclass:
383
TYPE-BAR-ACTION MECHANISM OR TYPE-FACE ON TYPE-BAR OR
TYPE-FACE INKER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to (a)
means for effecting movement of a type-bar* member from its
rest (i.e., normal or base) position to its print-point*
(i.e., type-face* impacting) position or to the close
vicinity of the print-point position, or (b) means for
returning a type-bar from its print-point position to its
rest position, or (c) structure for enabling such movement or
for supporting a type-bar during such movement, or (d) a
type-face mounted on or supported by a type-bar, or (e) means
for applying ink* to a type-face before the type face is
impacted against the record-medium*, or (f) structure that is
used in conjunction with a type-bar.
(1) Note. Although it is apparent that the movement of a
type-bar is ordinarily initiated by the pressing of a key*
element by a typist, none of the key, or key-board* or
key-lever mechanisms is included in the structure of this or
indented subclasses. For such key structure, see subclass
472.
(2) Note. This subclass is for a rear-strike typewriter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
the type-member* elements impact against the platen* (and
thereby impact against a record-medium that is backed by the
platen) at a print-point* located adjacent to a rearmost part
of the platen. This subclass is also for a front-strike
typewriter having structure not provided for in the following
subclasses wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter
in which the type-member elements impact against the platen
(and thereby impact against a record-medium that is backed by
the platen) at a print-point located adjacent to a foremost
part of the platen.
Subclass:
384
Spring drive for type-bar action:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein the movement of a type-bar* from its rest position to
its print-point* position is caused by the manual depression
of a key* element by a typist by way of a resilient or
yieldable component that is stressed and the stress is
released intermittently or selectively to effect said
movement.
Subclass:
385
With added-motion mechanism for type-bar near print-point:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with first means for
effecting movement of a type-bar* from its rest position to a
position close to (i.e., the vicinity of) the print-point* of
the typewriter, and is also provided with additional means
for effecting further movement of the type-bar from the close
position to a print-point position.
Subclass:
386
Including toggle-linkage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter
wherein said additional means includes a toggle-linkage* in
the actuating mechanism at effects said further movement.
Subclass:
387
Including momentum accumulator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter
wherein said additional means includes a mass or weight, the
inertia of said mass providing the force that effects said
further movement.
Subclass:
388
Including hammer, roller, or presser mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter
wherein said additional means includes a striker element that
imparts a sudden impact, or includes a cylindrical element
that rolls against said type-bar*, or includes a forcer
element that urges the type-bar, any of which elements is not
directly connected to the type-bar, but which effects said
further movement of the type-bar.
(1) Note. This subclass includes a typewriter wherein the
first means of subclass 385 effects rectilinear movement of a
type-bar from its rest position to a position close to the
print-point* of the typewriter.
Subclass:
388.1
Type-bar pivotable to vicinity of print-point:
This subclass is indented under subclass 388. Subject matter
wherein the first means (i.e., of subclass 385) effects
arcuate movement of a type-bar* from its rest position to a
position close to the print-point* of the typewriter.
(1) Note. This subclass includes a top-strike and
bottom-strike as well as front-strike typewriters.
Subclass:
389
With power assist for mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter
wherein said additional means effects further movement of the
type-bar* with the help of electrical or electromagnetic
energy applied to the type-bar-actuator means.
Subclass:
390
With end-thrust mechanism for type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein a type-bar* of a typewriter is an elongated member
having a type-face* (or a type-die*) element thereon located
at one end of said member, said type-face being positioned so
that its surface is approximately perpendicular to the
elongated length of the member, and wherein the movement of
said type-bar is in the direction of its length as it moves
from a rest position to a print-point* position.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
459 for a guide for a thrusted type-bar.
Subclass:
391
Type-bar slidable on flat support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 390. Subject matter
wherein said type-bar* is carried by a planar member and is
moved relative to the member while in contact with the
surface of the member.
Subclass:
391.1
Driven by gear means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the type-bar* is effected by way of
at least two toothed members, the teeth of which intermesh so
that as one member is moved, another member is also moved.
Subclass:
391.2
Driven by cam means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the type-bar* is effected by way of a
member having a cam surface connected to a cam-surface
follower.
(1) Note. A "cam surface" is defined as the edge periphery
of a disc that rotates or oscillates about an axis, the
radial distance of the axis to the periphery varying around
the periphery. As the disc rotates or oscillates, the
distance of a follower that is in contact with the periphery
will increase and decrease relative to the axis of the disc,
thus the rotation or oscillation of the disc will effect
substantially radial movement of the follower.
Subclass:
391.3
Driven by toggle-linkage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the type-bar* is effected by way of a
toggle-linkage* connected to the type-bar.
Subclass:
391.4
With power assist for mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the type-bar* is effected with the
help of electrical or electromagnetic energy applied to the
type-bar-moving means.
Subclass:
392
Including momentum accumulator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 390. Subject matter
wherein said movement of said type-bar* is helped by a mass
or weight, the inertia of said mass providing the force that
effects said movement.
Subclass:
393
For top-strike or bottom-strike typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 390. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
type-face* elements impact against the platen* (and thereby
impact against a record-medium* that is backed by the platen)
at a print-point* located adjacent to an uppermost part of
the platen or at a print-point located adjacent to an
underneath part of the platen.
Subclass:
394
With type-bar pivot traveling during typing movement of
type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein a type-bar* of a typewriter is mounted for
oscillatory or arcuate movement about an axis while the
type-bar moves from its rest position to its print-point*
position, and wherein said axis also move from a first
position to a second position while the type-bar moves.
(1) Note. The structure defined is directed to what is
effectively a "floating" type-bar. The pivot end of the
type-bar pivots about a first axis, and the first axis pivots
about a second axis, thus imparting a compound movement to
the type-face* that is affixed to the other end of the
type-bar.
Subclass:
395
Type-bar pivot on longitudinally movable carrier in
top-strike typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 394. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* is mounted for oscillatory or arcuate
movement about an axis, and the axis is in a support that
moves rectilinearly to-and-fro relative to the print-point*
position, and wherein the type-bar is in a top-strike
typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "top-strike typewriter" is defined in
the definition of 415 below.
(2) Note. Many of the typewriters in this subclass also
have ink-pad means to apply ink* to the type-face* while the
type-bar is in a rest position.
Subclass:
396
With ink pad on type-bar rest:
This subclass is indented under subclass 394. Subject matter
wherein said type-bar* or the type-face* element carried
thereby is supported while in its rest position by an
element, which element includes a block or mass of porous or
absorbent material that is impregnated with ink* whereby a
type-face that is resting on the element will be coated with
ink in preparation for the next impact of the type-face
against a record-medium*.
(1) Note. This subclass also includes an ink pad in a
top-strike or a bottom-strike type-writer.
Subclass:
397
With disconnection of type-bar action during movement
thereof:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein a type-bar* of a typewriter is caused to move from
its rest position to its print-point* position by drive
linkage that associates or joins a key*lever to the type-bar
so that movement of the key lever transmits movement to the
type-bar, and wherein the drive linkage is temporarily
disassociated or disjoined while the type-bar is moving to a
print-point position so that the type-bar may continue its
movement without further typing movement of the key lever.
(1) Note. The structure defined permits the key lever to
stop its movement or to return to its rest position while the
type-bar is still moving to its print-point position.
(2) Note. The term "key lever" is defined in the definition
of subclass 472 below.
Subclass:
398
With accelerated (e.g., motion amplifying) type-bar action:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed mechanism that effects an
increase in the rate of speed of a type-bar* as it moves from
its rest position to its print-point* position, which
mechanism includes a link or lever that pivots about a
fulcrum that shifts relative to the link or lever as the
type-bar moves.
(1) Note. It is, of course, inherent in any member that
moves from a rest position to a second position that
acceleration from zero velocity to a maximum velocity must
occur during such movement, but most disclosures of
type-bar-action mechanism are silent as to acceleration. In
this and indented subclasses, the claimed disclosure of the
patents therein emphasize the structure of the action that
produces a type-bar movement which accelerates during all or
part of its motion from its rest position to its print-point
position.
Subclass:
399
By rolling contact between links:
This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter
wherein the mechanism includes one lever or link that pivots
with respect to an associated lever or link on a fulcrum that
rolls or turns at the point of association.
Subclass:
399.1
By key lever rolling on fulcrum:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein the lever or link that pivots with respect to its
associated lever or link is a key* lever.
(1) Note. The term "key lever" is defined in the definition
of subclass 472.
(2) Note. Included herein are mechanisms in which a key
lever rolls on a frame or a fulcrum plate or a sublever, or
in which a sublever is pivoted on a key lever.
Subclass:
400
By cam-engaging link:
This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter
wherein the mechanism includes a component that rotates or
oscillates about an axis, which component has an edge
periphery that varies in radius around the periphery and
which component is associated with a lever or link to provide
the means for shifting the fulcrum of the lever.
Subclass:
401
By breaking and straightening toggle-linkages:
This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter
wherein the mechanism includes at least two toggle-linkage*
assemblages associated with a lever for moving the type-bar*,
one of which toggle-linkages act to move the lever when the
toggle-linkage is straightened and the other of which
toggle-linkages act to move the lever when the toggle-linkage
is broken.
(1) Note. The terms "broken" and "straightened" as applied
to a toggle-linkage are discussed in the Glossary, under the
definition of toggle-linkage.
Subclass:
402
By breaking toggle-linkage (e.g., to pull type-bar to
print-point):
This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter
wherein the mechanism includes a toggle-linkage* assemblage
associated with a lever for moving the type-bar*, which
toggle-linkage acts to move the lever when the toggle-linkage
is broken.
(1) Note. The term "broken" as applied to a toggle-linkage
is discussed in the Glossary, under the definition of
toggle-linkage. In this subclass the type-bar is pulled to
the print-point* as the toggle-linkage is broken.
Subclass:
403
By straightening toggle-linkage (e.g., to push type-bar to
print-point):
This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter
wherein the mechanism includes a toggle-linkage* assemblage
associated with a lever for moving the type-bar*, which
toggle-linkage acts to move the lever when the toggle-linkage
is straightened.
(1) Note. The term "straightened" as applied to a
toggle-linkage is discussed in the Glossary, under the
definition of toggle-linkage. In this subclass the type-bar
is pushed to the print-point* as the toggle linkage is
straightened.
Subclass:
404
Including adjustment of toggle-linkage anchor position:
This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter
wherein the mechanism includes a toggle-linkage* assemblage
associated with a lever for moving the type-bar*, which
toggle-linkage includes one link pivoted to the typewriter
frame at a location that may be varied relative to the frame,
whereby the effect of the toggle-linkage on the lever may be
varied.
Subclass:
405
By type-bar connecting link:
This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter
wherein the mechanism includes a lever or bell crank or link
that associates the type-bar* member with the key* lever for
moving the type-bar with an increase in the rate of speed of
the type-bar.
Subclass:
405.1
Including gear connection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 405. Subject matter
wherein the lever or bell crank or link is provided with a
toothed portion moving in the arc of a circle, the teeth
meshing with a toothed portion on the type-bar* member to
effect movement of the type-bar when the key* lever moves the
lever, bell crank, or link of the mechanism.
Subclass:
406
By pin and slot connection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter
wherein the mechanism includes a lever or link having a
narrow, elongated aperture therein associated with a lever or
link having a short rod extending through the aperture, the
aperture and rod providing the means for shifting the
fulcrum.
Subclass:
407
Including type-bar starter means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 398. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to that portion of the
type-bar* moving mechanism that initiates movement of the
type-bar away from the rest position.
Subclass:
408
For bottom-strike typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
the type-face* elements impact against the platen* (and
thereby impact against a record-medium* that is backed by the
platen) at a print-point* located adjacent to an underneath
part of the platen.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
32 for a type-bar* action in a flat-platen typewriter.
Subclass:
409
Including simultaneous actuation of plural type-bars for
simultaneous imprinting:
This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter
wherein two or more type-bar* members, each type-bar carrying
at least one type-face* element thereon, are each moved from
a respective rest position to a respective print-point*
position to impact two or more type-faces against the
record-medium* at the same time.
Subclass:
410
With pivotally mounted platen carrier (e.g., for access,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a platen* for backing
the record-medium*, which platen is supported for movement of
the platen relative to the typewriter during typing
operation, and wherein the platen support also enables
movement of the platen out of typing position being in the
arc of a circle.
(1) Note. The movement out of typing position enables the
platen to be taken out of the way so that access to the
interior of the typewriter is possible.
Subclass:
411
Type-bar actuated by rack and gear:
This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter
wherein type-face* elements are carried by respective
type-bar* members and wherein each type-bar is moved from a
rest position to a print-point* position by way of a
reciprocable bar having teeth along one edge thereof and a
rotatable disc having teeth on the periphery thereof, the
teeth of the disc meshing with the teeth of the bar so that
movement of one toothed element causes movement of the other
toothed element which causes movement of the type-bar.
Subclass:
412
Including type-bar mounting arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter
wherein type-face* elements are carried by respective
type-bar* members, and wherein significance is attributed to
structure for supporting the type-bars for movement from a
rest position to a print-point* position.
(1) Note. The structure includes a mounting having
discontinuous arrangement of type-bars at front and rear of
platen*, a mounting for type-bars having an elongated pivot
portion transverse to the platen axis, and a mounting for
type-bars pivoted for lateral movement.
Subclass:
413
With type-face inker (e.g., ink-pad rest):
This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means to apply ink*
to the type-face* element.
(1) Note. The inker is usually in the form of an ink pad
having ink thereon, the ink pad serving also as a rest to
support the type-bar* member with the type-face in contact
with the ink pad, and may have means for rotating the
type-bar as it moves from the print-point* position (with the
type-face upwardly oriented) to the rest position (with the
type-face downwardly oriented).
Subclass:
414
Including key or key-lever arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 408. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the key* elements or
the key-lever bars or to structure that support the key
elements of a bottom-strike typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "key lever" is defined in the definition
of subclass 472 below.
(2) Note. Included in this subclass is key-lever structure
for moving an intermediate horizontal linkage transverse to
the key levers and type-bar* members, structure including a
vertically movable key lever, and a key that moves a
horizontally movable draw bar or link instead of a key
lever.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
472 for a key-board* or keys of a standard typewriter.
Subclass:
415
For top-strike typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter in which
type-face* elements impact against the platen* (and thereby
impact against a record-medium* that is backed by the platen)
at a print-point* located adjacent to an uppermost part of
the platen.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
33 for a type-bar* action in a flat-platen typewriter.
Subclass:
416
Including type-bars pivoted on both sides of, or above and
across, platen axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* members carrying the type-face*
elements of a type-set-assemblage* are either (a) disposed
into two groups, one group of type-bars being oscillated
about an axis (or axes) located in front of the platen* and
the other group of type-bars being oscillated about an axis
(or axes) located behind the platen, or (b) oscillated on one
or more type-bar axes, the axis of oscillation of each
type-bar being disposed over the platen and transverse to the
length dimension of the platen.
(1) Note. The disposition of the type-bars discussed in (a)
of the definition may be above and in front of, or above and
behind, the platen. The disposition of the type-bars
discussed in (b) may be in two groups on axes above and
across the platen axis.
Subclass:
417
With type-face inker (e.g., ink pad, roller, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means to apply ink*
to the type-face* element.
(1) Note. The inker is usually in the form of an ink-pad
element or an ink-roller element impregnated with ink.
Contact of the type-face with the inking element applies a
coating of ink to the type-face for subsequent application to
the record-medium* as the type-face is impressed against the
record-medium.
Subclass:
418
Type-bar pivoted by gear connection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* member is oscillated from a rest
position to a print-point* position, the oscillation being
effected by a toothed portion on the type-bar, the teeth of
the type-bar being intermeshed with teeth on a toothed
component that is caused to rotate or oscillate.
Subclass:
419
Type-member or type-bar pivoted and rotatable (e.g., for
selection of type-face):
This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter
wherein a plurality of type-face* elements are carried on a
type-member* or carried by a type-bar*, which type-bar is an
elongated member that is oscillatable from a rest position to
a print-point* position about a pivot, and wherein either the
type-member or the type-bar may be turned or oscillated about
an axis that is substantially perpendicular to the pivot axis
of the type-bar, whereby one of the plurality of type-faces
on any type-member or type-bar may be positioned or oriented
to be impressed against the record-medium* when the type-bar
is oscillated to the print-point.
(1) Note. The structure provides for selection of one of a
plurality of type-faces from the limited number of type-faces
available on one type-member. For a typewriter wherein a
type-head* includes a plurality of type-faces comprising a
type-set-assemblage*, see subclass 139 above.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
139 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
420
Type-bar pivoted by push link:
This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* member is oscillated from a rest
position to a print-point* position, the oscillation being
effected by a component that is connected to the type-bar and
is moved in a direction along its length dimension with force
that tends to compress the length dimension.
Subclass:
421
Type-bar pivoted by cam:
This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* member is oscillated from a rest
position to a print-point* position, the oscillation being
effected by a component that rotates or oscillates about an
axis, which component has an edge periphery that varies in
radius about the periphery and which component is associated
with the type-bar to cause the type-bar to move toward the
print-point as the component oscillates or rotates.
Subclass:
422
Type-bar action:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to mechanism for effecting
the movement of a type-bar* from its rest (i.e., normal or
base) position to its print-point* (i.e., type-face*
impacting) position.
Subclass:
423
Including selectively disengageable type-bar action to render
action inoperable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein said mechanism includes links or components normally
connected together for enabling the mechanism to effect
movement of a type-bar* from its rest position to its
print-point* position, and wherein one or more of the links
or components may be temporarily disconnected at the will of
the typist, whereby the mechanism is made ineffective.
(1) Note. The purpose of this mechanism is to enable the
typist to prevent unauthorized use of the typewriter while
the typist is away from the typewriter.
Subclass:
424
With type-face pivoted on type-bar for rolling contact with
platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* member supports a type-face* element
for arcuate movement relative to the type-bar, the movement
being on an axis that is parallel to the axis of the platen*
to which the type-bar is moved for impression of the
type-face at the print-point* and wherein the type-face rolls
against the platen by moving the type-face-element axis
around the platen axis when the type-face is adjacent to the
print- point.
Subclass:
425
Including jam-release means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter having type-bar* members that are
movable from a rest position to a print-point* position is
provided with means for freeing a blockage caused by two
type-bars tending to occupy the same space at the same time.
(1) Note. The tendency for jamming is enhanced because all
of the type-bars impress against the same print-point. Rapid
typing will increase the probability that a previously
impressed type-face* element will not have cleared the
print-point before the succeeding type-face reaches the
print-point, or the possibility that two type-face elements
reach the print-point simultaneously. The resulting jammed
condition is released by the means of this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
366 for other jam-release means.
Subclass:
426
Including type-bar return before release of key lever:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* is moved from a rest position to a
print-point* position and from a print-point position back to
a rest position, and at least the movement from rest to a
print-point is accomplished as a result of a typist pressing
a key* element on the key-board* of the typewriter, and
wherein the movement of the type-bar from a print-point back
to a rest position may be accomplished while the key element
is still pressed by the typist.
Subclass:
427
Including yieldable link in type-bar action:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein said mechanism includes a resilient component as part
of the drive train that causes the movement of the type-bar*
member from a rest position to a print-point* position.
(1) Note. In this subclass the yieldable link is part of
the drive train. This yieldable link is different from the
return spring of subclass 436 below.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
436 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
428
Including means to limit type-bar movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for regulating
the movement of the type-bar* member in its movement from a
rest position to a print-point* position or its movement from
a print-point position to a rest position, said means being
part of said mechanism for effecting said movement.
(1) Note. The means is within the mechanism itself rather
than being the platen* at the print-point. The means may
include a toggle-linkage*, or may control the impact force,
or the velocity of the type-bar.
Subclass:
429
Type-bar pushed or pulled by hooklike cam:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* movement is effected by a mechanism
that includes an elongated component that is pivoted adjacent
to one end thereof, said one end being configured as a curved
extension that extends into a concavity of a cooperating
member that is included in said mechanism, the curved
extension also having a side edge periphery that varies in
radius around the periphery whereby as the component pivots
its periphery extending into the concavity will cause
movement of the cooperating member.
Subclass:
430
Type-bar pulled to print-point:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* member is moved from a rest position to
a print-point* position by a component that is part of the
type-bar-action mechanism, which component is itself under
tension as the type-bar is moved to the print-point.
Subclass:
430.1
By cam means (e.g., slotted cam, helix, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 430. Subject matter
wherein said component oscillates or rotates about an axis
and is provided with a periphery that engages a cooperating
element and causes movement of the cooperating element (and
thus causes movement of the type-bar*-action mechanism) as
the component periphery is caused to be rotated or
oscillated.
Subclass:
430.2
By toggle-linkage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 430. Subject matter
wherein said tension component is part of a toggle-linkage*
assemblage.
Subclass:
430.3
With movable type-bar-segment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 430. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* members of the typewriter are mounted
on a type-bar-segment*, which type-bar-segment is mounted so
as to be movable.
(1) Note. The movement of the type-bar-segment is often for
the purpose of enabling case-shift* movement and the
type-bar-action mechanism is modified to enable such
movement.
Subclass:
431
Type-bar moved to print-point by gear drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein said mechanism includes at least two components
having teeth or notches thereon, the teeth of one component
intermeshing with the teeth of the other component whereby
the movement of one component is transmitted to the movement
of the other component, and the components being associated
in the type-bar*-action mechanism.
Subclass:
432
Type-bar moved to print-point by cam means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein said mechanism includes a component that is rotated
or oscillated about an axis, which component has an edge
periphery that varies in radius about the periphery, and
which periphery contacts an element in the type-bar*-action
mechanism that is moved by the rotation or oscillation of the
component.
Subclass:
433
Type-bar moved to print-point by toggle-linkage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein said mechanism includes a toggle-linkage* assemblage
associated in the type-bar*-action mechanism.
Subclass:
434
Including connecting link or joint:
This subclass is indented under subclass 422. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to one or more of the
components in the structure of said mechanism that effects
the movement of a type-bar* from its rest position to its
print-point* position, or wherein significance is attributed
to structure that joins said components to enable movement to
occur between the components.
Subclass:
434.1
Adjustable (e.g., in length, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 434. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure of said
component for varying the component as to its position,
dimensions, or effectiveness in the mechanism.
Subclass:
434.2
Flexible (e.g., spring, strap, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 434. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure of said
component that is bendable or yieldable or pliant.
Subclass:
434.3
Including connecting element (e.g., joint, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 434. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure that joins
said components to enable movement to occur between the
components.
Subclass:
435
Type-bar rebound preventer (e.g., via latch, brake, linkage,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for retarding
movement of a type-bar* that is returning from its
print-point* position to its rest position, whereby the
type-bar will not spring back from its rest position.
(1) Note. The intent of rebound control is to prevent or
minimize a second movement from its rest position to its
print-point position so as to prevent multiple images.
Rebound control includes structure such as a latch, a brake,
and an arrangement of linkages similar to a toggle-linkage*
assemblage, which structure tends to prevent rebound in spite
of the force with which the type-bar is returned to its rest
position.
Subclass:
436
Type-bar return spring connected to type-bar action linkage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a resilient or
yieldable means for effecting the movement of a type-bar*
from its print-point* position to its rest position, said
means being part of or joined to means for effecting movement
of the type-bar from its rest position to its print-point
position.
Subclass:
437
For impact control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter
wherein a type-bar* member is moved from its rest position to
its print-point* position to impress a type-face* by force
against a record-medium* backed by a platen* at the
print-point, and wherein significance is attributed to
regulating or governing said force by said resilient or
yieldable means.
Subclass:
438
With adjustment means (e.g., for "touch" control, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter
wherein a type-bar* member is moved from its rest position to
its print-point* position, the movement being caused by the
pressing of a key* element on a key-board* by a typist
exerting force on the key, and wherein significance is
attributed to changing the amount of force exerted by the
typist for pressing the key element.
(1) Note. The "touch" control of this subclass is intended
to modify the typewriter to the needs of various typists who
might use the same typewriter. Some typists use a light or
lesser touch, striking the keys with little force. The same
typewriter, if subsequently used by a typist with a heavy
touch who strikes the keys with great force, might have its
platen* damaged. The touch control tends to prevent this.
Subclass:
438.1
Including an indicator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 438. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter that is provided with said
force-changing attribute is also provided with a device for
showing the typist an indication of how much force is
required to press the key* elements of the typewriter.
Subclass:
439
Attached to type-bar or universal-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter
wherein said resilient or yieldable means is fastened to the
type-bar* itself or to the universal-bar* that causes
movement of the type-bar.
Subclass:
440
Attached to key lever (e.g., tension spring):
This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter
wherein said resilient or yieldable means is fastened to the
key* lever of the typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "key lever" is defined in the definition
of subclass 472 below.
(2) Note. The typewriter of this subclass is usually
provided with a tension spring (i.e., a spring which exerts
force when its ends are pulled apart).
Subclass:
440.1
Compression spring:
This subclass is indented under subclass 440. Subject matter
wherein the resilient or yieldable means is a component that
exerts a returning force when the opposite ends thereof are
pushed together.
Subclass:
440.2
Cantilever spring (e.g., torsion, hairpin, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 440. Subject matter
wherein the resilient or yieldable means is an elongated
component having two ends, one of the ends being fixed to the
frame of the typewriter and the other of the ends being
movable to exert a returning force.
(1) Note. The spring may be configured as a leaf spring or
a torsion spring or a hairpin spring, these being only
exemplary of the configurations used.
Subclass:
441
Type-bar pivot support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure that holds a
fulcrum or axis, on which fulcrum or axis a type-bar*
oscillates during its movement from its rest position to
print-point* position and its return from its print-point
position to its rest position.
Subclass:
442
For plural groups of type-bars:
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* members of a typewriter are arranged in
two or more sets, each set including only part of the full
type-set-assemblage* of the typewriter, and each set of
type-bars being supported on a separate pivot support that is
common to all the type-bars of that set.
Subclass:
442.1
Having type-bars disposed on plural ring supports:
This subclass is indented under subclass 442. Subject matter
wherein each set of type-bar* members is mounted in a pivot
support that has a circular or annular configuration.
Subclass:
442.2
Including type-bars pivoted on vertical pivot(s) (e.g., moved
in horizontal plane):
This subclass is indented under subclass 442. Subject matter
wherein each of the type-bar* members is mounted for
oscillation about an axis that is disposed vertically so that
the oscillation occurs horizontally.
Subclass:
443
Ring support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
wherein each type-bar* member is mounted for oscillation in a
pivot support that has a circular or annular configuration.
(1) Note. Usually this form of support (i.e., ring support)
is used in a top-strike typewriter or a bottom-strike
typewriter.
Subclass:
444
Type basket laterally movable relative to platen and
key-board:
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* members are arranged in a unitary
support, which support is mounted so as to be moved with
respect to the platen* and to the key-board* of the
typewriter in a plane that is parallel to a horizontal plane
tangent to the platen.
Subclass:
445
Type-bar-segment (e.g., wire journal):
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to said structure being
configured as a type-bar-segment.
(1) Note. In the typewriter of this subclass a wire or thin
elongated member is usually the common bearing or journal for
all the type-bar* members.
Subclass:
445.1
With guide for movement of segment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 445. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means associated with
the type-bar-segment* that constrains the type-bar-segment to
motion along a predetermined path.
(1) Note. The guide means of this subclass is usually for
constraining case-shift* movement of the type-bar-segment.
Subclass:
445.2
Including hanger for individual type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 445. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar-segment* is provided with a plurality of
components, each component being affixed to or dependent from
the type-bar-segment, and each component serving to support
one type-bar* member for oscillation of the type-bar.
Subclass:
445.3
And bearing for type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 445.2. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to a part in or on
said component in which a pivot or journal or gudgeon that is
connected to the type-bar* member turns or oscillates
relative to said component.
(1) Note. The bearing of this subclass may be a ball
bearing, a roller bearing, a conical bearing, etc., these
forms of bearing being only exemplary of those found herein.
Subclass:
445.4
Interchangeable (i.e., easily removable) segment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 445. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a type-bar segment*
that may be taken out of the typewriter without the use of
special tools to be replaced by the same or a different
type-bar-segment.
Subclass:
445.5
With type-bar anvil:
This subclass is indented under subclass 445. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar-segment* is provided with a component
located adjacent to the position at which the type-bar*
member stops when the type-face* element has reached the
print-point* position, which component acts to stop the
type-bar at the print-point.
(1) Note. In most typewriters the type-bar has some
momentum when its type-face is at the print-point. To
prevent damage to the platen* by repeated impacts of the
type-face against the platen. The anvil of this subclass is
provided to absorb the momentum of the type-bar rather than
the platen absorbing the momentum of the type-bar.
Subclass:
446
Interconnected (e.g., nested) support bearings:
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a part in or on said
structure, in which part of a pivot or journal or gudgeon
that is connected to the type-bar* member turns or oscillates
relative to said structure, and which part of one type-bar is
held partly within the confines of a similar part of an
adjacent type-bar.
Subclass:
447
Ball-and-socket bearing for type-bar (e.g., universal
joint):
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the form of bearing
that enables the type-bar* member to oscillate from its rest
position to its print-point* position and return, the bearing
including a spheroidal part that is partially enclosed in a
concavity that at least partially surrounds the spheroidal
part.
Subclass:
448
Roller bearing or ball bearing for type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the form of bearing
that enables a type-bar* member to oscillate from its rest
position to its print-point position and return to its rest
position, the bearing being a roller bearing or a ball
bearing.
(1) Note. A form of bearing for this subclass includes two
annular members having an annular space therebetween, in
which annular space a plurality of rollers or balls are
provided. By this construction, one of the members is
enabled to rotate relative to the other member, the rollers
or the balls revolving and rotating within the annular
space.
Subclass:
448.1
Including plural bearings for each type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 448. Subject matter
wherein each of the type-bar* members is provided with at
least two of said bearings, at least one such bearing being
on each side of the type-bar.
Subclass:
449
Adjustable bearing for type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure that holds
the pivot or axis on which the type-bar* member oscillates,
which structure may be varied in its location or effect on
the oscillation of the type-bar.
(1) Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the type-bar
bearing is adjustable as to its position, its frictional
characteristics, or resistance to oscillation of the
type-bar, etc.
Subclass:
450
Pin support for type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure on which the
type-bar* member oscillates, which structure comprises a
short rodlike component that is provided for each of the
type-bar members.
Subclass:
451
Wire support for type-bars:
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure on which the
type-bar* member oscillates, which structure comprises a
slender, elongated component that serves as a pivot for all
the type-bars.
Subclass:
452
Type-bar structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the type-bar* member
itself or to the portions of the type-bar that are integral
therewith.
Subclass:
453
With type-face movable in plane of type-bar movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 452. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* member is moved from its rest position
to its print-point* position along an imaginary surface, and
wherein the type-face* element is carried by the type-bar so
as to be moved by the type-bar and also to be moved relative
to the type-bar, both movements of the type-face elements
occurring along said imaginary surface.
(1) Note. The type-face element is usually pivoted to the
type-bar, but may be attached to the type-bar by a leaf
spring.
Subclass:
454
Type-bar rest or rest support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to that portion of a
typewriter that holds or supports the type-bar* in its rest
or normal or inactive position, or wherein significance is
attributed to structure that holds said portion on the
typewriter.
Subclass:
455
Including metallic material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 454. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to said portion of said
structure being fabricated of metal.
Subclass:
456
Type-bar or type-member guide structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means located on the
frame of the typewriter or located adjacent to the
print-point* of the typewriter, which means serves to confine
the movement of a type-bar* member that is approaching the
print-point into a path that will insure the correct
positioning of a type-member* (i.e., a type-face* element or
a type-die* element) relative to the print-point.
(1) Note. In this subclass the guide means is located in
the vicinity of the pivot axis of the type-bar.
Subclass:
457
Including resilient means for energy absorption or kickback:
This subclass is indented under subclass 456. Subject matter
wherein the guide means is provided with a yieldable element
that is engaged and partially displaced by the type-bar*
member print-point*, the displacement of the yieldable
element storing the force of movement of the type-bar and/or
the return of the yieldable element to its original condition
serving to initiate the return of the type-bar to its
original rest position.
Subclass:
458
Mounted on platen-carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 456. Subject matter
wherein the guide means is carried by the carriage* of the
typewriter that holds the platen* of the typewriter.
Subclass:
459
For thrusted type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 456. Subject matter
wherein the type-bar* member that is guided is an elongated
member having a type-face* element (or a type-die* element)
thereon located at one end of said member, said type-face
being positioned so that its surface is approximately
perpendicular to the elongated length of the member, and the
movement of said type-bar is in the direction of its length
as it moves from its rest position to its print-point*
position.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
390 for means for moving a thrusted type-bar member.
Subclass:
460
Guide adjacent print-point:
This subclass is indented under subclass 456. Subject matter
wherein said guide means is located in the vicinity of the
print-point* of the typewriter.
Subclass:
460.1
Including rollers or balls:
This subclass is indented under subclass 460. Subject matter
wherein said guide means is provided with a pair of
cylindrical elements or a pair of spheroidal elements to
facilitate the guiding of the type-bar* element or the
type-bar* member to the print-point*.
(1) Note. Usually the rollers or balls are located one on
each side of the type-face* element or the type-bar member at
the print-point, and reduce the friction between the guide
and the element or member.
Subclass:
460.2
Including pin or collar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 460. Subject matter
wherein said guide means includes a projection on the
type-face* element or the type-bar* member that enters into
an aperture in the guide means at the print-point*, or
includes a projection on the guide means that enters into an
aperture in the type-face element or the type-bar member when
the element or member is at the print-point.
Subclass:
461
Adjustable guide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 456. Subject matter
wherein the guide means includes parts that may be varied in
their relationship to the typewriter or the print-point*.
Subclass:
462
Type-member structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the type- member*
(i.e., the type-face* element or the type-die* element)
itself or to a portion of the type-member that is integral
therewith.
Subclass:
463
Removable type-member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a type-member* which
may be disconnected from the type-bar* member and/or the same
or a different type-member replaced on the type-bar.
Subclass:
464
Rotatable on type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a type-member* which is
turnable on any axis relative to the type-bar* member on
which the type-member is mounted.
Subclass:
465
Pivotable on type-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a type-member* which is
oscillatable on a axis relative to the type-bar* member on
which the type-member is mounted.
Subclass:
466
Type-face or type-die configuration (e.g., reverse image,
boldface, piercing, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the shape or physical
characteristics or character* imprinting characteristics of a
type-face* element or of a type-die* element.
(1) Note. Among the forms of type-face or type-die found in
this subclass are such exemplary elements as: a type-face
for typing a reverse-image character, a piercing type-die,
and embossing type-die, a type-face for boldface (i.e., thick
line) imprinting, a type-face for erasing or obliterating by
overprinting, a self-cleaning type-face, a stencil-cutting
type-die, a miniature or an oversized type-face, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
210 for a ribbon* used for boldface typing.
Subclass:
467
Dust guard for type-bar action mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure on a
typewriter, which structure serves to protect the moving
parts of a type-bar* action from the effects of foreign
matter which could harm the action if introduced thereinto.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
496 for a dust guard for a key*-lever pivot.
Subclass:
468
For type-bar bearing (e.g., shield on type-bar segment):
This subclass is indented under subclass 467. Subject matter
wherein the dust-protecting structure is mounted adjacent to
the type-bar* member at the location where the type-bar is
pivoted for movement.
Subclass:
469
Attachment to type-bar for imprinting extra character:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with a full
type-set-assemblage* of type-face* elements carried by
type-bar* members, and wherein significance is attributed to
the addition to one of the type-bars of an added type-face
element that imprints an additional character* on the
record-medium*.
Subclass:
470
Ink-impregnated type-face or inker for type-face:
This subclass is indented under subclass 383. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for applying ink*
to the type-face* element prior to impressing the type-face
against the record-medium* directly (i.e., without the use of
an interposed inking ribbon*).
(1) Note. In this subclass the type-face carries its own
supply of ink in the form of ink that is impregnated into the
type-face element.
Subclass:
471
Including stationary ink pad for inking type-face directly:
This subclass is indented under subclass 470. Subject matter
wherein ink* is applied to the type-face* element by an
ink-impregnated block of absorbent material, which block is
mounted on the typewriter.
(1) Note. Usually the ink-impregnated block also serves as
the type-bar* rest that is contacted by the type-face in its
rest position.
Subclass:
471.1
And a wick for feeding pad from reservoir:
This subclass is indented under subclass 471. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a receptacle
containing liquid ink* and a conduit including fibrous
material, which conduit leads from the receptacle to the
ink-impregnated block to transfer ink therethrough by
capillary action.
Subclass:
472
KEY-BOARD OR KEY-LEVER-ACTUATING MECHANISM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to (a) the
key-board* of a typewriter, or (b) one or more of the key*
elements of the typewriter, or (c) a key lever, which key
lever is a fulcrumed bar that is moved by the pressing of a
key element is connected to a mechanism that causes relative
movement between a type-face* or a type-die* and a
record-medium* to effect record-medium, or which bar is
connected to a mechanism to initiate or cause the operation
of a function* of the typewriter, or (d) means for effecting
the pressing of one or more key elements.
(1) Note. Mechanism which locks the key-board or key lever
against movement will not be found in this or the indented
subclasses. Such mechanism is provided for in subclass 414
under appropriate titles.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
100 for a typewriter having a permutative key-board.
414 for a key element or a key lever on a bottom-strike
typewriter.
663 for lock mechanism, and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
473
Including mechanism (e.g., auxiliary key-board) for
activating keys:
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with means that cause the
key* elements of a typewriter key-board* to be pressed
successively.
(1) Note. A distinction is made between a key-board having
keys that are contacted by the fingers of a typist, and an
auxiliary or additional key-board having elements that in
effect substitute for the fingers of a typist. The auxiliary
key-board may be used when it is desired to use a typewriter
having a standard key-board arrangement by overlying the
standard key-board with the auxiliary key-board having a
different key-board arrangement. The auxiliary key-board
converts the pressings of the keys thereon into pressings of
the keys of the standard key-board so that a typist familiar
with the arrangement of the auxiliary key-board will be able
to use a standard key-board typewriter. The auxiliary
key-board may also be used to a) convert the key-board of a
manually powered typewriter to the key-board of a
power-operated typewriter (e.g., an "input" typewriter), (b)
provide the keyboard of a manually powered typewriter with
the capability of sending electrical signals (e.g., an
"output" typewriter, (c) convert the key-board of a
cryptos:graphic typewriter, or (d) provide a standard
key-board for the typist when the keyboard of the typewriter
is not standard.
Subclass:
474
Electromagnetic key-board-drive mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 473. Subject matter
wherein said means includes components that are moved by
electromagnetic force to press the key* elements
successively.
(1) Note. This subclass is for an auxiliary key-board*
wherein pressing the key elements of the auxiliary key-board
causes electromagnetic components to press the corresponding
key elements of the typewriter. See subclass 479.2 for a
keyboard wherein pressing of the key elements moves an
electromagnetic component to effect movement of a
corresponding key lever.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
479.2 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
475
Operated by user's leg (e.g., foot, knee, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 473. Subject matter
wherein said means is energized by a lower limb of the
typist.
(1) Note. A typewriter of this subclass is usually intended
to increase typing speed by giving the typist the capability
of actuating such functions* as carriage* return,
case-shift*, word-space*, etc., by a key* element that is
pressed by action of a foot, knee, etc., rather than pressed
by a finger. A typewriter for a handicapped person is found
in subclass 87 above.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
87 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
476
For actuating function key only:
This subclass is indented under subclass 473. Subject matter
wherein said means causes only a function*-key* element to be
pressed.
(1) Note. As discussed in the Glossary, section III, a
function is an operation other than the impressing of a
type-face* against a record-medium* to imprint a character*.
The auxiliary mechanism of this subclass therefor causes
pressing of, for example, a tabulator key, a backspace key, a
line-space* key, etc.
Subclass:
477
Including means generating a signal for type selecting or
other typing function:
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with means for producing a
pulse or code indication whenever a key* element is pressed.
(1) Note. The key element may be one that is pressed to
select a character* or one that is pressed for case-shift* or
one that is pressed to perform any function* of the
typewriter.
(2) Note. Included in this subclass are disclosures wherein
the pressing of a key causes a light to pass to a
photoelectric cell, for example, to generate a signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
100 for a typewriter having a permutative key-board*, and
wherein pressing of different permutations of keys generates
signals to type different character symbols.
Subclass:
478
Via slidable code bars:
This subclass is indented under subclass 477. Subject matter
wherein the code indication is produced by rectilinearly
movable members having notches or grooves in one surface of
the members, the members being moved in accordance with the
particular key* element that has been pressed, and the signal
being generated in accordance with the relative relationship
of the notches in the members.
Subclass:
479
Via electrical component (e.g., switch, stylus, etc.) in or
with key-board:
This subclass is indented under subclass 477. Subject matter
wherein the pulse is produced by a device in an electrical
circuit, which device completes the circuit whenever a key*
element is pressed.
(1) Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the electrical
circuit may include a rodlike element (i.e., stylus) held in
a hand of the typist, which element is manually moved to
contact a particular key element to complete the circuit.
Subclass:
479.1
Capacitance-responsive switch:
This subclass is indented under subclass 479. Subject matter
wherein the device that completes the electrical circuit is
one that embodies the electrical phenomenon known as
"capacitance".
Subclass:
479.2
Electromagnetic-responsive switch:
This subclass is indented under subclass 479. Subject matter
wherein the device that completes the electric circuit is one
that embodies the electrical phenomenon known as "magnetism"
that is energized by electricity.
Subclass:
480
Including control of key action (e.g., buffer, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the regulating or
governing of the movement or speed of movement or stopping of
a key* element or said fulcrumed bar (i.e., a key lever) of a
typewriter key-board*.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for a buffer that absorbs
some of the kinetic energy imparted to the keys of the
typewriter by the typist.
Subclass:
481
By regulating key force or movement (e.g., key dip or
stroke):
This subclass is indented under subclass 480. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the governing of the
amount of pressure applied by the typist to the key* elements
of the typewriter or to the distance that the fingers of the
typist move during pressing of the key elements.
Subclass:
482
For stenos:graphic typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter key-board*
that is used in a stenos:graphic typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "stenos:graphic typewriter" is defined
and discussed in the definitions and notes of subclasses
91+.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
91 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
483
For Braille typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter key-board*
that is used in a Braille typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "Braille typewriter" is defined and
discussed in the definition and note of subclass 109.1.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
109.1 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
484
For foreign-language typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter key-board*
that is a foreign-language typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "foreign-language" typewriter is defined
and discussed in the definition and note of subclass 109.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
109 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
485
Key-board having multiple-character, multiple-movement keys:
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a key-board* having
key* elements that are movable in a plurality of directions
as pressed by a typist, each of which directional movements
of a key element effecting the imprinting of a different
character* symbol on the record-medium*.
(1) Note. In most typewriters a typist presses an
individual character key to imprint either the upper-case* or
the lower-case* form of a letter, and certain of the
character keys are usable to imprint either a number or a
particular symbol. The choice of symbols imprinted by
pressing a particular key is limited to one of two symbols in
such typewriters. In a typewriter of this subclass, a key
element is pressed and moved in the plane of its face, and
the direction of its movement will effect typing of a
different character.
Subclass:
486
Key-board arranged according to character location:
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the positioning
relative to one another of the key* elements that are each
pressed to effect imprint of a particular character* symbol.
(1) Note. The vast majority of typewriters are manufactured
so that their key-board* arrangements are the same or
standard. This standard arrangement permits any typist
familiar with the standard key-board to type on any
typewriter without looking at the individual keys. In the
typewriters of this subclass the arrangement of the keys and
characters thereon is emphasized (and is usually other than
standard) for various purposes. The standard key-board is
also known in the industry as a "qwerty" key-board, and is so
called because of the arrangement of letters along one row of
keys in that key-board.
Subclass:
487
Color-coded key-board:
This subclass is indented under subclass 486. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the color or tint of
the key* elements that are positioned on the key-board*, the
elements being grouped in accordance with color.
Subclass:
488
Key-board including row of keys having different heights:
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the positioning of the
key* elements of a key-board* in accordance with the
distances from the topmost surface of each key element to a
common base.
(1) Note. In most typewriters, the key elements are
arranged in a plurality of rows, each row extending
transversely across the front of the key-board and one row of
keys higher or lower than another. This arrangement conforms
to the design and manufacturing requirements of most of the
industry. In the typewriter of this subclass, the height of
one key in a particular row will be different than the height
of another key in the same row to conform to the natural
shape and reach of the typist's fingers.
Subclass:
489
Key-board including keys grouped to facilitate positioning of
typist's fingers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the positioning of the
key* elements of a key-board* in accordance with the distance
that the fingers of a typist needs to reach from a rest
position of the typist's hands to pressing position of the
typist's fingers on the key element to be pressed.
Subclass:
490
Key-cap or key-stem structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a key* cap, which key
cap is that part of a key element that is engaged by a finger
of the typist during pressing of the key or is visible to the
typist and bears a character* symbol corresponding to the
character that will be imprinted on the record-medium* when
the key is pressed, or wherein significance is attributed to
a key stem, which key stem is that part of a key element that
connects the key cap to the key lever.
Subclass:
491
Including cushioning means (e.g., yieldable surface):
This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter
wherein either said key* cap or said key stem includes means
that tends to absorb some of the force exerted by the
typist's fingers as the key elements are pressed during
typing.
(1) Note. In this subclass the cushion is usually a
yieldable or resilient pad.
Subclass:
491.1
Including underlying air-cushion:
This subclass is indented under subclass 491. Subject matter
wherein said means includes a resilient bag or container
having a gas therein.
Subclass:
491.2
Including spring supporting key cap or key stem:
This subclass is indented under subclass 491. Subject matter
wherein said means includes a resilient or yieldable
component that connects said key* cap to said key stem or
that connects said key stem to the key lever and holds the
parts of the key element in place.
Subclass:
491.3
With sensory indicator (e.g., sound, tactile response,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 491.2. Subject
matter wherein said means also includes a member that
stimulates one of the senses of the typist to enhance the
awareness of the typist to the act of typing.
(1) Note. Included in this subclass is a device to produce
an audible "click" when the key* element is pressed, or
indicate to the sense of touch a slight, temporary pause in
the movement of the key lever.
Subclass:
492
Adjustable in plane of key(s) (e.g., to facilitate reach,
rotatable, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter
wherein said key* element has the topmost surface of its key
cap lying in a particular plane, and wherein the position of
said key cap relative to the key-board* may be varied while
the top surface of the key cap remains in said particular
plane.
(1) Note. Included herein are typewriters wherein a key cap
may be rotated about an axis that is perpendicular to its top
surface, or wherein a key cap or a key element may be
adjusted to-and-fro or sidewise to fit the reach of a
typist's fingers.
Subclass:
493
Including character-bearing disc on key cap:
This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter
wherein said key* cap is provided with a thin, flat, circular
component mounted on the top surface of the key cap, which
component bears on its top surface an indicium representing
the character* symbol that will be imprinted on the
record-medium* when the key element bearing said key cap is
pressed.
Subclass:
493.1
Secured by encircling ring member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 493. Subject matter
wherein said component is mounted on said key* cap and
fastened thereto by an annular element that surrounds the
component and the key cap.
Subclass:
493.2
With slot for exchanging disc:
This subclass is indented under subclass 493.1. Subject
matter wherein said element is provided with an elongated
hole therein, through which hole the component may be removed
from the key* cap and through which hole the same or another
component may be inserted onto the key cap.
Subclass:
494
Having raised or recessed character:
This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter
wherein said key* cap is provided with an indicium
representing the character* symbol that will be imprinted on
the record-medium* when a key element bearing said key cap is
pressed, which indicium projects above the top surface of the
key cap or is formed as a groove in the top surface of the
key cap.
Subclass:
495
Including means for mounting key cap or key stem:
This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the manner of
connecting said key* cap or said key stem to the key lever
that is moved when a key element is pressed.
Subclass:
495.1
By spring means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 495. Subject matter
wherein the connection between said key* cap or key includes
a yieldable or resilient member.
Subclass:
496
Key lever or space-bar mounting structure (e.g., dust guard,
buffer, pivot, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 472. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a fulcrumed bar that is
moved by pressing of a key* element or a space-bar* element
on a key-board* element on a key-board*, or to the fulcrum of
said bar, or to structure that serves to protect said fulcrum
from the intrusion of foreign matter to said fulcrum or to a
component that serves to support or stop the movement of said
fulcrumed bar.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for the key lever, per se,
or the space-bar lever, per se, or the dust guard adjacent to
the pivot or the buffer or rest for the lever, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
467 for a dust guard for a type-bar* action mechanism.
Subclass:
497
WITH CONTROL OF "CARBON PAPER" FOR TYPING PLURAL SIMULTANEOUS
COPIES BY SINGLE IMPRESSION (E.G., ON "MANIFOLD SET"):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein one typewriter, using one set of key*
elements and one type-set-assemblage*, types one "original
copy" and at least one "carbon copy", the carbon copy being
produced by use of "carbon paper" adjacent to the carbon
copy, and wherein significance is attributed to the use of,
movement of, or position of, carbon paper in the typing of
the carbon copy.
(1) Note. The term carbon paper is a typewriter industry
term for a transfer-medium* coated on one of its surfaces
with a substance containing carbon or other pigment, this
form of transfer-medium having the property that a character*
symbol imprinted therewith is easily erased. In contrast to
an ink* that impregnates the fibers of a record-medium* or
adheres tightly to the surface thereof, a carbon paper
includes a pigment that lightly coats the surface of a
record-medium and can be easily removed from said surface.
In the early technology of carbon paper manufacture, it was
made using carbon as the pigment of the coating, therefore
its name, despite recent development which has produced
carbon paper having other colors and pigments and made
without carbon. In use, a sheet or web or ribbon* of carbon
paper is placed with its coated surface adjacent to a surface
of a record-medium (which is to be the carbon copy) and its
uncoated surface adjacent to the undersurface of the
record-medium which is to be the "original copy". The impact
of a single type-face* will effect the imprint of a
corresponding character on both copies. To produce
additional carbon copies, a corresponding number of pieces of
carbon paper and record-medium are used underlying the first
of the carbon copies.
(2) Note. A manifold set is an assemblage that includes at
least one piece of carbon paper with its coated surface
adjacent to a surface of one piece of a record-medium that is
to be the carbon copy. To produce an original copy a piece
of record-medium must be placed over the assemblage, and to
produce additional carbon copies, other assemblages may be
placed under the first-mentioned assemblage.
(3) Note. Use of carbon paper to produce one or more carbon
copies is found in this and the indented subclasses. However,
other subclasses found higher in the schedule reflect the use
of carbon paper for other purposes. One of these subclasses
is subclass 190 wherein carbon paper is used to type on the
reverse surface of a record-medium. Another of these
subclasses is subclass 206.1 wherein carbon paper in the form
of a narrow elongated ribbon is used. Also in subclass 227 a
narrow carbon ribbon which is usually a carbon-ink film, but
may be a carbon-paper ribbon, is fed by a ribbon-feed
mechanism.
(4) Note. The typewriter of this subclass includes a
structure for changing the feed direction of a sheet or web
of carbon paper.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
37 for a flat-platen* typewriter for typing on a manifold
set.
190 206.1 and 227+, and see (3) Note above.
204 for typing of plural original copies simultaneously.
Subclass:
498
Including prevention of full imprint on "carbon copy"
record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the interposition of a
shield or barrier between said carbon paper and said carbon
copy at selected portions of a print-line*, whereby said
selected portions will not be imprinted on the carbon copy.
Subclass:
499
On record-medium wound around platen together with carbon
paper:
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein one record-medium* for said original copy, and at
least one record-medium for said carbon copy, and at least
one of said carbon papers is interleaved as a manifold set,
and said manifold set is coiled around the platen* in plural
convolutions as typing on the record-medium progresses.
(1) Note. In some of the disclosures of this subclass the
carbon paper is attached to the platen.
Subclass:
500
With means for causing slack in web of manifold set:
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is to type on a manifold set
comprising a plurality of webs of record-medium* material and
at least one web or sheet of carbon paper interleaved with
the record-medium, webs, the assemblage being under tension
as a result of being fed through the typewriter by the
platen*, and wherein the tension in the assemblage is
relieved whereby accurate feeding is accomplished.
(1) Note. The term "manifold set" is defined in (2) Note of
subclass 497, the term "web" is defined as a piece of
material having a determinate width and an indeterminate
length, and the term "sheet" is defined as a piece of
material having a determinate width and a determinate
length.
Subclass:
501
By arcuate movement of carbon paper carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 500. Subject matter
wherein said webs or sheets of carbon paper are supported by
or mounted on a member, which member is oscillated while in
contact with the webs or sheets whereby to relieve the
tension in said webs or sheets and said assemblage.
Subclass:
502
By clamp on carbon paper carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 500. Subject matter
wherein said webs or sheets of carbon paper are supported by
or mounted on a member, which member includes means for
firmly gripping said webs or sheets and moving them relative
to the typewriter whereby to relieve the tension in said webs
or sheets and said assemblage.
Subclass:
503
By use of other than rectangular sheet carbon paper (e.g.,
disc, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper is configured to have a shape that
is not a sheet of determinate length and determinate width or
not a web of indeterminate length and determinate width.
(1) Note. In this subclass the carbon paper is usually a
disc of circular configuration, and see subclass 504 below
wherein the carbon paper is configured as an endless band
that is not considered to be a web of indeterminate length.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
504 for an endless band piece of carbon paper.
Subclass:
504
Endless-band carbon paper:
This subclass is indented under subclass 503. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper is configured as a closed-loop
strip of material having a determinate width, but the length
of which is interminable due to its closed-loop
configuration.
Subclass:
505
By multicolor carbon paper:
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper is formed having a plurality of
colors or pigments thereon, whereby the carbon copy imprinted
therewith may have character* symbols imprinted in selected
colors.
Subclass:
506
With means to prevent creep (e.g., relative movement) between
record-media:
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means in the typewriter
for ensuring that a record-medium* piece for a carbon copy
will be fed through the typewriter at the platen* at exactly
the same feed rate as a record-medium piece for an original
copy.
Subclass:
507
Including means for creep feed of carbon paper:
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for ensuring that
said carbon paper will be fed through the typewriter at the
platen* at a rate of feed less than the feed rate of the
record-medium* for an original copy or the feed rate of the
record-medium for a carbon copy.
Subclass:
508
Including spool or support for roll of carbon paper:
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper is in the form of a web (i.e.,
indeterminate length) of material that is coiled in
convolutions on a reel, and wherein significance is
attributed to said reel or to means for mounting the reel on
the typewriter.
Subclass:
509
Including a flat roll or core therefor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 508. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the configuration of
the coiled convolutions being compressed in a first diametral
dimension and expanded in a second diametral dimension at
right angles to the first dimension, or wherein significance
is attributed to a reel on which a coil of said configuration
has been wound.
Subclass:
510
And guide for changing feed direction:
This subclass is indented under subclass 508. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper is advanced from the wound roll to
a platen* where the carbon paper is used, the carbon paper
being advanced along a path that is not a straight line, and
wherein significance is attributed to a member which ensures
that the carbon paper will follow the bends of the path along
which the carbon paper advances.
Subclass:
510.1
Spool support shiftable to and from platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 510. Subject matter
wherein the wound roll of said carbon paper is mounted on a
reel that may be moved toward the platen* or moved away from
the platen.
Subclass:
511
Feed mechanism for feed from roll of carbon paper:
This subclass is indented under subclass 503. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means for advancing
said carbon paper from a wound roll thereof to a platen*
where the carbon paper is used.
Subclass:
511.1
Responsive to return of carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 511. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* of a typewriter is moved from a
location at which the last character* of a print-line* has
been imprinted to a location at which the first character of
a succeeding print-line is to be imprinted, and wherein
significance is attributed to said advancing of said carbon
paper under control of said carriage movement.
Subclass:
511.2
With retraction of carbon paper for reuse thereof (e.g., by
slidable carrier):
This subclass is indented under subclass 511. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper is advanced from a wound roll in a
first direction toward the platen* for use in typing carbon
copies, and wherein said carbon paper is drawn back in a
second direction opposite to the first direction so that the
carbon paper may be used again in a subsequent typing
operation while it is advanced in the first direction for use
in typing carbon copies.
(1) Note. The retraction of the carbon paper usually occurs
at the completion of one page* (e.g., one form of a plurality
of business forms) on the record-medium* web and is for the
purpose of repositioning the carbon paper between the next
forms to be typed. When the pigment on the carbon paper is
depleted, the worn portion of carbon paper is torn off and a
fresh supply pulled from the wound roll of carbon paper. In
this subclass the carbon paper roll is mounted on a slidable
carrier and the movement of the carrier effects advancement
and retraction of the carbon paper.
Subclass:
511.3
Carbon paper rewound for retraction:
This subclass is indented under subclass 511.2. Subject
matter wherein said carbon paper that is drawn back in the
second direction is coiled again onto the same coil from
which it was unwound during the advancement in the first
direction.
Subclass:
511.4
By driving carbon paper roll directly from platen (e.g., by
endless band):
This subclass is indented under subclass 511.3. Subject
matter wherein the force required to coil said carbon paper
is taken from the platen* which is rotated during operation
of the typewriter.
Subclass:
512
And support for roll of record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 508. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* that is to be typed on is also in
the form of a web (i.e., indeterminate length) of material
that is coiled in convolutions on a reel mounted on the
typewriter.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass may also have a
support for a roll of carbon paper.
Subclass:
513
Including relative movement between carbon paper and
record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means for moving the
record-medium* and with means for moving said carbon paper,
and wherein significance is attributed to mechanism that
causes the carbon paper to move at a rate of movement
different from that of the record-medium or in a different
direction, whereby the carbon paper and the record-medium are
moved with respect to each other.
Subclass:
514
Including positioning of auxiliary record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is normally used to type on a manifold
set that comprises a record-medium* and at least one piece of
carbon paper and at least one other record-medium, and
wherein significance is attributed to the insertion into the
typewriter of an additional record-medium for typing
thereon.
(1) Note. The additional record-medium may be inserted from
the front of the platen* or from the rear of the platen.
Subclass:
515
Including front insertion of carbon paper or record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter
wherein either said carbon paper or the record-medium* is fed
into the typewriter by guiding the leading edge of a piece of
carbon paper or record-medium directly between the platen*
and the print-point* of the typewriter via structure that is
positioned between the platen and the typist.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
595 for insertion of a sheet for "condensed-billing*" from
front of platen.
Subclass:
516
By simultaneously advancing record-medium and retracting
carbon paper:
This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* is moved in a direction to
line-space* the record-medium, and said carbon paper is moved
in the opposite direction at the same time, both movements
occurring after typing of one page* of text and before typing
on a subsequent page of text.
(1) Note. The movements referred to above do not occur
during typing on a particular page of text. Rather during
the typing of a page both the record-medium and carbon paper
materials move in the same direction, and the specified
movements occur between successive pages.
Subclass:
517
By means to arrest advance of carbon paper:
This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* is moved in a direction to
line-space* the record-medium, and wherein the relative
movement between the record-medium and said carbon paper is
effected by means for preventing the carbon paper from
moving, the relative movement occurring after the typing of
one page* of text and before typing on a subsequent page of
text.
(1) Note. During the typing of a page the record-medium and
carbon paper materials are line-spaced together. The action
described above occurs between pages, when the record-medium
is advanced and the carbon paper remains stationary.
Subclass:
518
Carbon paper carrier(s) respositionable relative to platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper is held to and moved by a member
(i.e., a carrier) that is movable on the typewriter with
respect to the platen* thereof.
(1) Note. In this and indented subclasses the carbon paper
is usually in the form of one or more sheets supported on a
carrier usually movable on horizontal rails toward and away
from the platen. Movement in the record-feed direction is
usually by the platen and a feed-roller*. Retraction of the
carbon paper for the purpose of repositioning the carbon
paper usually is by manually pushing the carrier away from
the platen after the feed mechanism has released the
record-medium* and carbon paper material.
Subclass:
518.1
Plural carriers disposed side-by-side for selective use
singly or simultaneously:
This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with two or more of said
carriers, and wherein each of said carriers is mounted on the
typewriter for movement with respect to the platen* along a
path, and the path for each of the carriers is parallel one
to the others, whereby any of the carriers is movable along
its own path individually or any of the carriers are movable
together or at the same time.
Subclass:
518.2
Plural carriers for serial retraction of plural carbon
papers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with two or more of said
carriers, and wherein each of said carriers is movable with
respect to the platen* in a return direction opposite to the
line-space* direction of the record-medium*, and wherein the
carriers are moved in said return direction one by one in
sequence.
(1) Note. As plural manifold sets of carbon paper and
record-medium are typed on, there in a tendency for the
carbon paper to stick to the record-medium, which makes it
difficult to retract the carbon paper from the platen. The
construction provided for in this subclass permits one carbon
paper to be retracted, then another, thus facilitating the
retraction of the carbon papers despite the tendency to stick
together.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
519.2 for another construction for this purpose.
Subclass:
518.3
With means to imprint selectively on one or more media (e.g.,
by holding selected media away from print-line):
This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter normally is used to type an original
copy and several carbon copies simultaneously, and wherein a
typist is enabled to type one or more character* symbols on
one or more of the copies without typing those character
symbols on the other copies.
(1) Note. Usually the original copy and/or one or more of
the carbon copies that is/are not to be imprinted are moved
to a position away from the print-point* so that a type-face*
will not impact there-against. An alternative structure to
perform this operation is the provision of a second platen*
member positioned to shield some of the copies and enable
imprinting on the other copies.
Subclass:
518.4
Including retraction of carbon paper and record-medium and
subsequent advance of record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper and the record-medium* is moved on
the typewriter with respect to the platen* thereof in a
return direction that is opposite to the line-space*
direction of the record-medium, and wherein the record-medium
is then moved in the line-space direction.
(1) Note. The retraction and subsequent advance is for the
purpose of repositioning the carbon paper relative to the
next page* or form to be typed, and occurs after the
preceding page or form has been typed.
Subclass:
519
Carbon paper carrier movable rectilinearly:
This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter
wherein said carrier for said carbon paper is movable along a
straight line.
(1) Note. The path of movement of the carrier is usually
along a line that extends at right angles to the axis of the
platen* and substantially tangent to the circumference of the
platen. The support for the carrier may extend to the rear of
the typewriter in a substantially horizontal disposition or
may extend substantially vertically from a member fixed at
the back of the typewriter.
Subclass:
519.1
With means to hold record-medium against retraction:
This subclass is indented under subclass 519. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper carrier is moved in a return
direction that is opposite to the line-space* direction of
the record-medium*, and wherein the typewriter is provided
with means to ensure that the record-medium will not move in
said return direction as the carbon paper moves in that
direction.
Subclass:
519.2
Including means to reduce binding of carbon paper during
retraction:
This subclass is indented under subclass 519. Subject matter
wherein said carbon paper carrier is moved with respect to
the platen* in a return direction opposite to the line-space*
direction of the record-medium*, and wherein a tendency for
the carbon paper to stick to the record-medium, is lessened.
(1) Note. As plural manifold sets of carbon paper and
record-medium are typed on, there is a tendency for the
carbon paper to stick to the record-medium, which makes it
difficult to retract the carbon paper from the platen. The
construction provided for in this and indented subclasses
enables the separation of the carbon paper from the
record-medium, thus facilitating the retraction.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
518.2 for another construction for this purpose.
Subclass:
519.3
Including lifting of platen for retraction of carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 519.2. Subject
matter wherein the original copy and the manifold set(s) of
carbon paper and carbon copy record-medium* are normally
disposed to be fed from the rear of the platen*, underneath
the platen, and to the front of the platen to the
print-point*, and wherein the platen is raised from its
normal position to a position above and clear of its normal
position to enable the carbon paper carrier (and the carbon
paper held thereby) to be moved in said return direction.
Subclass:
519.4
With guard over settable parts (e.g., denominational jacks,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 519.2. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to a structure on
the typewriter that serves to protect various movable
components from being moved unintentionally as the platen* is
lifted.
(1) Note. The components that are apt to be moved
unintentionally are usually located at the rear of the
typewriter, near the path of movement of the manifold sets
that are being fed to the platen, and are usually the
denominational-stops* of the typewriter.
Subclass:
519.5
With relative movement between record media (e.g., for
condensed-billing, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 519.2. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to movement of one
record-medium* with respect to another record-medium, this
movement being in addition to the movement of one or more
carbon papers with respect to the record-medium.
(1) Note. The relative movement of record media usually is
for the purpose of facilitating condensed-billing*.
Subclass:
519.6
With support or guiding or positive-driving structure for
carrier (e.g., table, adjustable stop, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 519. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for mounting said
carrier for said carbon paper, or to means for restraining
said carrier for movement along its intended line of
movement, or to means for effecting movement of the carrier
as the platen* is incrementally rotated.
Subclass:
519.7
Carbon paper carrier on endless member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 518. Subject matter
wherein said carrier for said carbon paper is moved by a
component that is trained around two or more pulleys and is
in the form of a closed-loop band.
(1) Note. This subclass also provides for mechanism for
adjusting the endless member laterally of its direction of
movement and for mechanism for adjusting the carrier relative
to the endless member.
Subclass:
520
Carbon paper holder (e.g., loading board, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a means for supporting
one or more pieces of said carbon paper, or to means for
enabling a typist to associate carbon paper with
record-medium* pieces or align a set of associated pieces
with the typewriter for proper subsequent feed of the pieces
to the platen*.
Subclass:
521
FOR TYPING ON CARD IN CARD HOLDER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to a
typewriter provided with means for supporting or retaining a
relatively stiff piece of record-medium* material while the
typewriter is being used to imprint character* symbols on the
record-medium.
(1) Note. Due to the stiffness of the record-medium (i.e.,
card) it does not readily conform to the periphery of the
cylindrical platen* around which the card is partially
wrapped during typing. This causes problems, especially
during the typing of a print-line* near the top or bottom
edge of the card. Other problems in typing on a card are due
to the size of the card, which is often smaller in length and
width than a sheet. Disclosures in this and the indented
subclasses are directed to means for over-coming the problems
caused by typing on a card. This subclass provides for a
retaining means that may be removed from and replaced on the
typewriter easily.
Subclass:
522
Flexible holder fed around platen with single card:
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means comprises a sheet of material
into which or onto which one record-medium* card is
temporarily secured so that during typing no relative
movement occurs between the record-medium and the retaining
means, which retaining means is sufficiently bendable to be
partially wrapped around a cylindrical platen* together with
the record-medium secured thereto, whereby both the retaining
means and the record-medium are moved in line-space*
increments during typing on the record-medium.
(1) Note. This subclass is also for a disclosure wherein
one manifold set {which term is defined in (2) Note of
subclass 497} is temporarily secured to a flexible retainer
or holder.
Subclass:
523
On card pierced or indented to aid holding:
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means has projections thereon that
enter into, or cause the formation of, holes or depressions
in the surface of the record-medium* card, whereby the card
is more securely retained by the retaining means.
Subclass:
524
Holder movable responsive to case-shift:
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a case-shift*
mechanism having relatively movable parts, and wherein the
retaining means is moved when the case-shift parts are
moved.
Subclass:
525
Card holder carried by platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means is supported by the platen* of
the typewriter for movement therewith.
Subclass:
526
And actuated in response to platen rotation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 525. Subject matter
wherein the platen* is incrementally turned for line-space*
movements during operation of the typewriter, and wherein the
retaining means includes a device for contacting the
record-medium* card and holding the card to the retaining
means, which device moves toward the card for holding thereof
as the platen starts its turning movement.
Subclass:
527
With platen surface modified for card:
This subclass is indented under subclass 525. Subject matter
wherein the platen* of the typewriter is a cylinder having a
periphery that is altered from a circular periphery, the
alteration being made for the purpose of accommodating the
record-medium* card or the retaining means for the card.
Subclass:
527.1
Including card gripper on platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 527. Subject matter
wherein the alteration is made for the purpose of
accommodating a device that is movable to closely contact the
card and hold it to the platen*.
(1) Note. In some typewriters the card gripper is pivotable
with respect to the platen.
Subclass:
527.2
Including axially extending slot or hollow in platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 527. Subject matter
wherein the alteration is a narrow elongated groove in the
periphery of the platen*, or is a cavity in the platen, which
groove or cavity is parallel to the axis of rotation of the
platen.
Subclass:
528
Holder attached via detachable arms at ends of platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 525. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means is supported by the platen* by
way of members that are located at opposite extremities of
the platen, which members are removable from and replaceable
on the platen.
Subclass:
529
Holder attached via pins on holder or via adhesive
attachment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 525. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means is supported by the platen* by
way of projections on said retaining means that interfit into
depressions on or in the surface of the platen, or wherein
the retaining means is supported by the platen* by way of a
device that adheres said retaining means to the surface of
the platen.
Subclass:
530
Holder attached via element (e.g., band) gripping platen
periphery:
This subclass is indented under subclass 525. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means is supported by the platen* by
way of a member that has frictional (i.e., nonslidable)
contact with the circumferential surface of the platen, or
wherein said member extends around the entire circumference
of the platen.
Subclass:
531
Including line-spacing of holder or card:
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* card is moved by the retaining
means in a direction to feed the card in line-space*
distances to enable imprint of successive print-line* rows.
(1) Note. In this or indented subclasses the card may be
line-spaced by moving it together with its holder, or may be
line-spaced by moving the card relative to a stationary
holder.
Subclass:
532
Variable line spacing (e.g., platen creep):
This subclass is indented under subclass 531. Subject matter
wherein the distance that the retaining means moves between
successive print-line* rows is changed.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass sometimes has a
platen* moved with "platen creep", (i.e., increment of platen
rotation smaller than usual line-space* increment).
Subclass:
533
In a curvilinear path:
This subclass is indented under subclass 531. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means is moved with the record-medium*
card thereon along a line that is continuously bending and
without angles.
Subclass:
534
By pinion and rack:
This subclass is indented under subclass 531. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means is moved with the record-medium*
card thereon by way of two members, one member being a
toothed wheel or disc that is rotated and the other member
being a toothed, elongated bar that is connected to the
retaining means, and wherein the teeth of the two members
intermesh, whereby the rotation of the toothed wheel effects
movement of the toothed bar and the retaining means.
Subclass:
535
Including support engaging bottom edge of card:
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein the means for retaining the record-medium* cards
includes a member having an upwardly oriented surface, which
surface is used as a rest for the lowermost edge of a
vertically upstanding card.
Subclass:
536
Card holder mounted on typewriter frame:
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means is supported by a stationary
portion of the typewriter.
(1) Note. In this and indented subclasses the card holder
usually includes an element similar to a paper-finger* that
is closely adjacent to the surface of the platen* and that
tends to urge the record-medium* card toward the platen.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
543 for similar structure that is mounted on the carriage*
of the typewriter.
Subclass:
537
Including means enabling movement of card relative to
holder:
This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means includes a device that causes the
record-medium* card to be moved with respect to the retaining
means.
Subclass:
538
Transparent card holder:
This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a retaining means that
is made of a material through which light may pass, whereby a
typist is enabled to see the print-line* on the
record-medium* as the character* symbols are being
imprinted.
Subclass:
539
Including finger movable away from holding position:
This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means includes a member that tends to
urge the record-medium* card against the surface of the
platen*, which member may be moved away from the platen to a
location at which it does not urge the card to the platen.
Subclass:
540
Spring urged to holding position:
This subclass is indented under subclass 539. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means includes a yieldable element that
provides the force to urge the record-medium* card against
the surface of the platen*.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass sometimes is
provided with a second element that provides additional force
to urge the record-medium card against the surface of the
platen.
Subclass:
541
Including a feed-roller:
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means includes a feed-roller* that
cooperates with the platen* to feed a record-medium* card.
Subclass:
542
Card holder mounted on platen-carriage frame:
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means is supported on the structure
that also supports a carriage* that moves a platen* relative
to the typewriter.
(1) Note. The typewriter of this subclass includes a
feed-roller* shaft that supports the card holder, or the card
holder is supported on an element pivotable about an axis
located behind the platen.
Subclass:
543
Including gripper or means urging card against platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein the retaining means includes two members, each of
which members has a surface that faces the surface of the
other member, and wherein the surfaces are spaced apart a
distance corresponding to one of the dimensions of the
record-medium* card, whereby the card will fit between and be
held by the two surfaces, or wherein the retaining means
includes a member that tends to urge the record-medium card
against the surface of the platen*.
(1) Note. The urging of this subclass is usually mounted on
the carriage* of the typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
536 for similar structure that is mounted on the frame or a
fixed part of the typewriter.
Subclass:
544
Backing for stencil cutting (e.g., celluloid strip, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 521. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a retaining means that
holds a record-medium* card, or to a protecting means that
protects the platen* from damage by the impacting type-face*
elements while the typewriter is being used for cutting a
stencil.
(1) Note. As referred to herein, a "stencil" is a card or
sheet having a surface that is normally impervious to the
passage of ink* from one surface to the opposite surface.
However, when the stencil is impacted by a type-face element,
the surface is modified along the line that represents the
character* symbol corresponding to the type-face, the
modification being such as to permit ink to flow from one
surface to the opposite surface. The card or sheet that has
had its surface so modified is then usable in a "Mimeograph"
printing machine. (The term Mimeograph is a trademark.) The
operation of typing on the stencil material is known as
"cutting" the stencil.
Subclass:
545
FOR LINE-SPACING BY INCREMENTAL ROTATION OF PLATEN:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a typewriter is provided with a
cylindrical platen* and wherein significance is attributed to
the turning of said platen in step by step manner to effect
line-space* distances to a piece of record-medium* that is
held to and backed by said platen.
(1) Note. As discussed in the definition of "line-space" in
the Glossary, section III, line-space is usually effected in
units of one, two or three line-spaces, and sometimes
effected in half spaces (e.g., one-half, one and one-half or
two and one-half), but rarely more than three line-spaces in
any single unit of movement. In some typewriters provision
is made for multi-incremental line-spacing, which is the
rotation of a platen through increments greater than three
line-spaces, usually for the purpose of quickly moving a
sheet of record-medium out of the typewriter, or for the
purpose of effecting a line-space distance between the end of
one paragraph of text and the start of another paragraph,
which distance is greater than normal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
44 for line spacing of a flat platen.
Subclass:
546
To facilitate condensed-billing (i.e., by determining a
desired limit or amount of retrograde or advance platen
movement):
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a typewriter that is
capable of performing a condensed-billing* operation by
regulating the increments (i.e., the step by step turning
movements) of rotation of the platen* that cause the
record-medium* to move in a line-space* direction and
regulating increments of rotation of the platen that cause
the record-medium to move in a direction opposite to the
line-space direction.
(1) Note. As discussed in the Glossary, section III, the
term "condensed-billing" is used in the typewriter industry
to refer to an operation wherein one record-medium (e.g., a
bill or financial statement) contains information (e.g., an
address) and a second record-medium is to contain only a
summary of the information. The line-spacing mechanism of
this and indented subclasses facilitates the production of
the condensed-billing record.
Subclass:
547
Including stop structure (e.g., traveling stop, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 546. Subject matter
wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* is regulated
by the contact of one movable abutment with another
stationary abutment, one of said abutments being on or
connected to the platen and the other of said abutments being
on or connected to the typewriter frame, whereby the platen
rotation is positively halted by such contact.
Subclass:
547.1
For arresting platen at limit of both retrograde and advance
movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 547. Subject matter
wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* in a
direction that causes record-medium* movement in a
line-space* direction is halted by contact of a movable and a
stationary abutment, and wherein platen rotation in an
opposite direction is also halted by contact of a movable and
a stationary abutment.
(1) Note. Rotation of the platen in either direction may be
stopped by the same or different abutments.
Subclass:
547.2
By stop travelling in a rectilinear path:
This subclass is indented under subclass 547.1. Subject
matter wherein the movable abutment is displaced along a
straight line.
Subclass:
547.3
By lever or push-rod drive for platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 547.1. Subject
matter wherein the rotation of the platen* in both of said
directions is caused by a movable arm that is moved
to-and-fro with reciprocatory or oscillatory movement, the
movement of the arm in both directions being limited by
contact of said abutments to correspond the arm movement to a
desired degree of rotation of the platen in either
direction.
Subclass:
547.4
Via gear drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 547.3. Subject
matter wherein the movable arm is connected to the platen* by
way of intermeshed coacting rotatable toothed members.
Subclass:
547.5
Including lever on axis transverse to platen axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 547.4. Subject
matter wherein the platen* rotates about a first axis that
extends lengthwise thereof, and wherein said movable arm
oscillates about a second axis that extends at right angles
to said first axis.
Subclass:
547.6
Including relatively adjustable coaxial gear segments:
This subclass is indented under subclass 547.4. Subject
matter wherein the connection of the movable arm to the
platen* includes a rotatable toothed wheel coacting with an
assemblage of toothed members, which assemblage comprises a
plurality of toothed elements, each element being an arcuate
portion of a toothed wheel, the elements being disposed side
by side to rotate about a common axis and being
repositionable one with respect to the other(s) about the
common axis so as to vary the peripheral extent of the teeth
of the assemblage that coacts with the rotatable toothed
wheel, whereby the number of teeth of the assemblage that is
in mesh with the toothed wheel may be varied to vary the
platen rotation.
Subclass:
547.7
Via pawl and ratchet wheel drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 547.3. Subject
matter wherein the movable arm is connected to the platen* by
way of a pawl* joined to the movable arm and a ratchet* in
the form of a disc joined to the platen.
Subclass:
547.8
With spring motor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 547.7. Subject
matter wherein said ratchet* is joined to the platen* by way
of a resilient component, a portion of which component is
moved to tension the component, and another portion of which
component is moved by the tension in the component to rotate
the platen.
(1) Note. The spring motor of this subclass may be used to
rotate the platen in a direction to feed the record-medium*
(i.e., move it in line-space* direction) or to retract the
record-medium (i.e., move it in a direction opposite to
line-space direction).
Subclass:
548
With graduated scale (e.g., on drum periphery):
This subclass is indented under subclass 546. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a device that
facilitates the positioning of the condensed-billing*
record-medium*, which device includes a measuring instrument
calibrated in units that indicate the extent to which the
platen* should be rotated in either direction of its rotation
to correspond to the desired location of said record-medium.
(1) Note. The measuring instrument (i.e., scale) may be on
the circumference of a circular member or drum.
Subclass:
549
Actuated by key on key-board:
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with mechanism to effect
incremental rotation of the platen* in response to a
depression of a key* on the key-board* of the typewriter.
(1) Note. In most typewriters having a key-operated
line-space* mechanism the power to effect the line-spacing is
electrical power from an external source. A non-electric or
manual typewriter is usually provided with a line-space lever
that is powered by the hand of the typist.
Subclass:
550
For multi-incremental rotation (e.g., "platen sweep"):
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with mechanism to effect a
plurality of increments of rotation greater than three such
increments in one stroke of an actuating lever.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for mechanism to
facilitate rapid line-spacing* and is often termed "platen*
sweep" in the typewriter industry. It is used, for example,
to feed a record-medium* piece into position for typing the
first print-line* thereon after insertion of the piece into
the typewriter, or for spacing a greater than usual distance
between the last print-line of one paragraph and the first
print-line of a succeeding paragraph. The number of
platen-sweep increments are usually variable within a range
or, for example, four increments to about 18 increments or
more.
Subclass:
551
For line-spacing in forward or reverse direction:
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with mechanism for
effecting line-space* distances to a piece of record-medium*
in the usual direction of record-medium feed or in a
direction opposite to said usual direction.
Subclass:
552
With "floating" platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a platen* that is
supported in its typing position solely by platen-supporting
rollers underlying the platen, and wherein incremental
rotation of the platen is effected by incrementally rotating
said platen-supporting rollers that are in frictional contact
with the platen.
(1) Note. This form of platen support does not require
bearings and carriage* structure to support the ends of the
platen, thereby making it possible to type on a
record-medium* piece that is wider than the length of the
platen. For feeding of such a piece, see subclass 623.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
623 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
553
Via line-space/carriage-feed-release actuator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure on the
typewriter that performs the following operations
substantially concurrently: (a) the platen* is caused to be
turned through one or more increments, and (b) the carriage*
is enabled to be moved in a carriage-return direction
opposite to the character-space* direction, and (c) the
structure that normally engages a portion of the carriage to
move the carriage in the character-space direction is
temporarily disengaged, whereby the carriage-return movement
is made relatively quiet.
(1) Note. In the typewriter of this subclass the structure
is directed to means for line-spacing* which also, by some
connection to the carriage feed, effects release of the
carriage feed for purposes as stated in the definition. For
structure to cause carriage feed release, see subclasses 334+
above.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
334 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
554
For facilitating even wear of platen surface (e.g., by
irregular increments, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the movement or
adjustment of a platen* for the prevention of damage or
deterioration to the platen by reason of the repeated
impacting of type-face* elements on the same locations on the
surface of the platen.
(1) Note. Many of the disclosures of this subclass include
mechanisms for irregular line-spacing* to insure that
successive print-line* rows will not be impacted against the
same longitudinal paths of the platen, thus the longitudinal
depressions in the surface of the platen that would otherwise
be formed are distributed over the entire surface of the
platen.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
555 for structure to adjust the platen for irregular
increments.
Subclass:
555
By irregular increments of platen rotation (e.g., for
adjustment of platen relative to its actuator, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a first mechanism for
effecting normal increments of platen* rotation that
correspond to normal line-space* distances for the feeding of
record-medium* between successive print-line* rows, and
wherein significance is attributed to a second mechanism that
effects or enables rotation of the platen in other than
normal increments that correspond to other than normal
line-space distances for irregular feeding of record-medium.
(1) Note. The irregular platen rotation increment may
enable imprinting of successive print-lines that are spaced
apart by distances that are greater than or less than normal
line-space distances, or may enable imprint of subscript or
superscript character* symbols.
Subclass:
556
Including disconnecting ratchet wheel from platen (e.g.,
declutching ratchet, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter
wherein said first mechanism for effecting normal increments
of platen* rotation includes a ratchet* in the form of a disc
or wheel that is joined to or engaged with the platen, and
wherein said second mechanism for effecting other than normal
increments unjoins or disengages the ratchet from the platen,
thereby enabling rotation of the platen relative to its
ratchet.
Subclass:
556.1
Via relatively displaceable pin and slot members:
This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter
wherein the ratchet* wheel and the platen* (i.e., the two
components referred to below in this definition) are normally
joined or engaged by way of at least one projection on one of
said components that interfits with at least one aperture on
the other of said components, and wherein the unjoining or
disengaging occurs by moving the projection to disengage it
from the aperture.
Subclass:
556.2
Via toothed ring and locking member(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter
wherein the ratchet* wheel and the platen* (i.e., the two
components referred to below in this definition) are normally
joined or engaged by way of a first member on one of said
components and a second member on the other of said
components, which first member has notches extending along an
arc and which second member is a projection that interfits
with one of the notches in the first member, and wherein the
unjoining or disengaging occurs by moving the two said
members apart.
Subclass:
556.3
Including pivotable locking member(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 556.2. Subject
matter wherein said second member (i.e., the projection) is
mounted to swing to-and-fro about an axis, thus enabling the
projection to move in an arc of a circle.
Subclass:
556.4
Including radially displaceable locking member(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 556.2. Subject
matter wherein said second member (i.e., the projection) is
mounted to move along a line that is a radius of the arc
along which the notches of said first member extend.
Subclass:
557
Via ball or roller clutching member(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter
wherein the ratchet* wheel and the platen* (i.e., the two
components referred to below in this definition) are normally
joined or engaged by way of a spherical or cylindrical
member, the surface of which member frictionally engages a
surface of each of said two components, and wherein the
unjoining or disengaging occurs by moving the surface of the
member away from a surface of either or both components.
Subclass:
558
Via binding jaws gripping annular flange between jaws:
This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter
wherein the ratchet* wheel and the platen* (i.e., the two
components referred to below in this definition) are normally
joined or engaged by way of a first member which is on one of
said components and is a radially projecting rim or ring
having parallel radial faces on opposite sides of the rim,
and a second member which is on the other of said components
and includes two parts that straddle the rim of the first
member, the two parts of the second member being movable
toward each other with the rim therebetween to frictionally
engage the radial faces of the first member, and wherein the
unjoining or disengaging occurs by moving the parts of the
second member away from each other and the corresponding
radial faces of the first member.
Subclass:
559
Via friction plate members engageable by axial displacement
(e.g., pressure plate, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter
wherein the ratchet* wheel and the platen* (i.e., the two
components referred to below in this definition) are normally
joined or engaged by way of a first member connected to one
of the components and a second member connected to the other
of the components, both of which components and both of which
members are rotatable on a common axis, and wherein said
members are positioned one relative to the other so that a
substantially radial surface of one member faces a
substantially radial surface of the other member and one
member is movable relative to the other along the common
axis, whereby movement of one member toward the other into
nonslidable contact with the other effects joining or
engagement of the members and of the components connected
thereto for normal incremental rotation of the platen by the
ratchet*, and movement of one member away from the other
effects unjoining or disengagement of the members.
Subclass:
559.1
Friction members have cooperating conical surfaces:
This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter
wherein the substantially radial surface of each of said
members is modified so that the surface of one member is like
the exterior surface of a cone and the surface of the other
member is like the interior surface of a cone, the facing
surfaces of the members corresponding one to the other.
Subclass:
560
Via frictional engagement of periphery of cylindrical
member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 556. Subject matter
wherein the ratchet* wheel and the platen* (i.e., the two
components referred to below in this definition) are normally
joined or engaged by way of a first member connected to one
of the components and a second member connected to the other
of the components, which first member has a cylindrical
circumferential surface and which second member has a surface
that is movable toward the circumferential surface to be in
nonslidable contact therewith for normal incremental rotation
of the platen, and wherein the second member is movable away
from the circumferential surface for unjoining or disengaging
the members.
Subclass:
560.1
Friction member(s) acting on inner periphery of drum:
This subclass is indented under subclass 560. Subject matter
wherein said first member is hollow and has an interior
circumferential surface and said second member contacts said
interior surface for joining or engaging the components or
moves away from the interior surface for unjoining or
disengaging the components.
Subclass:
560.2
Pivotable member(s):
This subclass is indented under subclass 560.1. Subject
matter wherein said second member is movable toward and away
from the interior surface in a path that is an arc of a
circle about an axis, the axis being a fixed or movable
axis.
Subclass:
561
Expandable band or split ring:
This subclass is indented under subclass 560.1. Subject
matter wherein said second member is a circular or coiled
element having a periphery that may be enlarged to conform to
or mate with the interior surface of said first member to
make nonslidable contact therewith, or may be diminished to
unjoin or disengage the members.
Subclass:
562
Including settable stops:
This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter
wherein said second mechanism includes means for rotating the
platen* and two or more abutments, a first of which abutments
is stationary relative to the platen and a second of which
abutments is connected to the platen so that as the platen
rotates the second abutment will move toward the first
abutment until contact of the abutments is made and platen
rotation will cease, and wherein the distance between the
abutments prior to platen rotation may be varied.
Subclass:
563
Including plural detents selectively engageable with ratchet
wheel:
This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter
wherein said first mechanism includes a first ratchet* in the
form of a disc or wheel having teeth protruding from a
peripheral edge thereof and notches between the teeth, and
also includes a first arm having a protrusion that meshes
with one of the notches in the ratchet disc to restrain
rotation of the disc, and wherein said second mechanism
includes a second arm having a protrusion that meshes either
with notches in the first ratchet disc or with notches in a
second ratchet disc, and wherein the first arm is used for
normal incremental rotation of the platen* or the second arm
is used for other than normal rotation of the platen.
(1) Note. In the device defined above, if one ratchet wheel
is used with two detents that are alternately engaged with
the ratchet wheel, the space between the detents in the
circumferential dimension of the ratchet wheel is such as to
provide irregular increments of detented ratchet-wheel
position. If two ratchet wheels are used with two detents,
one of the ratchet wheels is provided with teeth having a
circumferential spacing different from the other, and one
detent is used with one of the ratchet wheels for normal
incremental rotation, and the other detent is used with the
other ratchet wheel for other than normal incremental
rotation.
Subclass:
564
Including a drive member engageable with line-space ratchet
wheel:
This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter
wherein said first mechanism for effecting normal increments
of platen* rotation includes a ratchet* disc having teeth and
notches on the peripheral edge thereof and being connected to
the platen, a first pawl* that engages in one of the notches
between the teeth and moves to rotate the platen
incrementally, and a detent (i.e., an arm having a protrusion
that meshes with one of the notches to restrain rotation at
the incremental position), and wherein said second mechanism
for effecting other than normal increments includes either
(a) a second pawl that engages in one of the notches of the
ratchet and moves to rotate the platen to the extent of a
partial increment, or (b) and additional means to move said
first pawl to the extent of a partial increment.
Subclass:
564.1
Via displaceable detent:
This subclass is indented under subclass 564. Subject matter
wherein said second mechanism includes means to move said
detent (i.e., of said first mechanism) while it is in mesh
with one of the notches of said ratchet* disc in an arcuate
path to the extent of a partial increment, thereby rotating
the platen* to a similar extent.
Subclass:
565
Detent-release structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter
wherein said first mechanism for effecting normal increments
of platen* rotation includes a ratchet* disc having teeth and
notches on the peripheral edge thereof and being connected to
the platen, a pawl* that engages in one of the notches
between the teeth and moves to rotate the platen
incrementally, and a detent (i.e., and arm having a
protrusion that meshes with one of the notches to restrain
rotation at the incremental position), and wherein said
second mechanism includes means for moving the protrusion of
said detent out of mesh with any of the notches, and wherein
significance is attributed to structure that effects or
enables the movement of the detent.
Subclass:
566
With friction brake for platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 565. Subject matter
wherein said second mechanism also includes means for
restraining rotation of the platen* while the detent is out
of mesh with the notches of the ratchet* disc, which means
includes a first surface on or connected to the platen and a
second surface nonrotatably associated with the platen and
relatively movable into nonslidable contact with the first
surface to prevent platen rotation.
Subclass:
566.1
With simultaneous disengagement of drive pawl:
This subclass is indented under subclass 565. Subject matter
wherein said second mechanism also includes means to move
said pawl* (i.e., of said first mechanism) out of contact or
engagement with any of the notches of the ratchet* disc at
the same time that said detent (i.e., of said first
mechanism) is out of mesh with any of the notches in the
ratchet disc.
Subclass:
567
Including gear (e.g., differential gear, etc.) structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter
wherein said second mechanism includes at least two
intermeshing and coacting toothed members that connect said
first mechanism with the platen*.
(1) Note. Usually the gear drive, for example, a
differential drive or a planetary gear arrangement, is used
to connect the platen ratchet* wheel and the platen so as to
provide for adjustment of the platen relative to the ratchet
wheel.
Subclass:
568
By electric-power drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the incremental rotation (i.e., step-by-step turning)
of the platen* is accomplished with the help of force derived
from electrical energy.
(1) Note. The forms of electrical power used include: an
electromagnet, a stepping motor (i.e., an electric motor
operated incrementally), a rotating electric motor, etc., the
named devices being only exemplary of those that may be
used.
Subclass:
569
By gear train (e.g., including a clutch):
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* is
accomplished by way of a plurality of toothed members, the
teeth of which members intermesh to cause movement of one
member when another member is moved, one of said members
being connected to the platen.
(1) Note. Included in this subclass are disclosures in
which a differential gear train or a planetary gear train is
used, or in which a clutch device is used to connect a gear
train to the platen.
Subclass:
570
By double-cam drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* is
accomplished by way of an element or an assemblage of
elements, which element or assemblage is moved to-and-fro by
two cam surfaces that act together on the same rotating
member, and which element or assemblage is connected to the
platen.
(1) Note. A "cam surface" is defined as the edge periphery
of a disc that rotates about an axis, the radial distance
from the axis to the periphery varying around the periphery.
As the disc rotates, the distance of a follower that is in
contact with the periphery will increase and decrease
relative to the axis of the disc, thus the rotation of the
disc will substantially effect radial movement of the
follower. The cam surfaces may be on separate disc elements
or may be on a single member having separate cam surfaces.
Subclass:
571
By friction drive (e.g., including regulation of
increments):
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* is
accomplished by way of two members, each member having a
surface in nonsliding contact with the other, one of which
members is connected to the platen and the other of which
members is connected to an actuator that is moved when platen
rotation is desired.
(1) Note. In some typewriters of this subclass a
predetermined extent of movement of the actuator effects a
predetermined number of degrees of rotation of the platen,
which number of degrees comprises a predetermined number of
steps or increments of platen rotation, and the number of
such steps effected by any movement of the actuator may be
changed from one predetermined number of steps to a different
predetermined number of steps, whereby a change may be made
in the number of degrees of platen rotation that is
accomplished by an extent of actuator movement. The change
may be accomplished by changing the amount of actuator
movement, or by changing the range of actuator movement over
which the actuator is effective to cause platen rotation.
Subclass:
572
By pawl and ratchet wheel drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the incremental rotation of the platen* is
accomplished by way of a ratchet* disc connected to the
platen that is intermittently rotated step-by-step by a pawl*
that is moved by an actuator when platen rotation is
desired.
Subclass:
573
Including rectilinearly movable pawl:
This subclass is indented under subclass 572. Subject matter
wherein the pawl* is moved to-and-fro by an actuator along a
straight line to contact and rotate the ratchet*
incrementally.
Subclass:
573.1
And resilient drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 573. Subject matter
wherein the actuator is connected to the pawl* or to the
ratchet* by way of a yieldable connection that enables a
different extent of actuator movement than is imparted to the
pawl by the actuator.
Subclass:
574
Including pawl carrier coaxial with ratchet wheel:
This subclass is indented under subclass 572. Subject matter
wherein the platen* is incrementally rotated about an axis
that extends lengthwise of the platen, and the ratchet* disc
is connected to the platen to rotate about the same axis, and
wherein said actuator effects to-and-fro oscillation of a
member about said axis, said pawl* being mounted on said
member for corresponding oscillation of the pawl so that the
pawl engages a notch of the ratchet disc at a first location
relative to the typewriter and moves the ratchet and the
platen through a first predetermined number of degrees of
platen rotation.
Subclass:
574.1
And means to regulate pawl engagement or drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 574. Subject matter
wherein a predetermined extent of movement of the actuator
effects a predetermined extent of movement of said member and
the pawl* mounted thereon to move the ratchet* disc and the
platen* connected thereto through a first predetermined
number of degrees of platen rotation that correspond to a
first predetermined number of steps of platen incremental
movement, and wherein the number of steps effected by a
movement of the actuator may be changed by changing the
location at which said pawl engages a notch of said ratchet
disc to a second location relative to the typewriter so that
a second predetermined number of degrees of rotation of the
platen will be caused, that will correspond to a second
predetermined number of steps of platen incremental
movement.
Subclass:
575
Including means to regulate pawl engagement or drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 572. Subject matter
wherein a predetermined extent of movement of the actuator
effects movement of the pawl* to engage a notch in the
ratchet* disc at a first location relative to the typewriter
and moves the ratchet and the platen* through a first
predetermined number of degrees of platen rotation that
correspond to a first predetermined number of steps of platen
incremental movement, and wherein the number of steps
effected by movement of the actuator may be changed so that a
second predetermined number of degrees of platen rotation
will be caused that will correspond to a second predetermined
number of steps of platen incremental movement.
Subclass:
575.1
By movable ratchet-wheel shield:
This subclass is indented under subclass 575. Subject matter
wherein the change in the number of steps effected by
movement of the actuator is caused by an element having a
surface with which the pawl* or a portion connected thereto
is in contact until the pawl is moved to said first location,
which element is movable so that the pawl is in contact with
the surface until the pawl is moved to a second location, at
which second location the pawl will engage a notch in the
ratchet* disc to effect a second predetermined number of
steps of platen incremental movement.
Subclass:
575.2
By stop adjustable to limit movement of actuator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 575. Subject matter
wherein the extent of movement of the actuator is
predetermined by an abutment that is contacted by the
actuator at the end of its movement, and wherein the change
in the number of steps effected by movement of the actuator
is caused by changing the position of the abutment relative
to the actuator.
Subclass:
576
Via foldable line-space actuator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to an actuator for
effecting the step-by-step increments of platen* rotation,
which actuator includes an elongated bar that is moved by the
hand of a typist when incremental platen rotation is desired,
the bar being formed of at least two pieces hinged together
so that the bar may be extended to the length of the pieces
or may be doubled, one alongside another, to occupy a lesser
length, or the bar being hinged at its mounting so that the
bar may be placed into operative position or placed into an
inoperative position where it may be stored in a compact
relationship with the typewriter.
Subclass:
577
With means to prevent reverse rotation or ensure full
increment (e.g., for "backlash" prevention):
This subclass is indented under subclass 545. Subject matter
wherein the platen* normally rotates incrementally in a first
direction, and wherein significance is attributed to a device
that stops the platen from rotating in a direction opposite
to said first direction, or wherein significance is
attributed to a means for making sure that each step of
platen rotation is a complete step.
Subclass:
578
SHEET OR WEB (E.G., RECORD-MEDIUM) FEEDING MECHANISM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to movement
of a record-medium* relative to a typewriter, which relative
movement is necessary for typing a print-line* and occurs in
a direction generally coinciding with the direction in which
line-space* movement occurs, or wherein significance is
attributed to structure which facilitates, or contributes to,
or enables said record- medium movement.
(1) Note. For a discussion of the difference between
line-space movement and record-medium movement, see the
definition of line-space in the Glossary, section III, and
for a discussion of the difference between a sheet and a web,
see the definition of record-medium, also in the Glossary.
(2) Note. This and indented subclasses relate to the
feeding of a sheet or web from a supply to the typewriter, or
to the movement within the typewriter for line-space or
similar purposes, or to the delivery of a sheet or web from
the typewriter to a receiver of the sheet or web. To be
properly placed as an original patent into this or the
indented subclasses, the claimed disclosure of such patent
should describe the typewriter by more than its name.
(3) Note. Typewriters of this subclass include such
structures as: a stationary sheet table or apron*, a
conformation that prevents a sheet having an irregularity or
hole thereon from being torn at the hole as the sheet moves
through the typewriter, or a typewriter with plural
stationary tables or an auxiliary support.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
226, Advancing Material of Indeterminate Length, appropriate
subclasses for feeding of web material.
271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering, appropriate subclasses for
feeding or delivering of sheet material.
Subclass:
579
Including skew correction responsive to position of sheet or
web:
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein a piece of record-medium* is intended to be moved in
a direction parallel to one of the side edges of the piece,
the movement being caused by a record-medium feed means, and
wherein the action of said feed means is regulated so that if
there is a tendency for the record-medium to move sidewise or
other than in the intended direction, the feed means will be
adjusted to overcome the tendency, the adjustment being made
as a result of a sensing of the tendency toward sidewise
movement.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
619 for a means for positioning the side edge of a web.
Subclass:
580
Including forming indicia on record-medium during typing to
find next line to be typed:
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to (a) the imprinting or
formation of a mark on the record-medium* while a print-line*
is being typed thereon, and (b) the use of said mark during a
subsequent reinsertion of the record-medium into the
typewriter, the mark effecting the stopping of the feed of
the reinserted record-medium in a position proper for the
imprinting of a new print-line.
(1) Note. In the typewriter of this and indented
subclasses, a typist will usually type one print-line of
text, remove the record-medium from the typewriter, and then
will reinsert the record-medium to continue the typing of one
(or more) print-lines. Each occasion for removal and
reinsertion of the record-medium will be reason to imprint or
form a mark which will subsequently be used to stop the feed
of the record-medium when the record-medium has been fed to
the position where a new print-line is to be typed.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
583.3 for a programmed-control-system* wherein indicia on
the record-medium are part of the program to control the
feeding of the record-medium.
Subclass:
581
To find last-produced slit or hole or notch in sheet:
This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* is in sheet form and said mark on
the sheet is formed thereon by (a) piercing the sheet without
removing material therefrom, or by (b) perforating the sheet
through both opposite surfaces thereof, or by (c) cutting out
a portion of the edge of the sheet, and wherein any of the
marks described is made concurrently with the typing of the
print-line* that is to be used as a reference location of a
new print-line that the typist wishes to type.
Subclass:
582
Including programmed-control-system for record-medium feed
(e.g., on auxiliary record):
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein a programmed-control-system* is used for giving
instructions to which the typewriter responds in moving a
record-medium* in a direction coinciding with the direction
in which line-space* movement occurs.
(1) Note. In this subclass the record-medium is in the form
of a sheet of determinate length and width.
Subclass:
583
For web record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 582. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* is a piece of material having
indeterminate length.
Subclass:
583.1
Program on auxiliary-record tape:
This subclass is indented under subclass 583. Subject matter
wherein the instructions are on an elongated, relatively
narrow strip of material that is supplementary to the
record-medium*.
Subclass:
583.2
Program is indicia on rotatable disc or drum:
This subclass is indented under subclass 583. Subject matter
wherein the instructions are markings or openings or
projections in or on a platelike or cylindrical member that
turns about its own axis.
(1) Note. The markings or indicia may be magnetically or
electrically conductive strips applied to the plate or
cylinder in a particular pattern, or may be openings arranged
to pass light to a photocell in a particular pattern.
Subclass:
583.3
Program is indicia on record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 583. Subject matter
wherein the instructions are markings or openings on the
record-medium* itself.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
580 for a typewriter wherein markings on the record-medium
control feed of the record-medium to the next print-line* to
be typed.
Subclass:
583.4
Including plural speed record-medium feed:
This subclass is indented under subclass 583. Subject matter
wherein provision is made for moving the record-medium* at
one velocity or at a different velocity.
Subclass:
584
Including feed of plural record-media arranged side-by-side
(e.g., fed independently of platen):
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein movement of at least two record-medium* pieces
occurs, and wherein the pieces are placed so that a side edge
of one piece is adjacent to an opposite side edge of another
piece, or wherein one of the record-medium pieces is moved by
structure other than the platen*.
(1) Note. In many typewriters the record-medium material is
partially wrapped around a cylindrical platen so it does not
lie in a plane, but the arrangement of the sheets in the
patents of this and indented subclasses is such that if the
record-medium material did lie in a plane, the plural pieces
would lie in the same plane to be side by side.
(2) Note. In some typewriters a platen effects line-space*
movement of one of the record-medium pieces and a
feed-roller* couple that is spaced from the platen along the
line of movement effects line-space movement of the other
record-medium piece.
Subclass:
585
By divided platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 584. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with at least two platen*
elements for supporting or backing a corresponding number of
record-medium* pieces, which platen elements are coaxial one
with the other(s).
(1) Note. In this subclass the platens are coaxial but
mounted on the same typewriter carriage* so that two pieces
or record-medium may be independently moved in the same
typewriter. See the patents of subclass 82 above for a
typewriter having two or more separate and independently
mounted platens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
82 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
585.1
With positive clutch for simultaneous rotation of platen
sections:
This subclass is indented under subclass 585. Subject matter
wherein the plurality of platen* elements are connected one
with the other(s) by means that enables one to be
disconnected from the other(s) or enables one to be connected
to the other(s) whereby all the elements may turn at the same
time.
(1) Note. This subclass also provides for a typewriter
wherein the plural platen sections may be turned at different
rotational speeds.
Subclass:
586
Including feed of tally strip record-medium (e.g., plural
tally strips):
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the movement of a tally
strip relative to the typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "tally strip" is a typewriter industry
or "art" term for an elongated, relatively narrow piece of
record-medium* that is used in a typewriter in addition to
the record-medium ordinarily used. The tally strip is fed
separately from the ordinary record-medium and is used to
record thereon a summation of information. On a tally strip
information that can be recorded includes for example, the
sum of a column of numbers, a number representing the total
items shipped during a particular day, a listing of bills of
lading for a particular period of time, words identifying a
particular document, and similar subject matter summarizing
activities recorded by a typist using the typewriter. Due to
the dimensions of a tally strip, it is handled in a
typewriter (often an accounting machine) in a manner that is
different from the way ordinary record-medium is handled.
Disclosures for this and indented subclasses are
distinguished in that the handling of one or more tally
strips is significant.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
43 for a flat-platen* typewriter for typing on a tally
strip.
Subclass:
587
And feed of endless transfer-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter
wherein a transfer-medium* is also moved relative to the
typewriter, which transfer-medium is in the form of a
closed-loop band, and is for use with a tally strip.
Subclass:
588
On plural-platen (e.g., divided platen) typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with at least two platen*
elements.
(1) Note. The plural platens may be in the form of a
divided platen for side by side record media as in subclass
585 above, or may be separate platens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
585 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
589
With locking or interlocking mechanism (e.g., line lock,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with locking mechanism or
with interlocking mechanism.
(1) Note. The terms "locking" mechanism and "interlocking"
mechanism are defined and discussed in the definition and
notes of subclass 663 below.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
663 for other locking or interlocking mechanism.
Subclass:
590
Including feed varied for amount of tally strip on spool:
This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter
wherein the tally strip is an elongated tape wound onto a
reel and wherein the distance that the tally strip is moved
for feeding thereof is dependent upon the diameter of the
wound reel of tally strip.
(1) Note. In this subclass the feed of the tally strip is
adjusted in accordance with the change in diameter of the
tally-strip spool so that the line-space* distances between
print-lines* on the tally strip will remain constant.
Subclass:
591
Including tally-strip feed transverse to feed of main
record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter
wherein the direction of movement of the tally strip is in a
direction that is perpendicular to the direction of movement
of the primary-record-medium* in the typewriter.
Subclass:
592
Including feed independent of platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the tally strip relative to the
typewriter is effected by a mechanism other than the platen*
of the typewriter.
Subclass:
593
With cutting or spring tensioning of tally strip:
This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means for severing a
portion of the tally strip from the supply of tally strip, or
wherein the tally strip is tautened during its movement by a
yieldable element contacting the tally strip, or wherein the
tally strip is wound on a supply spool or a takeup spool and
the tally strip is tautened by a yieldable element
cooperating with either of said spools.
Subclass:
594
Including structure or mounting or adjustment of tally-strip
roll:
This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a wound reel of
tally-strip material, or to a support for a wound reel of
tally-strip material, or wherein the typewriter is provided
with a carriage* that supports a platen*, and wherein the
support for the wound reel of tally-strip material is carried
by the typewriter or by a typewriter portion other than the
carriage, or wherein the support for the wound reel of
tally-strip material is provided with means for varying the
position of the wound reel relative to the typewriter.
Subclass:
594.1
And roll for transfer-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 594. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is also provided with a wound reel of
transfer-medium* material and a support for the wound reel of
tally-strip material.
Subclass:
595
Including insertion of sheet from front of platen (e.g., for
"condensed-billing", via sheet guide, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein movement of a record-medium* sheet occurs, and
wherein a sheet is fed into the typewriter by guiding the
leading edge of a sheet directly between the platen* and the
print-point* via structure that is positioned between the
platen and the typist.
(1) Note. This mode of inserting the sheet is usually for
the purpose of facilitating a condensed-billing*-typing
operation.
(2) Note. In some typewriters insertion via the front of
the platen is facilitated by moving the platen rearwardly to
form a larger throat. Subclass 649, which relates to platen
movement, should be considered.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
515 for insertion of "carbon paper" from front of platen.
Subclass:
596
Including feed responsive to presence of sheet:
This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the record-medium* sheet occurs as a
result of inserting the sheet into the typewriter to a
predetermined point in the typewriter.
(1) Note. The insertion of the sheet is usually manual, by
the typist manually guiding the sheet to the platen*, and the
feed of the sheet subsequent to insertion thereof is usually
typewriter actuated, by a motorized mechanism that is
responsive to a control initiated by the sheet insertion.
Subclass:
597
With subsequent line-spacing independent of platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter
wherein movement of a record-medium* sheet occurs in a
line-space* direction, said movement being caused by
mechanism other than the platen* of the typewriter.
Subclass:
598
With digitally selected, typewriter-actuated feed to selected
line to be typed (e.g., via "dialing disc", etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a mechanism that
causes movement of the record-medium* sheet for any of a
plurality of determinate distances to a determinate position
relative to the typewriter, the position being that at which
the typist desires to imprint a print-line*, which mechanism
includes a movable component (or components) bearing indicia
thereon representing said distances, which component is moved
by the typist in accordance with the desired distance, the
movement of the component effecting the movement of the sheet
to the determinate position.
(1) Note. The component is similar to a telephone dial in
appearance, and is moved in a similar manner (i.e., by the
typist's finger) to cause the typewriter to move the sheet.
Subclass:
599
Insertion of sheet relative to other record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter
wherein said record-medium* sheet is fed into the typewriter
and into relationship with another record-medium.
Subclass:
599.1
With sheet associating attachment (e.g., collating-table,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 599. Subject matter
wherein a support fixed to the typewriter is used to bring
the record-medium* sheet into relationship with the other
record-medium.
(1) Note. A collating-table* is usually the device that
facilitates the association of the two record-medium pieces.
Subclass:
600
Via feed throat having gate (e.g. actuated by power, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter
wherein a record-medium* sheet is led into the typewriter by
way of a passageway that includes a movable barrier, which
barrier may be positioned so that it prevents movement of the
sheet or may be positioned so that it enables movement of the
sheet into the typewriter.
(1) Note. In this subclass the "gate" is opened and closed
by a power-actuated means.
Subclass:
600.1
With platen repositioned for sheet insertion:
This subclass is indented under subclass 600. Subject matter
wherein the platen* of the typewriter is movable to a
position at which it enables movement of the record-medium*
sheet into contact with the platen.
(1) Note. In this subclass the platen together with a
feed-roller* effectively form a "gate" in the feed throat
that prevents insertion of the record-medium when the platen
and feed-roller are engaged. In this condition the leading
edge of the record-medium is stopped at the platen. The
repositioning of the platen away from the feed-roller
effectively opens the gate so that the record-medium can be
fully inserted into the throat, usually until the leading
edge of the record-medium engages a stop. The throat is then
closed by moving the platen back into engagement with the
feed-roller, the record-medium being located therebetween.
At this time the record medium is properly located relative
to the intended print-line* and may be moved in line-space*
direction by rotation of the platen and the feed-roller.
Subclass:
600.2
With feed-roller repositioned for sheet insertion:
This subclass is indented under subclass 600. Subject matter
wherein the platen* cooperates with a feed-roller* to feed a
record-medium* sheet, which feed-roller is movable to a
position at which it enables movement of the sheet into
proper location relative to the platen.
(1) Note. In this subclass the "gate" is opened by moving
the feed-roller away from the platen.
Subclass:
600.3
And sheet feed by additional feed-roller couple:
This subclass is indented under subclass 600.2. Subject
matter wherein feed movement of a record-medium* sheet is
assisted by a feed-roller*, cooperating with another feed
roller, the two cooperating feed-rollers forming a roller
couple that is added to the feed-roller of subclass 600.2.
Subclass:
600.4
Coincident to pivoting of sheet guide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 600.2. Subject
matter wherein a record-medium* sheet is led into the
typewriter by way of a passageway that is movable in an arc,
and wherein the movement of the passageway is concurrent with
the movement of said feed-roller.
(1) Note. The passageway (i.e., "sheet guide") of this
subclass (600.4) may be separate from the passageway (i.e.,
"feed throat") of subclass 600 or may be an extension of the
feed-throat passageway.
Subclass:
601
With laterally movable sheet holder (e.g., having concurrent
feed movement):
This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter
wherein a record-medium* sheet is carried or supported for
feeding movement by a guide member, which member is movable
in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction
of sheet feed, or wherein the guide member is also movable
with the sheet in a sheet-feeding direction, such movement
occurring at the same time as the perpendicular movement.
Subclass:
602
With sheet ejector:
This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is also provided with means to remove
a record-medium* sheet from the typewriter.
Subclass:
603
Via chute(s) or feed-roller couple (e.g., plural chutes):
This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter
wherein a record-medium* is led into the typewriter by way of
a member that extends in the direction of sheet feed and at
least partly surrounds the width and thickness dimensions of
the sheet, or wherein feed movement of a record-medium sheet
is caused by a feed-roller* cooperating with another
feed-roller, the two cooperating feed-rollers forming a
roller couple.
(1) Note. Two or more of such members may be provided, or
each of said members may have its position relative to the
typewriter changed in a direction substantially perpendicular
to the direction of sheet feed.
(2) Note. The member (i.e., chute) may guide the leading
edge of a record-medium* sheet to the rear of the platen*
(i.e., a position relative to the platen that is
diametrically opposite to the print-point* of the platen).
Subclass:
603.1
Pivotable chute:
This subclass is indented under subclass 603. Subject matter
wherein said member is mounted to be oscillatable in an arc.
Subclass:
604
Attachment to typewriter for converting to condensed-billing
operation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 595. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a structure that may be
affixed to or removed from a typewriter, which structure
enables the typewriter to be used for condensed-billing* if
so desired by a typist.
Subclass:
605
For feeding plural record-media concurrently or selectively:
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means associated with a
typewriter for moving two or more record-medium* pieces,
either all of the pieces at the same time or one of the
pieces relative to the other(s) in a manner as desired by a
typist or other operator.
(1) Note. The record media to be moved may include, for
example, plural webs, or plural sheets, or an assemblage of
sheet and web material. Transfer-medium* (e.g., "carbon"
paper) may also be included within the assemblage of material
to be fed, but if significance is attributed to the function*
of the transfer-medium, a search for disclosures thereof
should include subclasses 497+.
(2) Note. This subclass also includes a device for keeping
one of the record-medium pieces separate from the other(s) as
the pieces are fed through the typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
497 for feeding of "manifold sets" and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
606
Plural webs superimposed and aligned to each other during
typing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter
wherein two or more webs or record-medium* are positioned in
a surface-to-surface relationship (i.e., a top surface of one
web adjacent to a bottom surface of another web) and the webs
are further positioned so that their corresponding side edges
are located adjacent to one another or so that a particular
indicium that occurs along the length dimension of one web is
located adjacent to a corresponding indicium that occurs
along the length dimension of another web that is in a
surface-to-surface relationship therewith.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
42 for aligning and feeding of plural webs in a flat-platen*
typewriter.
Subclass:
607
Including movement of one record-medium relative to another:
This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the movement of a sheet
or web of record-medium* with respect to a second sheet or
web of record-medium.
Subclass:
607.1
In lateral direction (e.g., lateral shift of web or sheet
carrier):
This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter
wherein the movement of the sheet or web is in a direction
substantially perpendicular to the line-space* direction in
which feed occurs.
(1) Note. The movement described above is usually for the
purpose of aligning one sheet or web with respect to
another.
Subclass:
607.2
By insertion of additional record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter
wherein one sheet or web of record-medium* is fed into the
typewriter by guiding the leading edge of the sheet or web to
a position relative to the platen* of the typewriter that is
diametrically opposite to the print-point* of the platen.
Subclass:
607.3
With concurrent feed-roller and line-spacing control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter includes a feed-roller* cooperating
with a platen* to feed two record-medium* pieces of material,
one of which pieces is intended to remain in the typewriter
while the other piece of material is removed, and wherein, to
aid in the removal of the other piece, the feed-roller is
moved out of cooperation with the platen (i.e., away from the
platen) while at the same time the piece remaining in the
typewriter is moved a line-space* distance.
(1) Note. The record-medium that is removed could be a bill
or financial statement, whereas the record-medium that
remains in the typewriter could be a tally strip.
Subclass:
608
With clamp for holding one record-medium stationary:
This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter
wherein the relative movement of one sheet or web of
record-medium* with respect to a second sheet or web of
record-medium is caused by firmly gripping one of the sheets
or webs to restrain its movement while the other sheet or web
is moved.
Subclass:
608.1
Selectively engageable feed-rollers or feed-roller brakes:
This subclass is indented under subclass 608. Subject matter
wherein the sheet or web record-medium* that is to be
restrained is firmly gripped by a member that is normally a
feed-roller*, or wherein the feed-roller is prevented from
rotating.
(1) Note. Normally a feed-roller cooperates with a platen*
so that incremental rotation of the platen causes feed of the
record-medium because the feed-roller presses the
record-medium against the platen. However, if the platen does
not rotate and the feed-roller presses the record-medium
against the stationary platen, the record-medium will also
remain stationary. In this subclass the record-medium is
firmly gripped between the feed-roller and the stationary
platen to restrain movement of the record-medium, or the
record-medium is firmly gripped between a stationary platen
and a stationary feed-roller to restrain movement of the
record-medium.
Subclass:
608.2
By auxiliary feed-roller or platen section (e.g., separate
feed of sheets):
This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter
wherein the feed movement of one sheet or web of
record-medium* is effected with the aid of one feed-roller*
and the feed movement of another sheet or web or
record-medium is effected with the aid of a second
feed-roller, or wherein each feed-roller urges a separate
sheet or web record-medium against a separate platen*.
(1) Note. In this subclass one feed-roller may cooperate
with a platen and the second feed-roller cooperates with
another feed-roller forming a feed-roller couple, or the
separate platens may be coaxial.
Subclass:
608.3
By retrograde movement of one record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter
wherein the relative movement of one sheet or web of
record-medium* with respect to a second sheet or web of
record-medium is caused by reversing the usual feed direction
of one of the sheets or webs in a direction opposite to the
usual line-space* direction.
Subclass:
608.4
Including differential movement by separate drive means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 607. Subject matter
wherein each of the sheets or webs of record-medium* is moved
at a different rate of speed, the movement being effected by
different feed means.
Subclass:
609
Mount for plural web rolls:
This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter
wherein the pieces of record-medium* are in the form of web
material (i.e., each is a piece of material of indeterminate
length), and each web is a spirally convoluted roll, and
wherein each spirally convoluted roll is supported on an axis
associated with the typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
613 for a mount for a single web roll.
Subclass:
610
Including sheet-associating attachment (e.g.,
pin-band-encircling platen):
This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure which
facilitates or contributes to the movement of two or more
sheets or webs of record-medium*, which structure includes
means whereby one sheet or web is enabled to be positioned
with respect to another sheet or web in a particular location
relative to the typewriter so that both sheets or webs will
be moved into or out of the typewriter as desired by a typist
or other operator.
(1) Note. Included herein is a typewriter having a rear
collating-table* with clamps or an indicator.
Subclass:
610.1
With table or frame (e.g., collating-table):
This subclass is indented under subclass 610. Subject matter
wherein the means for positioning the sheets or webs of
record-medium* includes a platform attached to the typewriter
and closely adjacent to the platen*, on which platform the
sheets or webs are assembled prior to insertion of the
assemblage into the typewriter.
(1) Note. The platform is usually a collating-table* and
usually includes means to align the front edges of the
sheets.
Subclass:
610.2
Front collating-table with sheet-holding means (e.g.,
clamps):
This subclass is indented under subclass 610.1. Subject
matter wherein the platform includes a collating-table* that
is located on the typewriter so as to lead the assembled
sheets or webs of record-medium* to a position adjacent to
the print-point* of the platen*, and also includes means to
temporarily secure the assembled sheets or webs to the
platform.
Subclass:
610.3
Including pin-holding means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 610.2. Subject
matter wherein the securing means includes an element that
has a relatively slender, elongated configuration, one end of
which engages the sheets or webs of record-medium*.
Subclass:
610.4
Including indicator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 610.2. Subject
matter wherein the platform includes a marking or sign to
show the positioning of the sheets or webs of record-medium*
relative to the platform.
Subclass:
611
For feeding web record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means associated with a
typewriter for moving a web of record-medium* relative to the
typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "web" is discussed in the definition of
"record-medium", in the Glossary, section III.
(2) Note. The movement of the web in this and indented
subclasses is that which causes the web to enter or exit the
typewriter, or to move in a line-space* direction or to move
relative to a moving carriage*. Movement of the web (or any
record-medium) by and with a moving carriage will be found in
subclasses relating to the carriage, subclasses 283+.
(3) Note. The typewriter of this subclass may have a
magnetic clutch drive for effecting web feed.
Subclass:
612
Feeding web or sheet in perpendicular directions:
This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the movement of a piece
of web material (or of a piece of sheet material)
record-medium* in either (a) a line-space* direction, or (b)
a character-space* direction, the two directions being
transversely related to each other, and the movement in
either direction being caused by means other than a moving
platen*.
(1) Note. The two directions noted above are referred to in
the typewriter art as "x" direction, (i.e., the line-space
direction) and "y" direction, (i.e., the character-space
direction).
Subclass:
613
With web supply or takeup or mount therefor (e.g., web
cartridge, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means for holding a
source of web material to be typed on, or with means for
holding the web material that has been typed on and is being
removed from the typing zone of the typewriter.
(1) Note. Either the supply or the makeup can be a
convoluted roll of web material, but the subject matter of
this and indented subclasses is not limited to a web roll.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
609 for a mount for plural web rolls.
Subclass:
613.1
Including insertion of leading edge of web:
This subclass is indented under subclass 613. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for facilitating
the entry of a web into the typewriter.
(1) Note. The subject matter of this subclass also provides
for the reentry of a web that has been torn or separated from
itself, thus causing a new "leading edge" to be formed, and
also provides for a "dolly" to facilitate insertion of the
web.
Subclass:
613.2
For folded or creased web (e.g., fan-folded web):
This subclass is indented under subclass 613. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the web material being
doubled over upon itself, or to the web material having a
surface configuration that is caused by doubling the material
upon itself.
Subclass:
613.3
With web smoother:
This subclass is indented under subclass 613.2. Subject
matter wherein significance is attributed to means for
flattening a configuration in the web material that was
caused by doubling the material upon itself.
Subclass:
613.4
Holder for fan-folded web mounted to move with carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 613.2. Subject
matter wherein the web of material has an indeterminate
length dimension and is folded upon itself transversely of
said dimension, the direction of folding alternating along
said dimension, and wherein said web is supported by a
receptacle or container, is supported on the carriage* or is
supported on a portion of the typewriter that partakes of
carriage movement.
(1) Note. The web of material may be record-medium*
material or may be transfer-medium* material (e.g., "carbon
paper") that is handled as record-medium material, and the
typing of simultaneous copies is not included in the claimed
disclosures.
Subclass:
614
Including web rewind:
This subclass is indented under subclass 613. Subject matter
wherein the web of record-medium* that has been typed on and
is being removed from the typing zone of the typewriter is
convoluted spirally into a roll.
Subclass:
614.1
Connected to platen drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 614. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a platen* and means
to rotate the platen, and wherein said rotating means also
rotates said roll to convolute the removed web onto the
roll.
Subclass:
615
Mounted on typewriter having transversely moving carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 613. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with a carriage* that is
movable in carriage feed and carriage return directions and
wherein said web material is supported relative to said
carriage.
(1) Note. In this subclass the web material is supported on
a mounting that is fixed relative to the typewriter, but the
web is guided to follow the movements of the carriage as the
carriage moves in carriage feed and carriage return
directions.
(2) Note. The term "carriage feed" is defined in subclass
319, and the term "carriage return" is defined in subclass
313.
Subclass:
615.1
Mounted to move with carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 615. Subject matter
wherein said roll is supported on means that is fixed to the
carriage*, whereby the roll partakes of carriage feed and
carriage return movements.
Subclass:
615.2
For feeding tape in direction of print-line (i.e., transverse
feed):
This subclass is indented under subclass 613. Subject matter
wherein the web of record-medium* is in the form of an
elongated but relatively narrow strip of material that is
mounted to be moved so that its length dimension moves
parallel to the direction in which a print-line* is typed.
(1) Note. The width dimension of the strip is usually
approximately equal to or only slightly greater than the
height of a character* symbol.
Subclass:
616
By pin-feed means (e.g., reciprocating pin, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter
wherein the means for moving a web of record-medium* includes
at least one short, slender element that is configured to
enter into a hole in the web and is moved in a direction
parallel to the line-space* direction to thereby move the
web.
(1) Note. In this subclass the pin reciprocates to-and-fro,
engaging the web in one of its movements and disengaging from
the web in the return movement.
Subclass:
616.1
Including laterally adjustable bands (e.g., tractor feed,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 616. Subject matter
wherein the means for moving a web of record-medium* includes
at least two closed loop flexible members that move in a
direction parallel to the line-space* direction, and each of
which members includes one or more of said elements, and
wherein the position of either or both of the members
relative to the web can be varied in a direction
perpendicular to the line-space direction.
(1) Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the position
of two of said members relative to the web is varied at the
same time, and both bands are moved oppositely in equal
distances. This is termed "tractor feed".
Subclass:
616.2
Pin feed on endless band:
This subclass is indented under subclass 616. Subject matter
wherein the means for moving a web of record-medium* includes
at least one closed loop flexible member that moves in a
direction parallel to the line-space* direction, which member
includes one or more of said elements.
Subclass:
616.3
Pin wheel (e.g., on platen cylinder):
This subclass is indented under subclass 616. Subject matter
wherein the means for moving a web of record-medium* includes
a circular member that rotates so that its periphery moves in
a direction parallel to the line-space* direction, which
member includes one or more of said elements.
(1) Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the circular
member is the platen* or the element(s) is/are associated
with the platen to rotate therewith.
Subclass:
617
By friction-feed means (e.g., reciprocating finger or gripper
or pinch roller, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter
wherein the means for moving a web of record-medium* includes
one or more members that closely contact the surface(s) of
the record-medium adjacent thereto and move relative to the
typewriter in a direction parallel to the line-space*
direction while the surface(s) of the member(s) do not slide
relative to the surface(s) of the record-medium, thereby
moving the record-medium in said direction.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
634 for friction-feed means usually applied to a sheet, and
see (1) Note to that subclass.
Subclass:
618
With web tensioning or braking:
This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means for moving a
web of record-medium* relative to the typewriter and is also
provided with means for resisting the movement of the web,
whereby the web is tautened or slowed in movement, or wherein
the resisting means tends to effect stoppage in the movement
of the web of record-medium.
Subclass:
619
Including web guiding or aligning (e.g., laterally, relative
to print-line, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for positioning a
web of record-medium* relative to a particular location on
the typewriter or leading the web to said location.
(1) Note. The web may be positioned transversely of the
direction of line-space* movement or may be positioned with
respect to the print-line*.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
579 for skew correction of a web.
Subclass:
620
Including web shifting to view print-line:
This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a movement of the web
of record-medium* that has been typed on, which movement is
for the purpose of enabling a typist to see the character*
symbols that have been typed on the print-line*.
Subclass:
621
With web cutter (e.g., tear bar, wire tool, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with means to sever one
portion of a web of record-medium* from another portion of
that web.
(1) Note. This subclass includes a cutter that has an edge
against which the web is torn.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
83, Cutting, appropriate subclasses for a cutter not
associated with a typewriter.
Subclass:
621.1
For longitudinal cut:
This subclass is indented under subclass 621. Subject matter
wherein the web is severed along a line that extends along
the direction of movement of the web.
Subclass:
621.2
And gauge for tear-off length:
This subclass is indented under subclass 621. Subject matter
wherein the severing means comprises an element having a
sharp edge, against which edge a web of record-medium* is
moved by the user of a typewriter to sever the web, and
wherein the typewriter is provided with an indicator that
helps the typist to determine the amount of web to be severed
from the body of the web.
Subclass:
622
With holder for single sheet (e.g., clip, backing sheet,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the use of a support in
addition to a platen*, which support holds one sheet of
record-medium* during typing on the sheet, or wherein
significance is attributed to a relatively thin piece of
material having length and width dimensions corresponding to
the length and width of a sheet of record-medium*, which
piece of material lies between the sheet of record-medium and
the platen* and holds the record-medium thereto while typing
is performed on the sheet of record-medium.
Subclass:
623
Mounted on carriage (e.g., for extra-wide sheet, cylindroidal
holder, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 622. Subject matter
wherein said support is held by the carriage* of a
typewriter.
(1) Note. This subclass is also for a support in the shape
of a hollow cylindroidal member that substantially surrounds
the platen* or for a support for a sheet of record-medium*
that has a width dimension (i.e., a dimension that extends in
a direction perpendicular to the line-space* distance), which
width dimension is greater than the corresponding length
dimension of the platen that backs the record-medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
552 for a "floating" platen capable of feeding such an
extra-wide sheet.
Subclass:
624
For feeding sheet from stack or pack holder:
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means associated with a
typewriter for removing one sheet of record-medium* from a
pile consisting of a plurality of such sheets regularly
arranged in a support or receptacle, or to means for moving
such a sheet into the typewriter for typing thereon.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 145 and other
appropriate subclasses for sheet feeding means not associated
with a typewriter.
Subclass:
625
Add delivering to sheet receiver (e.g., by roller couple):
This subclass is indented under subclass 624. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means to move the
sheet of record-medium* that has been typed on out of the
typewriter and onto a support or receptacle.
(1) Note. In this subclass a "roller couple" (defined in
subclass 636) may be used to move a sheet of record medium
into a typewriter for typing thereon or out of a typewriter
after typing, thereon.
Subclass:
626
By engaging between flap and body of envelope:
This subclass is indented under subclass 624. Subject matter
wherein the record-medium* to be typed on is a folded sheet
or a wrapper having a folded portion adjacent to a main
portion, and wherein the feed means is an element that moves
between the folded portion and the main portion to engage the
sheet or wrapper at the fold to thereby move the sheet or
wrapper.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering, subclass 2 for an envelope
feeder not associated with a typewriter.
Subclass:
627
By pneumatic means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 624. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means for moving the
sheet of record-medium*, which means includes a gaseous fluid
medium under subatmospheric or above-atmospheric pressure.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering, 90 for a pneumatic sheet
feeding means not associated with a typewriter.
Subclass:
628
By reciprocating of oscillating member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 624. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means for moving the
sheet of record-medium*, which means includes an element that
moves to-and-fro in a straight line or an arcuate path and
engages the sheet for movement thereof.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering, 44 for a reciprocating
sheet feeding means not associated with a typewriter.
Subclass:
629
By endless-band or rotating (e.g., feed-roller) member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 624. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means for moving the
sheet of record-medium*, which means includes a flexible
element orbiting in a closed loop and that engages the sheet
for movement thereof, or wherein the typewriter is provided
with means for moving the sheet of record medium, which means
includes a surface or element that, turns about an axis and
that engages the sheet for movement thereof.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
271, Sheet Feeding or Delivering, 34 for an endless sheet
feeding means not associated with a typewriter; and
subclasses 109+ for a rotating sheet feeding means not
associated with a typewriter.
Subclass:
630
Including aligning of sheet edge prior to typing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to structure for
positioning or locating a sheet of record-medium* with
respect to some part of a typewriter, which structure is used
before any of the character* symbols are imprinted on the
sheet and is used by positioning a border of the sheet
against the structure.
(1) Note. In most typewriters a sheet is inserted adjacent
to the platen* and moved in a line-space* direction. The
"leading" edge of the sheet is that edge which is parallel to
a print-line* (i.e., perpendicular to the line-space
direction) and enters the typewriter first. The "side" edge
of the sheet is that edge which is parallel to the line-space
direction. The structure of this and indented subclasses
ensures that either or both of the edges will be properly
aligned with the print-lines so that the typed text will have
a pleasing appearance on the page*.
Subclass:
631
Aligner moved to operate concurrently with disengagement of
feed means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is provided with means to move a sheet
through the typewriter, which means is shiftable into a first
position at which it will not move the sheet or into a second
position at which it will move the sheet, wherein the
aligning structure is shiftable into a first position at
which it will align the sheet or into a second position at
which it will not align, but instead permit the sheet to be
moved through the typewriter, and wherein the first position
of the moving means coincides with the first position of the
aligning means whereby the sheet will be aligned when the
sheet moving means is not operative.
Subclass:
632
Including leading-edge aligner located past print-point:
This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter
wherein the aligning structure is located in a position at
which it will engage and align the leading edge of the sheet
after the leading edge has been moved beyond the print-point*
of the typewriter.
(1) Note. The term "leading" edge is defined in subclass
630 in (1) Note thereto.
Subclass:
632.1
Adjustable leading-edge aligner:
This subclass is indented under subclass 632. Subject matter
wherein the position of the aligning structure may be
changed.
Subclass:
633
Side-edge aligner (e.g., adjustable, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter
wherein the aligning structure is located in a position at
which it will engage and align the side edge of a sheet.
(1) Note. The term "side" edge is defined in subclass 630
in (1) Note thereto.
Subclass:
633.1
On rear sheet table or apron:
This subclass is indented under subclass 633. Subject matter
wherein the aligning structure is mounted on a support for
holding a sheet of record-medium* adjacent to a typewriter,
which support is positioned adjacent to the back side of the
platen*.
Subclass:
633.2
Adjustable aligner (e.g., with lock):
This subclass is indented under subclass 633.1. Subject
matter wherein the aligning structure is mounted so as to
permit variation in the position of the aligning structure
relative to the support.
(1) Note. The aligner may be provided with means for
latching the structure to the support to prevent relative
movement thereof.
Subclass:
634
Including friction-feed means (e.g., band):
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to movement of a
record-medium* in a line-space* direction, which movement is
caused by one or more members having a surface or surfaces
that closely contact the surface(s) of the record-medium
adjacent thereto and move relative to the typewriter in a
direction parallel to the line-space direction while the
surface(s) of the member(s) do not slide relative to the
surface(s) of the record-medium, thereby moving the
record-medium in said direction.
(1) Note. In this subclass a flexible feed band cooperates
with a platen* to feed a sheet of record-medium lying between
the band and the platen.
(2) Note. In amplification of the phrase "in a direction
parallel to the line-space direction", the following should
be noted. Two members having surfaces that face one another
with the record-medium therebetween may comprise a roller
couple, wherein each of the feed-roller* elements rotate
about a fixed axis in opposite rotational directions, but the
two peripheral portions of the roller surfaces that are
closest to each other are tangent to substantially the same
line and the rotation is such as to move the tangent roller
surfaces in the line-space direction. Similar members may
move along a line perpendicular to their axes without
rotation of the rollers, thus moving the record-medium that
is therebetween, and return along the same line but in
opposite direction, but during the return movement the
rollers rotate so as not to return the record-medium; or, two
nonrotatable members may close onto the record-medium and
move in the line-space direction, but open out of contact
with the record-medium for return of the members.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
617 for friction feed of a web by a reciprocating-gripper
couple or a reciprocating-pinch-roller couple.
Subclass:
635
By endless-feed band:
This subclass is indented under subclass 634. Subject matter
wherein one of said members is a flexible strip of material
having a closed-loop or continuous configuration.
(1) Note. Usually the endless band cooperates with the
platen* to feed a sheet lying between the band and platen.
Subclass:
636
By roller couple (e.g. rotatable pinch rollers, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 634. Subject matter
wherein at least one member contacts one surface of the
record-medium* and at least another member contacts the
opposite surface of the record-medium, and wherein each
member is a cylinder or a cylindroid rotatable in opposite
rotational directions with the record-medium therebetween.
(1) Note. In this subclass a roller couple comprises two
counter-rotating rollers with record-medium therebetween,
neither of which rollers is a platen*. In the subclasses
indented hereunder, the platen is cylindrical or cylindroidal
and is rotatable to feed record-medium frictionally engaged
thereby, and the other roller is a pressure roller that urges
the record-medium into frictional contact with the platen.
The roller couple of the indented subclasses thus comprises a
platen and a pressure roller cooperating to feed
record-medium lying therebetween. The pressure roller is
termed a "feed-roller" even though it may not be driven other
than by frictional contact with the platen or the
record-medium.
Subclass:
636.1
With typewriter-actuated control or feed-roller position:
This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter
wherein a feed-roller* is movable into a first position at
which it is in contact with a platen* or is movable into a
second position at which it is not in contact with the
platen, and wherein either movement of the feed-roller
results from or is concurrent with movement of a mechanism of
the typewriter.
(1) Note. The term typewriter-actuated-control* is intended
to refer to a control or regulator that is actuated by the
typewriter itself or a part thereof that is moved by other
than directly manually triggered operation. In most manual
typewriters a typist presses various key* elements to effect
a particular typing operation. The key-pressed operation is
not typewriter actuated, but if that operation in turn
effects second operation without further intervention by the
typist, the second operation is typewriter actuated.
Subclass:
636.2
Including intermediate drive means (e.g. gears) connecting
feed-roller to platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter
wherein the feed-roller* is caused to rotate by a mechanical
transmission that joins the platen* to the feed-roller.
(1) Note. The mechanical transmission may include rotatable
toothed wheels, the teeth of which wheels intermesh one with
the other(s).
Subclass:
636.3
Including feed-roller having equalizing or pressure-adjusting
means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter
wherein a feed-roller* is urged (or a plurality of
feed-rollers are urged) toward an associated platen* by a
mechanism, which mechanism is regulated so that (a) the force
with which the feed-roller is urged (or any of the
feed-rollers are urged) may be varied, or (b) the force with
which either end of the feed-roller is urged (or either end
of any of the feed-rollers is urged) may be varied so as to
cause the ends of the feed-roller(s) to be urged with equal
force.
(1) Note. In a pressure-adjusting mechanism the purpose is
to adjust the spring force by which one feed-roller (or a
plurality of feed-rollers) is biased against the platen or
another feed-roller to increase or decrease the force over
the platen. In a pressure-equalizing mechanism the purpose
is to enable the feed-roller (or a plurality of feed-rollers)
to be applied with equal force over the platen.
Subclass:
637
Including lower feed-roller(s) (e.g., pressure roller,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to one or more
feed-roller* elements that are located relative to the
associated platen* adjacent to the underneath surface of the
platen.
(1) Note. This subclass is for a typewriter wherein the
lower-feed-rollers are disposed along a single axis.
Subclass:
637.1
Including concurrent control for disengagement of upper and
lower feed-rollers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 637. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with one or more
feed-rollers* that are located adjacent to the underneath
surface of an associated platen* and is further provided with
one or more feed-rollers located adjacent to the topmost
surface of said platen, and wherein both the underneath
feed-rollers are simultaneously moved toward the platen or
simultaneously moved away from the platen.
Subclass:
637.2
Mounted on apron:
This subclass is indented under subclass 637. Subject matter
wherein said feed-rollers* are supported adjacent to the
platen* on the apron* of the typewriter.
Subclass:
637.3
Mounted on plural roller carriers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 637. Subject matter
wherein two or more lower feed-rollers* are provided, and
wherein at least one of the feed-rollers is supported on one
member, and at least another of the feed-rollers is supported
on another member.
Subclass:
637.4
Including plural parallel carrier pivots:
This subclass is indented under subclass 637.3. Subject
matter wherein each of said members oscillates about a
separate axis, and the axes of oscillation are parallel one
to the other(s).
Subclass:
637.5
Including single carrier pivot intermediate front and rear
lower feed-rollers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 637.3. Subject
matter wherein said one member and said another member each
oscillates about the same axis that is movable with respect
to the platen* with which the feed-rollers* are associated,
and which axis is located between a feed-roller below and
forward of the platen axis and a feed-roller below and
rearward of the platen axis.
Subclass:
637.6
Mounted on single carrier having pivot intermediate front and
rear lower feed-rollers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 637. Subject matter
wherein two or more lower feed-rollers* are provided, at
least one feed-roller being supported on a member to be
adjacent to an associated platen* in a location below an
forward of the platen axis, and at least another feed-roller
being supported on the same member to be adjacent to said
platen in a location below and rearward of the platen axis,
and wherein said member oscillates about an axis that is
movable toward and away from the platen and is located
between said feed-rollers.
Subclass:
638
Including feed or pressure roller mounted on "paper-finger":
This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a feed-roller* that is
supported by a paper-finger* associated with a platen*.
(1) Note. In this subclass the "paper-finger" may be
supported on a "paper bail" that is adjacent to the topmost
surface of the platen with which the paper bail is
associated. The term paper bail is defined in subclass 639.1
below.
Subclass:
639
Including upper feed-roller(s) (e.g., pressure roller,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to one or more
feed-rollers* that are located relative to the associated
platen* adjacent to the topmost surface of the platen.
Subclass:
639.1
Mounted on "paper bail":
This subclass is indented under subclass 639. Subject matter
wherein the upper feed-roller(s)* is/are supported by a paper
bail which term is discussed and defined in (1) Note below.
(1) Note. The term "paper bail" is the term used by the
typewriter industry to refer to a particular structure that
holds a paper sheet to a platen*. It usually includes a bar
that extends along the length of the platen parallel to the
axis thereof. An arm is affixed to each end of the bar, and
the other ends of the two arms are pivoted about a common
axis parallel to the platen axis, whereby the paper bail is
hinged so that its bar overlies the platen. When a
record-medium* is fed between the platen and the paper bail,
the paper bail holds the record-medium to the platen.
Subclass:
639.2
Disengaged from platen by compound movement of bail (e.g., on
double-pivoted mount):
This subclass is indented under subclass 639.1. Subject
matter wherein the "paper bail" is normally closely adjacent
to the platen* with which it is associated, but where the
paper bail is supported so as to be moved out of its closely
adjacent position, the movement being such as to combine two
or more kinds of motion.
(1) Note. In this subclass the movement usually combines a
reciprocatory motion with an oscillatory motion. In some
typewriters, the paper bail is supported on an oscillatable
member, which member is in turn supported on a second
oscillatable member.
Subclass:
640
With cooperating scale:
This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter
wherein the roller couple feed means is associated with a
measuring instrument that is calibrated in units
corresponding to character-space* distances.
Subclass:
641
Feed-roller structure or brake or spacer therefor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 636. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the construction of a
feed-roller*, or wherein the feed-roller includes means to
retard its rotational movement or includes means to connect
the feed-roller with a drive means for the feed-roller, or
wherein significance is attributed to a feed-roller
construction including a plurality of such feed-rollers on a
single axis and means for separating one feed-roller from
other feed-rollers along said axis.
Subclass:
642
Including sheet guide (e.g., for sheet insertion, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subclass
matter wherein significance is attributed to structure on or
attached to a typewriter, which structure contributes to or
facilitates the movement of a sheet of record-medium* through
the typewriter in its intended or necessary path for proper
typing on the record-medium.
Subclass:
643
Platen-encircling band:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the structure includes a relatively narrow member
that substantially surrounds a platen* and guides the sheet
for movement around the platen.
Subclass:
644
Sheet stripper (e.g., for preventing reentry, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the structure includes a member that is closely
adjacent to a platen* around which a sheet of record-medium*
is partially wrapped during typing on the sheet, which member
is located relative to the platen in a position to engage the
leading edge of the sheet as that leading edge exits from the
platen and guide that leading edge out of contact with the
platen.
Subclass:
645
Sheet holddown member (e.g., "paper finger", end-of-page
holddown, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the structure includes a member that is closely
adjacent to a platen* around which a sheet of record-medium*
is partially wrapped during typing on the sheet, which member
engages a surface of the sheet and urges the sheet into
contact with the platen, or wherein significance is
attributed to the member engaging the surface of a sheet when
the end of a page* is adjacent to the member.
Subclass:
645.1
With aperture or notch (e.g., for typing therethrough,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 645. Subject matter
wherein the member has a hole therethrough or a portion cut
out of an edge thereof, which hole or cut-out portion is
located adjacent the print-point* of the typewriter and
serves to permit a type-face* to impact the record-medium*
through the hole or cutout portion.
Subclass:
645.2
On or with erasing plate or signal or indicator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 645. Subject matter
wherein the member is mounted on or is part of a support that
is used to support a record-medium* while a record-medium has
an eraser applied thereto, or wherein the member is mounted
on or is part of a measuring instrument that is calibrated in
units corresponding to character-space* distances, or wherein
the member is provided with means to alert the typist to a
condition of the typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
698 for an erasing table.
Subclass:
645.3
Moveable mounted on movable finger carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 645. Subject matter
wherein the member is supported by a structure on the
typewriter, and wherein the structure may be moved relative
to the typewriter and the member may be moved relative to the
structure.
(1) Note. In some typewriters of this subclass either the
structure or the member may be moved in a path that extends
around the platen* with which the structure and the member
are associated.
Subclass:
645.4
Pivotally mounted holddown:
This subclass is indented under subclass 645. Subject matter
wherein the member is supported for oscillatory or arcuate
movement about an axis related to the axis of the platen*.
(1) Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the axis of
the member is substantially perpendicular to the axis of the
platen.
Subclass:
645.5
Mounted in front of platen axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 645. Subject matter
wherein the member is supported relative to the platen* on a
structure that is located adjacent to the platen and between
the platen and a typist.
Subclass:
646
Sheet table at delivery side of platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter includes a platen* around which a
sheet of record-medium* is partially wrapped during typing on
the sheet, and wherein the support is located relative to the
platen in a position to receive the sheet as that sheet exits
from the platen after being typed thereon.
Subclass:
647
Movable sheet table or apron (e.g., detachable, extensible,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the structure includes a support for holding a sheet
of record-medium* adjacent to a typewriter or includes an
apron* for holding a sheet adjacent to the platen* of a
typewriter, which support or apron is capable of being moved
with respect to the platen with which it is associated.
(1) Note. The support may be removed from and replaced on
some typewriters without disassembly of other parts of the
typewriter, or may be made larger or smaller.
Subclass:
647.1
Pivotable (e.g., fingerlike support):
This subclass is indented under subclass 647. Subject matter
wherein the support is capable of being moved in an arcuate
or oscillatory path.
(1) Note. The support may comprise one or more elongated
(e.g., fingerlike) members.
Subclass:
648
PLATEN OR PLATEN-MOVING MECHANISM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to the
platen* of a typewriter or to means for moving the platen.
(1) Note. The platen moving mechanism or the patents for
this portion of the schedule is that platen movement which is
not caused by carriage* feed or carriage return and similar
carriage movements, or which is not caused by case-shift*, or
which is not caused by line-space* mechanism. For such
movements, other portions of this schedule are more properly
appropriate.
(2) Note. A flat platen of a typewriter is provided for in
subclasses 23+ of this schedule. This subclass (648) and the
subclasses indented hereunder provided for a cylindrical
platen or a platen having a configuration other than
significantly flat.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
23 and see (2) Note above.
Subclass:
649
For movement of platen other than for line-spacing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter
wherein a platen* is moved for a purpose other than to effect
a line-space* distance.
(1) Note. The movement of the platen is the typewriter of
this subclass is often to enable an extra-thick "manifold
set" to be inserted between the platen and the apron*
associated therewith, or to move the platen so that typing on
the record-medium* may be more readily seen by the typist, or
to enable adjustments to be made to the record-medium
relative to the platen, etc.
Subclass:
650
Cylindrical platen adjustable to facilitate compactness:
This subclass is indented under subclass 649. Subject matter
wherein a platen* has extreme ends, one of which ends is
movable relative to the other.
(1) Note. The purpose of this adjustment is to enable a
platen to be extended or compressed in length, or to enable
the turning knob of a platen to be moved along the axis of
the platen.
Subclass:
651
Cylindrical platen axially adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 649. Subject matter
wherein the platen* or a portion thereof is movable along its
own axis of rotation.
Subclass:
652
Platen movement conjointly with type-face movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 649. Subject matter
wherein a platen* is moved toward a print-point* during
substantially the same period of time that a type-face*
element is moved toward the same print-point.
Subclass:
653
By eccentric mounting for platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 649. Subject matter
wherein the platen* is rotatable about a first axis, and the
first axis is rotatable about a second axis on the carriage*
and parallel to the first axis.
Subclass:
654
Character-size platen (e.g., anvil, disc, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter
wherein a platen* has length and height dimensions
approximating the corresponding width and height dimensions
of a character* which is backed by the anvil platen.
Subclass:
655
Mounted on movable carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 654. Subject matter
wherein the character-size platen* is supported on a
mechanism that enables movement of the platen relative to the
typewriter.
Subclass:
656
Bar (i.e., line size) platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter
wherein a platen* has a length dimension equal to or greater
than the length of a print-line* on a record-medium*, and has
a height dimension approximating the height of a character*.
Subclass:
657
Mounted on cylindrical member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter
wherein a bar platen* has (as defined in subclass 656 above)
is included in or on the surface of a cylindrical plate (as
defined in subclass 659 below).
Subclass:
658
Semicylindrical platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter
wherein a platen* is an arcuate plate extending peripherally
approximately 180 deg. about an axis and extending along the
axis for a dimension approximately equivalent to the width of
a record-medium* supported by said platen.
Subclass:
659
Cylindrical platen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter
wherein a platen* has a surface that is generated by a line
revolving about an axis parallel to the line.
(1) Note. Although the definition of "cylinder" stated
above would produce only a smooth-surfaced "right cylinder",
it is not intended that a cylindroidal member having minor
surface roughness be barred from any of the subclasses
indented hereunder. Such minor surface variations are in fact
found in the platen members found in subclasses 661.3+,
661.4, or 662 below.
Subclass:
660
Detachably secured to platen carriage:
This subclass is indented under subclass 659. Subject matter
wherein a platen* is mounted on a carriage* for movement with
the carriage by structure that enables the platen to be
removed from and replaced on the carriage without disassembly
of other parts of the typewriter.
Subclass:
660.1
By axially displaceable supporting shaft:
This subclass is indented under subclass 660. Subject matter
wherein the structure includes a rod on which the platen* is
mounted for rotation of the platen about an axis coincident
with the platen and the rod, which rod is movable along its
axis for removal of the platen mounted on the rod.
Subclass:
660.2
By pivoted member overlying platen shaft:
This subclass is indented under subclass 660. Subject matter
wherein the structure includes a rod on which the platen* is
mounted for rotation of the platen about an axis coincident
with the platen and the rod, which rod is held to the
carriage* by a member that is over the rod and is
oscillatable away from the rod for removal of the rod and
platen mounted thereon.
Subclass:
660.3
By disengageable platen sectors:
This subclass is indented under subclass 660. Subject matter
wherein the platen* is formed of a plurality of segments
surrounding the axis of rotation of the platen and wherein
the platen is removed from the carriage* by disassembling the
segments.
Subclass:
661
With sound-muffling means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 659. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a platen* that is
provided with means for eliminating or reducing the noise
produced by the impact of a type-member* against the surface
of the platen.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
689 for other means for muffling the noise produced by a
typewriter.
Subclass:
661.1
Including plural layers of varying hardness:
This subclass is indented under subclass 661. Subject matter
wherein the platen* is formed of a plurality of thicknesses
of material substantially concentrically arranged, and
wherein the outermost thickness of material is of a different
firmness than the innermost thickness.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
662 for a platen having surface portions of varying
hardness.
Subclass:
661.2
Including cylinder containing fluent (e.g., fluid, etc.)
material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 661. Subject matter
wherein the platen* includes a cylindrical tube surrounding a
flowable substance.
(1) Note. The material within the cylinder may be, for
example, sand, air, liquid, etc., or any other fluent
material that yields under impact.
Subclass:
661.3
Including cylindrical sections or rings (e.g., of
character-space width):
This subclass is indented under subclass 661. Subject matter
wherein the platen* is formed of a plurality of annular
elements each having a circular dimension equal to the
diameter of the platen cylinder and a width dimension
extending axially of the platen.
(1) Note. In some typewriters each of the annular elements
may have a width dimension equal to the width of a
character*.
Subclass:
661.4
Including a wound member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 661. Subject matter
wherein the platen* is formed of a plurality of convolutions
of material about the axis of the platen.
(1) Note. The convolutions may be wound spirally (i.e.,
increasing in diameter as the convolutions are wound around
the axis) or helically (i.e., having the same diameter but
progressing along the axis as the convolutions are wound
around the axis), or be a combination of both forms of
convolutions.
Subclass:
662
Including particular surface characteristic (e.g.,
translucent, pigment yielding, corrugated, of varying
hardness, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 659. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the properties of the
circumferential surface of the platen*.
(1) Note. In this subclass the platen may be translucent,
may include a pigment-yielding surface, may be formed with
ridges or irregularities, or may be formed with different
firmness of material along either its length or periphery, or
have other surface characteristics not otherwise provided
for.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
661.1 for a platen having plural layers of varying
hardness.
Subclass:
663
LOCKING OR INTERLOCKING MECHANISM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to means
for preventing an operation from occurring or to means for
preventing a normally movable member from moving, or wherein
significance is attributed to means for preventing two
mutually exclusive operations from occurring simultaneously
or to means for preventing two mutually exclusive movable
members from moving simultaneously.
(1) Note. The difference between "lock" and "interlock"
will best be illustrated by the following examples. In typing
a line of text, the typewriter carriage* reaches a position,
determined by a margin-stop*, corresponding to the end of a
print-line*. At this position of the carriage, it is
desirable to prevent further movement of the carriage, or
movement of any of the key* elements, or of the space-bar*.
A lock means prevents such movement, but does not prevent a
desired carriage return movement. Moreover, a typist may
override a carriage lock by pressing a margin*-release key.
A lock may also be used to prevent movement of typewriter
keys, carriage, or other parts during transport of the
typewriter. An interlock is used to prevent movement of one
key while another key is pressed, or to prevent movement of a
key while the carriage is moving to a tabular position.
Stated in different terms, if it is not desirable for two
operations or movements to occur at the same time, an
interlock is used to prevent one while the other is
occurring.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
247 for a case-shift* locking means.
286.3 for a denominational lock in a tabular carriage.
294.2 for a key lock in a tabular carriage.
589 for locking mechanism in a typewriter including
tally-strip feeding.
Subclass:
664
For interlocking plural functions or mechanisms:
This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for preventing
two mutually exclusive operations from occurring
simultaneously or to means for preventing two mutually
exclusive movable members from moving simultaneously.
(1) Note. The significant aspect of this and indented
subclasses lies in the phrase "mutually exclusive". As
discussed in (1) Note of subclass 663 above, mutually
exclusive operations or movements exist where it would not be
desirable, or would result in jamming or faulty operation,
for one to occur simultaneously with the other.
Subclass:
665
Plural carriage-moving mechanisms (e.g., escapement,
tabulation, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 664. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with first means for causing
movement of a carriage* in a first mode of operation and also
provided with second means for causing the carriage to be
moved in a second mode of operation, and wherein the
typewriter is also provided with an interlock for preventing
one of the means from operating when the other means is
operating.
Subclass:
666
Plural keys or key linkages (e.g., for type-face selection,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 664. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with at least two key*
elements or at least two sets of lever arrangements for
transmitting movement of a key into movement of a type-head*,
and wherein the typewriter is also provided with an interlock
for preventing one of the keys or lever arrangements from
being effective to operate when the other is operating.
(1) Note. In a typewriter of this subclass when a first key
has been fully depressed to cause operation of a first
type-bar* a second key can be moved to a small extent, but
will not cause operation of a second type-bar; or
simultaneous full depression of two keys is prevented,
thereby preventing simultaneous operation of two type-bars.
See subclass 667 for a key-board* lock using an interlock
mechanism so that no key may be moved.
(2) Note. Also in this subclass, the interlock means may
include: an electrical interlock, an interlock including a
plurality of elements that are displaced to prevent intrusion
of a second key lever when a first key lever has displaced
the elements, a flexible strip that is tautened to prevent a
second key lever from being moved when a first key lever has
tautened the strip, and a plate that is shifted by one key
lever to prevent movement of a second key lever, the
mechanisms described being only exemplary of those found
herein.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
667 and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
667
Key-board lock using interlock mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with an interlock mechanism
that prevents any movement of any key* element when the lock
mechanism is effective.
(1) Note. In this subclass a lock mechanism acts on an
interlock mechanism to cause the interlock mechanism to be
effective to prevent movement of any of the keys. Stated
differently, the lock mechanism controls the interlock
mechanism, but the interlock mechanism does not control the
lock mechanism.
(2) Note. For a discussion of the difference between a
"lock" and an "interlock", see (1) Note of subclass 663.
Subclass:
668
Locking means actuated in response to a condition:
This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for preventing an
operation from occurring or to means for preventing a
normally movable member from moving, either means being made
effective as a result of a characteristic or state of
environment or the occurrence of a predetermined event in a
typewriter.
Subclass:
669
Failure of power supply:
This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter
wherein the preventing means is made effective as a result of
the absence of external power to a typewriter that requires
external power for its operation.
(1) Note. The structure defined locks a mechanism in an
electric typewriter, whereby if a key* has been inadvertently
pressed while power is not applied thereto, that key will not
cause operation when power is reapplied to the typewriter.
Subclass:
670
End-of-page lock (e.g., responsive to preset condition):
This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter
wherein the preventing means is made effective when a
predetermined state of the typewriter has been reached, which
state corresponds to the termination of a page* of typed
text.
(1) Note. The preset condition that causes locking may be
the passage of the bottom edge of a sheet past a particular
point on the typewriter, the typing of a predetermined number
of print-lines* of type, etc., or any condition that actuates
a lock so that no further print-lines may be typed on that
particular page.
Subclass:
670.1
Responsive to end-of-page sensor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 670. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with means to detect the
termination of a page* of typed text, whereby the preventing
means is made effective.
(1) Note. The sensor can detect the trailing edge of a
sheet of record-medium*, or can detect a hole, mark, or other
indicium in either a sheet or a web of record-medium that
corresponds to the end of a page.
Subclass:
670.2
Including lock for platen or line-space:
This subclass is indented under subclass 670. Subject matter
wherein the preventing means is effective to stop the
rotational movement of a platen*, or the movement of a
line-space* mechanism.
Subclass:
670.3
By cam groove and follower:
This subclass is indented under subclass 670.2. Subject
matter wherein the preventing means includes a channel that
is engaged by a member within the channel, which channel is
formed as a helical or spiral cam and is moved by incremental
rotation of a platen*, whereby the movement of the channel
effects movement of the member to effect stopping of the
platen.
Subclass:
671
End of maximum typed line:
This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter
wherein the preventing means is made effective when the
typewriter carriage* that is moving in a character-space*
direction arrives at a predetermined position relative to the
typewriter.
(1) Note. In most typewriters, the position is determined
by a margin* regulator (usually the right-hand-margin
regulator for English or other European languages), and the
locking means prevents further carriage movement as well as
movement of any of the character*-key* elements. The locking
means may usually be disengaged, however, to permit the
typing of several more characters on the same line.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
342 for margin-regulator mechanism.
Subclass:
671.1
Actuated by space-bar:
This subclass is indented under subclass 671. Subject matter
wherein the preventing means is made effective by operation
of the space-bar* of the typewriter after the typewriter
carriage* has arrived at a predetermined position relative to
the typewriter.
Subclass:
671.2
Universal-bar lock (e.g., pivoted latch, slidable latch,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 671. Subject matter
wherein the preventing means prevents the universal-bar* from
moving, whereby typewriter elements that are normally driven
by the universal-bar are not driven.
Subclass:
671.3
Actuated by paper-finger:
This subclass is indented under subclass 671.2. Subject
matter wherein the universal-bar* is prevented from moving
when a paper-finger* that is mounted to move with a platen*
on a carriage* engages an element that is stationary relative
to the frame of the typewriter.
Subclass:
671.4
Interposed component:
This subclass is indented under subclass 671.2. Subject
matter wherein the preventing means includes an element that
is movable into either of two positions, in a first position
the element is between a fixed portion of a typewriter and
the universal-bar* or a member affixed to and movable with
the universal-bar, and in a second position the element is
not between the portion and the universal-bar, whereby when
the element is in the first position the universal-bar is
prevented from moving its full movement in a direction to
actuate the function* that would be actuated if the element
were in its second position.
Subclass:
672
Escapement lock:
This subclass is indented under subclass 671. Subject matter
wherein the preventing means prevents the carriage* from
moving by holding the carriage escapement to be incapable of
carriage feed.
(1) Note. The term "carriage escapement" is defined in the
definition of subclass 329.
Subclass:
672.1
Type-bar lock:
This subclass is indented under subclass 671. Subject matter
wherein the preventing means includes an element that
prevents a type-bar* from moving.
Subclass:
672.2
Key-lever lock (e.g., by hook on key lever):
This subclass is indented under subclass 671. Subject matter
wherein the preventing means includes an element that
prevents a key* lever from moving.
(1) Note. In some typewriters the key lever is prevented
from moving by an element on a typewriter frame that contacts
a hooklike member that is mounted on the key lever.
Subclass:
673
Coin-controlled lock (e.g., responsive to print-lines, time,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter
wherein the preventing means is made ineffective by using a
token representing money, whereby a typewriter may be made
available for hire.
(1) Note. Usually the typewriter of this subclass is
operable after the insertion of a coin, and operates for a
preset number of print-lines*, or character* symbols, or
period of time, or any countable characteristic, after which
the typewriter is inoperable.
Subclass:
674
For locking carriage in centered position (e.g., with
shipping support):
This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for preventing a
carriage* from moving away from a position that is
substantially midway of the total distance that the carriage
is capable of moving.
(1) Note. The purpose of a lock of this and indented
subclasses is usually to enable transport of a typewriter
without damage to its movable parts.
Subclass:
675
And disengaging case-shift lock:
This subclass is indented under subclass 674. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with means to latch its
case-shift* mechanism, and said preventing means also
unlatches said case-shift mechanism.
Subclass:
676
Key-board security lock (e.g., cover plate, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for preventing
access to the key-board* of a typewriter.
Subclass:
677
For locking selected group(s) of keys:
This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for preventing
movement of a particular plurality of key* elements.
Subclass:
678
For locking key in actuated position (e.g., to remove
type-face from ink pad):
This subclass is indented under subclass 663. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to means for preventing
return movement of a particular key* element after that key
has been pressed by a typist.
(1) Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the
typewriter is provided with a type-member*-inking block that
the type-member contacts while in a rest position, and said
preventing means locks a key element while the type-member is
out of contact with its inking block.
Subclass:
679
MEANS AUXILIARY TO TYPEWRITING FUNCTION:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein significance is attributed to
structure that is part of a typewriter to aid a typist in
using a typewriter, or significance is attributed to a device
used in conjunction with a typewriter, which device is
connected to, or may be disconnected from, a typewriter, and
which device is used by a typist in the operation of a
typewriter, but which structure or device does not itself
effect the imprint of a character*, a character-space* or
word-space*, or a function* of the typewriter.
(1) Note. This subclass and the subclasses indented
hereunder provide for structure that facilitates use of a
typewriter for typing, which structure is not provided for
elsewhere in this class (400). It is emphasized, however,
that a patent to be properly placed herein should claim a
subcombination that is in a typewriter rather than claim a
subcombination by itself.
Subclass:
680
Means for collapsing typewriter or support for record-medium
or copy:
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein the structure of a typewriter is capable of being
compacted to occupy a volume smaller than which it occupies
while it is used for typing, or wherein the typewriter is
provided with means for holding or retaining a record-medium*
or a text from which the typist is reading as the typing is
done, and wherein the holding or retaining means is capable
of being compacted.
Subclass:
681
By tilting typewriter (e.g., via collapsible legs, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is made ready for use by pivoting it
in one direction, and is compacted by pivoting it in the
opposite direction.
(1) Note. In this subclass the entire typewriter is tilted,
including the key-board*, the carriage*, the type-member*
elements, and all the parts carried by the main frame, or the
typewriter is compacted by moving one or more of the leg
portions of the typewriter.
Subclass:
682
By moving key-board relative to frame (e.g., into plural
operating positions, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is compacted by movement of the
key-board* with respect to the typewriter.
(1) Note. In some typewriters the key-board is hinged to be
pivoted or folded over with respect to the body of the
typewriter. In other typewriters the key-board is slidable
so as to be moved toward and away from the body of the
typewriter.
Subclass:
683
By moving carriage relative to frame:
This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is compacted by movement of the
carriage* relative to the typewriter.
(1) Note. In some typewriters the carriage is hinged to be
pivoted or folded over with respect to the body of the
typewriter.
Subclass:
684
By moving type-bars relative to frame:
This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is compacted by movement of the set of
type-bar* elements within the typewriter.
(1) Note. In many typewriters having this means for
compacting the typewriter, the set of type-head* elements are
arranged to lie in a curved line while they are in operative
position, the curve of the line being such that each
type-head travels approximately the same distance from its
rest position to the print-point*. For compacting the
typewriter, the type-heads are retracted so they all lie in
substantially a straight line or common plane.
Subclass:
685
Including typewriter built into carrying case:
This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is manufactured to be part of an
enclosure for the typewriter, which enclosure also includes a
handle for lifting and holding the enclosure and the
typewriter so enclosed, and wherein the typewriter is
compacted by moving component parts thereof to within the
enclosure.
(1) Note. This subclass is not for a case into which a
typewriter may be temporarily positioned for carrying, but
rather for a case that is intended as a permanent part of the
typewriter, except that the case may be temporarily
dismantled if necessary for repair or maintenance.
Subclass:
686
Buffer (e.g., dashpot, of particular material, etc.) for
movable typewriter element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter includes at least a first element that
is moved relative to a second element, and wherein
significance is attributed to abutment means for controlling
the stopping of one element by the other when the elements
contact one another at the end of their relative movement
toward one another.
Subclass:
687
Having nonimpact movement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 686. Subject matter
wherein the elements are caused to contact one another with a
motion that is gradual rather than sudden.
(1) Note. The function* of this buffer is to provide for
silent operation and to reduce the degree of wear on the
parts due to impacting of the elements against each other.
Subclass:
688
Means for increasing typewriter noise:
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to amplification of or
addition to the sounds produced by a typewriter during normal
use thereof.
Subclass:
689
Means for muffling typewriter noise:
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to elimination or
reduction of the sound produced by a typewriter during normal
use thereof.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
661 for a platen* having means for muffling noise produced
by a typewriter.
Subclass:
690
By sound-barrier enclosure for typewriter (e.g., by
sound-absorbing material):
This subclass is indented under subclass 689. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with means that
substantially surrounds all or part of the typewriter
mechanism, which means absorbs or baffles the noise normally
produced by the typewriter during use thereof, or is provided
with means that substantially soaks up the noise normally
produced by a typewriter during use thereof.
Subclass:
690.1
With viewing window (e.g., having reflection eliminator):
This subclass is indented under subclass 690. Subject matter
wherein the surrounding means has a transparent section
therein so that the typist may see any part of the typewriter
or the record-medium.
(1) Note. In some typewriters the transparent section is
arranged to prevent or reduce the possibility of the typist
seeing a false or unwanted image.
Subclass:
690.2
And externally protruding (e.g., key-board, etc.) operating
means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 690.1. Subject
matter wherein the surrounding means also has an opening
therein so that some part of the typewriter that effects
proper functioning of the typewriter extends beyond the
surrounding means.
(1) Note. The part that extends beyond the enclosure is
usually the key-board*.
Subclass:
690.3
With externally protruding operating means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 690. Subject matter
wherein the surrounding means has an opening therein so that
some part of the typewriter that effects proper functioning
of the typewriter extends beyond the surrounding means.
Subclass:
690.4
Including means facilitating opening of enclosure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 690. Subject matter
wherein the surrounding means has a section that provides
access to the interior of the surrounding means, and wherein
significance is attributed to said section or to an element
that maintains said section in an access-permitting position
or in an access-preventing position.
Subclass:
691
Frame, casing, or support for typewriter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to (a) that part of the
structure which supports movable portions of the typewriter
for movement relative thereto, or (b) that part of the
structure which encloses or surrounds the typewriter or a
portion thereof, or (c) that part of the structure that
sustains the typewriter in typing position.
Subclass:
692
Having means facilitating interchange of parts:
This subclass is indented under subclass 691. Subject matter
wherein the typewriter is one in which one or more of the
elements thereof may be exchanged one for another, and
wherein said frame structure is particularly arranged to
effect such exchange of typewriter elements.
Subclass:
693
Housing structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 691. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to that part of the
structure which encloses or surrounds the typewriter or a
portion thereof.
Subclass:
693.1
For ink-ribbon spool (e.g., spool cover, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 693. Subject matter
wherein the housing structure at least partially encloses a
reel on which a ribbon* of inked* material is wound.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for that portion of the
housing that covers the ribbon spool and is movable out of
the way to provide access to the ribbon spool. The cover may
be pivoted or slidable or removable.
Subclass:
694
Made of particular material (e.g., plastic, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 691. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the substance which a
typewriter frame, casing, or support is manufactured of.
Subclass:
695
Means for correcting typing errors (e.g., by abrasive eraser,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the removal of a
mistake that may have been produced in the typed text and the
rectification of the mistake to produce a correctly typed
text.
(1) Note. In this subclass an abrasive eraser is usually
the correcting means.
Subclass:
696
By laser beam or adhesive-surface ribbon or chemical
eradicator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 695. Subject matter
wherein the mistake is removed by (a) a laser means, or (b) a
specially prepared tape that has on one surface thereof a
coating to which the ink* of an imprinted character* will
adhere, or (c) a chemical composition which will dissolve or
remove the ink of an imprinted character.
(1) Note. The term "laser" is an acronym for Light
Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation, and is
defined as "a device that utilizes the natural oscillation of
atoms for amplifying or generating electromagnetic waves in
the visible region of the spectrum".
(2) Note. The adhesive-surface ribbon" {part (b) of the
definition} is used by temporarily placing it between the
incorrectly imprinted character and the type-face* that was
improperly used, and restriking with the same improper
type-face, thereby causing the incorrectly imprinted
character to adhere to the coating and be stripped from the
record-medium*.
Subclass:
697
By overprinting (e.g., with coated material) to cancel
error:
This subclass is indented under subclass 695. Subject matter
wherein a mistake is removed by using a specially prepared
sheet or tape that has on one surface thereof a coating of a
color approximating the color of the record-medium*, which
coating will adhere to the ink* of an imprinted character*,
which sheet or tape is used by temporarily placing it between
the incorrectly imprinted character and the type-face* that
was improperly used, and restriking with the same improper
type-face, thereby causing the incorrectly imprinted
character to be covered by the coating.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
240.1 for a ribbon* having a field for imprinting character
symbols and a field for overprinting erroneous characters.
Subclass:
697.1
With drive for ribbon having coating thereon:
This subclass is indented under subclass 697. Subject matter
wherein the specially prepared tape is wound on a spool and
the tape is advanced relative to the record-medium*.
(1) Note. In some typewriters of this subclass the
correction by overprinting is performed by depressing a
single key* element (identified by some term indicating
correction), which effects the following actions: (a) the
carriage* is backspaced one character-space*, (b) the
ribbon*, which has an inking field and a coated field, is
shifted so as to move the inking field out of imprinting
position and move the coating field into imprint position,
and (c) the carriage-feed mechanism is made temporarily
ineffective (i.e., "silenced"). Then (a) the improperly used
type-face* will be restruck to coat the incorrect character*
with pigment that is the color of the record-medium, but the
carriage will not be character-spaced, (b) the ribbon will be
reshifted so that the inking field will overlie the
print-point*, and (c) the correct type-face will be actuated
which will imprint the correct character and character-space
on the carriage.
Subclass:
698
With erasing table:
This subclass is indented under subclass 695. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with a platform to support
the record-medium* while the incorrectly imprinted character*
is being rubbed by an abrasive eraser.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
645.2 for an erasing plate combined with a sheet holddown
member.
Subclass:
699
With receptacle for refuse:
This subclass is indented under subclass 695. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with a container that serves
to collect the material that is worn away from the
record-medium* while an abrasive eraser is rubbed over the
surface of the record-medium.
Subclass:
700
With means for rubbing eraser over surface of record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 695. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with mechanism to move an
abrasive eraser relative to the record-medium*.
Subclass:
701
Means for cleaning, or facilitating cleaning of, type-face:
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to the removal of
extraneous matter from a type-face*.
(1) Note. This subclass is for a holder for a type-head* or
a type-member* which holder supports the type against
movement while a cleaner is applied to the type.
Subclass:
702
By coating type-face (e.g., via type-face cleaner, brush,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 701. Subject matter
wherein the extraneous matter is removed by rubbing a
type-face relative to an element that cleans the type-face.
(1) Note. In this subclass the cleaner is usually a liquid
that is usually carried by a ribbon* or sheet which is
impacted by the type-face or is a brush having bristles, past
which brush the type-face* moves.
Subclass:
702.1
Including means for moving brush:
This subclass is indented under subclass 702. Subject matter
wherein the element is a member having bristles, which member
is given motion to contact a type-face*, whereby the
type-face is cleaned.
Subclass:
703
Indicator means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a device used in
conjunction with a typewriter, which device helps the typist
to know the skill of the typist, or the condition of the
typewriter, or the location of a portion of the typewriter or
the record-medium* relative to the typewriter.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
15 for a justification indicator.
249 for an indicator or ribbon* depletion:
Subclass:
704
For indicating typist's skill or needed adjustment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a mechanism for showing
the user's proficiency in manipulating the various mechanisms
and functions of the typewriter being used, or wherein the
device helps the user to know the condition of the typewriter
so that if the typewriter is not operating properly, it can
be put into working condition.
(1) Note. One example of the disclosures found herein is a
means for determining if the type-head* is properly aligned
relative to the print-point* so that if the alignment is
incorrect, the type-head can be adjusted on its type-bar*.
Subclass:
705
For indicating position of carriage along print-line:
This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter
wherein the device shows the location of the carriage*
relative to the print-line* in the direction that the
print-line is formed by successive imprints of character*
symbols on a record-medium*.
Subclass:
705.1
Of carriage for type-head-carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 705. Subject matter
wherein the carriage* is one on which a type-head-carrier* is
mounted.
Subclass:
705.2
With word counter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 705. Subject matter
wherein the device shows a user of the typewriter how many
word* groups have been imprinted on a print-line*.
(1) Note. The word counter usually operates by counting the
actuations of the space-bar* as a print-line is formed, and
indicating to the typist a signal or display in accordance
with such a count. To be properly placed into this subclass,
a patent should claim the word counter in combination with
other typewriter elements.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
235, Registers, subclass 102 for a word counter, per se, for
use in a typewriter.
Subclass:
705.3
By means driven from carriage (e.g., for indicating end of
print-line, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 705. Subject matter
wherein the device is moved as a result of the carriage*
being moved along the print-line*.
(1) Note. Included herein are devices such as a calibrated
dial or tape that displays the number of character-space*
distances imprinted or remaining to be imprinted, or a device
that indicates a selected position of the carriage along its
path of movement.
(2) Note. Also in this subclass is an indicator that
provides a signal to the typist when, during movement of the
carriage, the desired end of the print-line, or the beginning
of a new print-line to be typed, is approached.
Subclass:
705.4
Scale for facilitating tabulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 705. Subject matter
wherein the device is a measuring instrument calibrated in
units corresponding to character-space* distances, which
instrument is used to help a typist set tabular positions for
the carriage*.
(1) Note. The term "tabular" is defined in subclass 283 and
further discussed in (2) Note thereto.
Subclass:
705.5
Scale for facilitating centering of print-line:
This subclass is indented under subclass 705. Subject matter
wherein the device is a measuring instrument calibrated in
units corresponding to character-space* distances, which
instrument is used to help a typist to determine the midpoint
of a print-line* relative to the midpoint of a
record-medium*.
(1) Note. The purpose of this device is to aid the typist
to center a particular print-line, for example, a heading, a
title, etc., relative to the side edges of a page*. Any
print-line may be so centered, but usually it is the
first-appearing print-line of a page or the first-appearing
print-line of a portion of text that requires a heading to
distinguish that portion from other portions of the text;
therefore, the centered print-line may appear anywhere on a
page.
Subclass:
706
For indicating position of line or end-of-page:
This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter
wherein the device shows the location of a record-medium*
that has been, or is to be, moved in a line-space* direction,
the location being shown relative to an intended print-point*
or a previously imprinted print-line* or to an intended last
print-line expected to appear on a page*.
Subclass:
706.1
By scale mounted on paper table:
This subclass is indented under subclass 706. Subject matter
wherein the device is a measuring instrument calibrated in
units corresponding to line-space* distances, which device is
located on a support for a record-medium* sheet.
Subclass:
707
By means driven from platen cylinder:
This subclass is indented under subclass 706. Subject matter
wherein the device is moved as a result of the platen* being
rotated incrementally.
(1) Note. Included in this and indented subclasses are
devices such as a calibrated dial, tape, or the like which
displays the amount of incremental rotational movements of
the platen*, or a device that can be set manually to produce
a signal when a predetermined movement of the record-medium*
in the line-space* direction has occurred.
Subclass:
707.1
Drive initiated by detector of record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 707. Subject matter
wherein the device is provided with means to sense a
characteristic of the record-medium* and said means causes
connection of the device with the platen* to move the
device.
(1) Note. Usually the sensor detects the trailing end of a
sheet (i.e., the absence of a sheet that has moved past a
particular location). However, this subclass also provides
for a sensor to detect an index mark, a hole or notch, an
area of magnetically oriented particles on the sheet, or any
other indication that a particular point on the sheet has
reached a particular location.
Subclass:
707.2
Including relatively movable pointer and scale (e.g.,
rotatable or rectilinearly movable pointer):
This subclass is indented under subclass 707. Subject matter
wherein the device includes two elements, one of which
elements is calibrated in units corresponding to line-space*
distances, and the other of which elements indicates any of
the calibrations on the first-mentioned element, and wherein
either of the elements is moved with respect to the other
element to indicate line-space distances.
(1) Note. The device (i.e., pointer) may move with a
turning or with a straight-line motion.
Subclass:
707.3
Scale rotated by gear drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 707.2. Subject
matter wherein said calibrated element is moved with a
turning motion and wherein the turning motion is caused by
the incremental rotation of the platen* by way of a drive
train that includes gear wheels.
Subclass:
707.4
Rotatable scale coaxial with platen cylinder:
This subclass is indented under subclass 707.2. Subject
matter wherein said calibrated element is moved with a
turning motion and wherein the element is located on the same
axis as that of the platen*.
Subclass:
707.5
With line numbering:
This subclass is indented under subclass 707. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with means for imprinting
successive numeral digits representing successive numbers for
the successive print-lines that are typed, whereby an
indication of the number of lines that have been typed is
shown.
Subclass:
708
Including detector of record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 706. Subject matter
wherein the device is provided with means to sense a
characteristic of the record-medium* and said means causes an
indication of the location of the record-medium to be shown
to the typist.
(1) Note. Usually the sensor detects the trailing end of a
sheet (i.e., the absence of a sheet that has moved past a
particular location). However, this subclass also provides
for a sensor to detect an index mark, a hole or notch, an
area of magnetically oriented particles on the sheet, or any
other indication that a particular point on the sheet has
reached a particular location.
Subclass:
708.1
Having electrical contacts separated by record-medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein said sensing means includes an electrical circuit
having two elements intended to touch one another for
completion of the circuit, which two elements are maintained
in a separated or open position by the record-medium*,
whereby when the record-medium is absent from between the
elements, the circuit will be closed.
(1) Note. The platen* itself may include one of the
elements of the circuit, and the absence of the record-medium
may be indicated by a hole in the record-medium at the
location of the electrical element.
Subclass:
709
For aligning record-medium with print-point or print-line
(e.g., for facilitating correction of error, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter
wherein the device helps a typist to position a
record-medium* so that a particular point on the
record-medium will be precisely located with respect to the
print-point* at which a type-face* will impact.
(1) Note. A device of this subclass helps the typist to
position a particular character* so that it can be
overprinted for error correction, or to position the
record-medium to start a word or line at the proper point on
the record-medium.
Subclass:
709.1
By transparent indicator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 709. Subject matter
wherein said device has the capability of transmitting light
therethrough, whereby a character* on a record-medium* may be
seen through the device.
Subclass:
709.2
For indicating print-line alignment:.
This subclass is indented under subclass 709. Subject matter
wherein said device has an extended straight edge thereon,
whereby a particular print-line* on the record-medium* will
be precisely located with respect to the print-line at which
a type-face* will impact
(1) Note. The indicator of this subclass is used when a
previously typed sheet is reinserted into the typewriter, and
permits a newly typed line to be aligned relative to
previously typed lines.
Subclass:
710
Including a page counter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter
wherein said device indicates the number of page* units that
have been typed.
Subclass:
711
Including a light:
This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with means for emitting a
visible signal to a typist when a condition of the typewriter
has been reached.
Subclass:
712
Including means producing an audible sound (e.g., plural
tones, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter
wherein a typewriter is provided with means for emitting a
noise that can be heard by a typist when a condition of the
typewriter has been reached.
(1) Note. The noise may be emitted in two or more
frequencies of sound.
Subclass:
713
Attachment for shielding or screening record-medium or
typewriter (e.g., against wind, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a device used to cover
a portion of the typewriter or the record-medium* or used to
protect a portion of the record-medium.
(1) Note. One of the purposes of the shield or screen is to
hide the typed material from curious or prying eyes looking
over the typist's shoulder. Another purpose is to protect the
typewriter of the record-medium from the effects of air
moving in the vicinity of the typewriter.
Subclass:
714
For screening key-board:
This subclass is indented under subclass 713. Subject matter
wherein the device covers the key-board* of a typewriter.
(1) Note. The purpose of the cover is usually to prevent
the typist from seeing the key-board while learning the
"touch" system of typing.
Subclass:
715
Attachment for guiding fingers or hands of typist (e.g., hand
rest):
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a device that separates
the key* elements of a key-board* into groups of keys, each
group including those keys that are usually pressed by a
particular finger of the typist's hands during "touch"
typing, or to a device that serves to support the hands or
the arms of a typist during the typing operation.
Subclass:
716
Attachment for illuminating or viewing (e.g., prism, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a device that casts
light on, or reflects or refracts light from, the
record-medium* or a portion of the typewriter.
(1) Note. The purpose of the device is to enable the typist
to see those portions of the typewriter, or of the text being
typed, that may normally be out of sight. A prism (i.e., an
optically transparent body having planar surfaces angularly
related to one another) may be part of the viewing system.
Subclass:
717
Attachment for holding an article (e.g., pencil, eraser,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 679. Subject matter
wherein significance is attributed to a device that is used
to retain an object within sight or reach of the typist,
which object is used by the typist during the typing
operation.
(1) Note. The object in this subclass may be a pen or
pencil, or correcting paper, or eraser, etc.
Subclass:
718
Copyholder:
This subclass is indented under subclass 717. Subject matter
wherein the object retained is a text from which the typist
is reading as the typing is done.
Subclass:
718.1
Actuated by typewriter (e.g., to simulate line-spacing, for
web copy, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 718. Subject matter
wherein the device is provided with structure that is movable
to indicate to the typist that portion of the text in the
holder that the typist is then reading from and typing, which
structure is caused to be moved by a portion of the
typewriter.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for a copyholder that
moves the text being copied from a relative to a stationary
indicator, or for a copyholder wherein a movable indicator
moves over a stationary text, but in either event the
movement results from actuation of the line-space* lever.
Also found in this subclass is a pointer or indicator that is
actuated by a carriage-feed mechanism and indicates
character* position, and a pointer that is actuated by a
carriage-return mechanism to move a pointer in a line-space
direction.
Subclass:
718.2
With adjustment of line-spacing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 718.1. Subject
matter wherein the text being copied is moved by the
structure in line by line fashion, and wherein the distance
that the text is moved for each line may be changed.
Subclass:
719
MISCELLANEOUS:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter not provided for in the previous subclasses.
(1) Note. A patent for this subclass would include a
typewriter or a portion of a typewriter used for a nontyping
operation.
CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
The following subclasses are collections of published
disclosures pertaining to various aspects of the typewriter
art, which aspects do not form appropriate bases for
subclasses in the foregoing classification, (i.e., subclasses
superior hereto in the schedule) wherein original copies of
patents are placed in the basis of proximate function of the
apparatus. These subclasses assist a search based on remote
function of the apparatus and may be of further assistance to
the searcher, either as a starting point in searching this
class or as an indication of further related fields of search
inside or outside the class. Thus, there is here provided a
second access for retrieval of a limited number of types of
disclosures. Disclosures are placed in these subclasses for
their value as references and as leads to appropriate main or
secondary fields of search, without regard to their original
classification or their claimed subject matter. The
disclosures found in the following subclass are examples,
only, of the indicated subject matter, and in no instance do
they represent the entire extent of the prior art.
Subclass:
900
CHEMICAL-SYMBOL CHARACTER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the typewriter is capable of
imprinting a character* that represents a symbol used in
chemistry.
Subclass:
901
CONTINUOUSLY ROTATING TYPE-HEAD:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with a
type-head that includes a type-set-assemblage*, which
type-head turns continuously and impacts the record-medium*
even as it is turning.
Subclass:
902
STEPPING-MOTOR DRIVE FOR WEB FEED:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with an
electric motor that turns in increments and is used to
line-space* a piece of web record-medium*.
Subclass:
903
STEPPING-MOTOR DRIVE FOR CARRIAGE FEED:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the typewriter is provided with an
electric motor that turns in increments and is used to impart
character-space movements to the carriage.
Subclass:
904
SUBSCRIPT OR SUPERSCRIPT CHARACTER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the typewriter is capable of typing a
character* that is located below the usual print-line* or
above the usual print-line.
Information Products Division -- Contacts
Questions regarding this report should be directed to:
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office
Information Products Division
PK3- Suite 441
Washington, DC 20231
tel: (703) 306-2600
FAX: (703) 306-2737
email: oeip@uspto.gov
Last Modified: 6 October 2000